Home

SUNSET E10_manual

image

Contents

1. CONNECTOR ISO 2593 34 PIN Connection between pinsV 35 DCE Connection between pins V 35 DTE HDI 30 1S0 2593 DB 34 HDI 30 1S0 2593 DB 34 PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION PIN PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION PIN 2 30 RxD RxD RT 2 30 TxD _____________ TxD PS a0 MD ARTS mce 6 DSR DRE 6 DR DRH 7 8 TxCLK TCK AAY 78 TCLK TCLK_ UW 9 10 RxCLK RCK XV 13 14 RD RO RT 12 booo pop F 17 18 TxCLK TCLK YAA 13 14 o III nD sp 16 bR ________________ DRE 17 18 TOLK __ Tek WU 19 20 RxCLK RCK VX 16 DIR DTR_H 22 08 cr D 22 ATS RTS C 24 DCD DCD F 27 RL RL N 25 RL RL N 28 LL ILL 26 IL UL L 29 GND GND B 29 GND GND B Figure 9 11 V 35 Pin out Diagram 9 18 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 V 35 is ITU s specification for a balanced interface It is typically implemented on a 34 pin block type connector CONECTION BETWEEN PINS RS 232 DCE DB 37 RS 232 DB 25 PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION PIN 2 RxD RD 3 mo BD 2 17 RTS __ ATs 4 4 cis cis 5 6 DSR DSR 6 16 DR pm 2 8 pcp pen 9 Tok nok 18 12 RxXCLK PKCLK_ 51 za AL fg 28 UL uy 29 GND _ nD 7 30_REFCLK REFCLK CONECTION BETWEEN PINS RS 232 DTE DB 37 RS 232 DB 25 PIN FUNCTION FUNC
2. Frame 0 TS16 bits MFAS 0000XYXX X spare bits 1 if not used Y MFAS remote alarm 1 if MFAS synchronization is lost Note 1 Frames are transmitted with 30 voice channels on time slots 1 15 and 17 31 2 Timeslot 16 TS16 contains A B C D bits for signaling CASS 3 MFAS framing still includes the original FAS frames and the FAS framing information Figure 10 7 MFAS Framing Format CRC 4 Error Checking in a MultiFrame Format A Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 CRC 4 is often used in E1 transmission to identify possible bit errors CRC 4 allows us to detect errors within the 2 048 Mbps signal while it is in service CRC 4 is based on a simple mathematical calculation per formed on each submultiframe of data The equipment which originates the E1 data calculates the CRC 4 bits for one submultiframe Then it inserts the CRC 4 bits in the CRC 4 positions in the next submultiframe The receiving equipment then performs the reverse mathematical computation on the submultiframe It examines the CRC 4 bits which were transmitted in the next submultiframe then it compares the transmitted CRC 4 bits to the calculated value If there is a discrepancy in the two values a CRC 4 error is reported 10 10 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 There are two things to remember when using CRC 4 errors to determine the performance of an E1 circuit Each individual CRC 4 error does not necessarily correspond toa singlebit error
3. time 2 37V Figure 10 2 AMI Line Coding HDB3 The HDB3 line coding format was adopted in order to eliminate these synchronization problems occurring with AMI In the HDB3 format a string of four consecutive zeros is replaced with a substitute string of pulses containing an intentional bipolar violation As the far end equipment receives the E1 signal it examines the bit stream for these intentional bipolar code violations It will then extract the code and reconstruct the original data The HDB3 code substitutions provide high pulse density so that the receiving equipment is always able to maintain synchroni zation with the received signal For example in the code 1000 0000 HDB3 coding substitutes bipolar violations for the string of zeroes Figure 10 3 portrays the HDB3 format 10 4 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 2 37V 7 MI rule violation time MI rul violation 2 37V7 Figure 10 3 HDB3 Line Coding General rules apply to the substitutions The particular substi tution made is governed by the polarity of the last inserted bit as well as the number of pulses following the previous violation bit If there is an odd number of pulses OOOV is substituted the polarity of V is the same as that of the bit immediately preceding it If there is an even number of pulses BOOV is inserted the polarity of B is opposite to that of the bit immediately preceding it and the polarity of V is th
4. Ch 4 Applications 4 29 charges the battery to approximately 80 of its full capacity in just a few hours The set will fully charge overnight 6 Donotuse any other charger with the SunSet Other chargers will damage the SunSet and will void the Sunrise Telecom warranty 7 To determine if the battery is fully charged observe the LED indicator on the charger If the light is lit continuously then the charger is in a high output mode and is either fast charging or powering it during normal operation When the LED begins to blink the charger is in a trickle charge mode When the light barely flickers at all the battery is fully charged 2 13 Printing from the SunSet E10 The test set is equipped with a standard serial port for both printing and remote control operations 2 13 1 Serial Port Settings The Serial Port is configurable for baud rate parity stop bit bits character and carriage return line feed These settings are configured from within SYSTEM PARAMETERS GENERAL CONFIG In general the SunSet s serial port settings will need to match the settings of your printer Configuring the SunSet s serial port is described in detail in the procedures which follow 2 13 2 Configuring for Printing The test set may be ordered with an optional High Capacity Thermal Printer SS118B or 118C This printer operates by an 8 bit serial RS 232C method and uses thermal paper i e it has no ink cartridge or ribbon which needs to be re
5. e Select YES F1 to enter the ID number in hexadecimal code from 00 to FF e Remember to press the SHIFT key when you are finished 2 2 3 Start Tracer Start Tracer may be accessed through the A MAP INTERFACE Menu It begins the tracing process using the filters specified in SETUP FILTER The tracer display updates twice a second and can capture 50 messages per second Figure 7 23 depicts the Start Tracer screen Ch 7 GSM 7 25 07 15 39 TOTAL NO 3 DISPLAY NO 3 LINE 2 99 01 04 07 14 52 879 SNM DPC CC 85 5D OE 46 90 20 5D 85 CC 1B 6F 60 36 8D D6 OE 81 09 42 6E AD 6B D7 BA RESTART RESUME DECODE Figure 7 23 Start Tracer Screen You may choose between three function keys in this screen RESTART F1 Restart causes the SunSet to restart the trace process PAUSE F2 Pause freezes the display so that messages can be easily observed Messages are stillpassing but are updated only in memory not on the display RESUME F2 will update all the messages to their current state DECODE HEX F3 Decode displays the message contents for analysis Select HEX to show the message in hexadecimal form Figure 7 23 shows the message in hex 2 2 4 VIEW PRINT TRACER e View and print specific data captured by the SunSet Upon entering apreliminary View Printscreen appears stating the total numbers of records in the SunSet You may now specify which of these records you wish to view 1 Place the cursor on the FROM No ite
6. 2 30 RxD RxD 3 16 2 30 TxD TD 2 14 3 4 CTS CTS 5 13 3 4 RTS RTS 4 19 5 6 DSR DSR 6 22 5 6 DTR DTR 20 23 7 8 DCD DCD 8 10 78 TCLK TCLK 24 11 9 10 RxCLK ___________ RxCLK_ 17 9 13 14 RxD RD 3 16 11 12 TxCLK __________ _ TxCLK 15 12 15 16 DSR DSR 6 22 13 14 TxD ____ TxD 2 14 17 18 CTS _ C0715 5 13 15 16 RAYS 3 RTS 4 19 19 20 DCD DOD 8 10 17 18 DTR DTR 20 23 21 22 TxCLK ___TxCLK 15 12 19 20 TOK TOK 24 11 23 24 RxCLK ___RxCLK 17 9 27 AL RL 21 25 RL MML 21 28 LL LL 18 26 LL LL 18 29 GND GND 7 29 GND GND 7 Figure 9 16 RS530 Pin outs Diagram RS530 was derived from the RS449 standard Ituses 25 pins rather than 37 Section 4 Applications 4 1 Point to Point Datacom Testing Data communication uses a standard interface in order for two equipment elements to communicate with each other For example V 35 is a commonly used interface In this test we will use the V 35 as the data communication interface e Use the SunSet E10 to send and receive the signals with another data communication equipment Connect the SunSet and the test equipment as shown in Figure 9 17 Use the following procedure Ch 9 Datacom 9 23 1 Verify that the datacom circuit is not in service This test will disrupt the service 2 From the MAIN MENU enter the TEST CONFIGURATION 3 Configure the interface as follows
7. E bit errors are the best way to test the performance of a 2 048 Mbps line that is in service E bit errors allow you to see trouble anywhere on the circuit even when you do nothave synchronization on a test pattern and even when you are testing only at one point on the circuit E bit errors are available only on a line with MFAS framing PCM 30 where CRC 4 capability is enabled Refer to Figure 3 26 The following measurement terms are used slightly differently in this screen UAS This is a count of E bit UnAvailable Seconds since the beginning of the test E bit UnAvailable Seconds begin at the onset of 10 consecutive severely E bit errored seconds and end at the onset of 10 consecutive non severely E bit errored seconds Loss of signal loss of frame and loss of pattern synchronization will also cause an E bit UnAvailable Second 3 42 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 MEAS 17 30 06 ET 001 07 48 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD HDB3 LINE 1 E BIT EBER 0 0e 07 SES 00 000 SSES SAS SUAS SDGRM 00 000 PAGE DN STOP more Figure 3 26 Line 1 E Bit screen E1 Mode M2100 550 Screen This screen provides pass fail measurements in accordance with ITU M 2100 550 specifications This specification is used where a 2 048 Mbps circuit passes through international boundaries It allocates a certain allowable error rate to each nation that carries the circuit The technician merely needs to enter the appropriate HRP model
8. In Figure 2 2 the Framing is set to PCM 30 by pressing the F1 key Note the following 1 In mostinstances when the desired F key is pressed the cursor will advance to the next line of the display automatically If you wish to change the settings of a previous line simply press the Ch 2 Test Set Description 2 3 Up Arrow key then re select the option using the appropriate F key 2 The options appearing at the bottomofthe screen are associated with a particular setup parameter within that screen As you change the position of your cursor within a setup screen the F key options available to you will also change 3 If more than four F key options are available to the user a more indicator will appear in the F4 position Pressing the F4 key will change the options associated with the F keys RESYNC The RESYNC key resynchronizes on the transmit pattern and restarts the measurementin progress If the transmit pattern is not found the measurementbegins in alive mode with the PAT SYNC light off If the transmit pattern is found then the PAT SYNC LED turns green and logical measurements are made During some operations like ISDN PRI CALL SETUP and VF CHANNEL AC CESS bit errormeasurements are discontinued andthe RESYNC KEY has no effect LIGHT The LIGHT key is used to switch the system backlight off and on Keeping the backlight off when itis not needed will allow the SunSet to maintain its battery charge approximately 15
9. SunSet 10 User s Manual S5257 Version 2 37 MAN 11350 US001 Rev A Sunrise Telecom a step ahead E E _ E 22 Great Oaks Blvd San Jose CA 95119 USA Copyright2001 Sunrise Telecom Incorportated This device uses software either developed by Sunrise or licensed by Sunrise from third parties The software is confidential and proprietary The software is protected by copyright and contains trade secrets of Sunrise or Sunrise s licensors The purchaser of this device agrees that it has received a license solely to use the software as embedded in the device and the purchaser is prohibited from copying reverse engineering decompiling or disassembling the software SunSet E10 h Version 2 37 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Table of Contents CE Certificate Chapter 1 Unpacking Section 1 Unpacking the SunSet Chapter 2 Test Set Description Section 1 Warnings Section 2 Front View Description 2 1 Keys 2 2 White Labels 2 3 Orange Labels 2 4 LED s 2 5 Connector Panel Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions Section 1 Introduction Section 2 Test Configuration 2 1 E1 Test Mode 2 2 E1 MUX Mode 2 3 MUXTEST Mode Section 3 Send Test Pattern 3 1 Standard Patterns 3 2 User Test Patterns 3 3 X 50 Test Patterns Section 4 Measurement Results 4 1 E1 Results amp General Definitions 4 2 E1 MUX Mode Results 4 3 MUXTEST Mode Results 4 4 DATACOM Mode Results Section 5 Other Measurem
10. c Change LISTEN SIDE to L1 Rx d Listen to the speaker and verify that the volume control keys work 9 Verify that Rx 1 FRQ is between 1003 and 1005 and that Rx 1 LVL is between 00 5 and 00 5 10 Change INSERT TYPE to TALK a Check the microphone by blowing into it and hearing it on the speaker 11 Connect a cable from LINE 2 TX to LINE 2 RX 12 Fromthe MAIN MENU setthe TEST CONFIGURATION for E1 L2 Tx L2 Rx TESTPAT PCM 30 ENABLE 2 048M TERM TERM INTERN 13 Verify that line 2 LEDs are correct press the HISTORY key if necessary SIGNAL PCM 30 and CRC DET are green all other line 2 LED s should be off a Verify thatthe PAT SYNC LEDis green andthe BIT ERRORLED is off The line 1 LED s don t matter 14 Connect an HDI 30 to DB37 female interface cable to the first test set configured for DCE a Tothis cable connect an RS449 V 36 DCE adapter cable DB37 male to DB37 female b To this cable connect a Sunrise Telecom RS449 V 36 DTE adapter cable DB37 male to DB37 male Make sure that the ends of the cables with the labels are together they should be the ends without the nuts c Finally connect another HDI 30 to DB37 female cable between the second SunSet E10 and the other cables d Verify the PAT SYNC LED is green all other LED s should be off press the HISTORY key if necessary 15 Enter the MEASUREMENT RESULTS screen for both sets a Press the RESTART key on each Ch 11 Troubleshoot
11. the SET F key value is the opposite of the value already displayed e The E bit item may be changed only if CRC is activated in TEST CONFIGURATION and consequently YES is displayed in the CRC slot in this screen e If E bit is set to AUTO the E bits will be transmitted on the TX INSERT side any time a CRC error is received on the Tx INSERT side Rx e Do not look at the RxDROP setting e Refer to Figure 3 83 Automatic E BIT Transmission e Press SEND F4 to transmit 3 116 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Equipment TxINST LI Tx Rx DROP LIRx or L2 Rx E bit AA Figure 3 83 Automatic E Bit Transmission The E bits may be transmitted manually e 11 is used for no E bit errors 10 or 01 for 500 E bit errors per seconds e 00 for 1000 E bit errors per second e The default setting is for 11 3 FAS WORD FAS WORD displays the FAS Frame Alignment Signal 0011011 Words This line is for viewing only 4 MFAS WORD Set bits 5 8 to any combination e Bits 5 8 have the pattern xyxx where x represents spare bits they should be set to 1 when not used e Y is used for the MFAS remote alarm it should be setto 1 if MFAS synchronization is lost 5 MFAS ABCD bits These are the default ABCD bits used for channels 1 through 30 in PCM 30 Framing Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 117 e They are transmitted in timeslot 16 of frames 2 through 16 of the MFAS e Avoid using 0000 which will cause false framing
12. 1 Try switching the set off then switching it on again 2 Try the ERASE NV RAM menu option NOTE this will erase all user programmed information and history buffers within the SunSet When the ERASE NV RAM has completed switch off the SunSet for 5 seconds then switch it on Problem Measurements are not working properly Loss of Signal no Pattern Synch Suggestion 1 Verify signal INTERFACE and MODE settings in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu 2 Verify that all jacks are connected properly according to the circuit graphic 3 Ensure that Tx is plugged to Rx and vice versa 4 Twist the plugs inside of the jacks and ensure that all plugs are inserted fully Problem Test Patterns will not synch Suggestions 1 Press AUTO to force the SunSetto resynchronize on the Pattern Framing type and line Coding type 2 Verify that desired pattern is being sent in the SEND TEST PATTERN menu 11 2 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 Problem Test patterns will not synch with another test set Suggestions 1 Verify that PATTERN INVERSION is DISABLED in the OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAMETERS menu 2 Use VIEW RECEIVED DATA to examine the pattern being received If you are still having difficulty contact your distributor directly or contact Sunrise Telecom at Tel 1 800 701 5208 24 hours or Fax 1 408 363 8313 Section 2 Calibration 2 1 Calibration Procedure The SunSet E10 calibrates itself every time a full self test is perf
13. A small bar indicator will appear at the top right of the screen visually indicating changes HISTORY The HISTORY key is used to turn off any flashing LEDs The LEDs flash to indicate any error alarm or caution condition which occurred previously but which is no longer present Arrow Keys A Cursor Up Arrow The up arrow key is used to move the cursor up Y Cursor Down Arrow The down arrow key is used to move the cursor down Cursor Right Arrow The right arrow key is used to move the cursor to the right 2 6 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 lt Cursor Left Arrow The left arrow key is used to move the cursor to the left ESCAPE The ESCAPE key moves you back toward the main menu To return to the main menu keep pressing ESCAPE until you arrive there ENTER The ENTER key performs three functions 1 Whenamenu item is highlighted andthe ENTER key is pressed the SunSet will display the screen forthe highlighted menu item 2 If setups are complete in a data entry screen pressing ENTER will often return you to the previous menu 3 Ina few cases pressing the ENTER key is required after the user finishes entering data in a given screen In these cases the SunSet will execute the inputs on y after the ENTER key has been pressed Such situations are not common in SunSet operations an example is DTMF MFR2 DP dialing in VF CHAN NEL ACCESS In most of the high usage functions it is not necessary to press ENTER to invoke
14. D E F G and H e Activate the SHIFT key and press either O or 1 from the keypad e Notice that the cursor automatically moves to the right each time you press a 0 or 1 8 10 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 e If you should make a mistake while entering the bits deacti vate the SHIFT key and use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the bitin error Repress the SHIFT key and re enter the bit e When you are finished remember to deactivate the SHIFT key For Division 3 this item sets the housekeeping bit A e Activate the SHIFT key and press either 0 or 1 e Remember to deactivate the SHIFT key when finished 10 X 50 Signal Options 4 bits of either O or 1 Determines the four bit A B C D channel associated signal ling CAS which will be transmitted in the selected phase s and octet s e Activate the SHIFT key and press either a 0 or 1 for each bit e Notice that the cursor automatically moves to the right once a0 or 1 is entered e If you make a mistake while entering the bits deactivate the SHIFT key and use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the bit in error Repress the SHIFT key and re enter the bit e When you are finished remember to deactivate the SHIFT key 2 2 View X 50 Info e View information about the received housekeeping bits A through H e This screen is for viewing only e To change your transmitted housekeeping bits you may do so in the X 50 SETUP screen An example of the Division 2 VIEW X
15. DCS Digital Cross connect System DET Detected DGRM Degraded Minute DIG Digital DN Down DPNSS Digital Private Network Signalling System DTE Data Terminal Equipment DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency E E1 2 048 Mbps signal 13 2 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 EBER E bit Error Rate EBER E bit Error Rate EBIT E bit EIR Equipment Identity Register ERR INJ Error Injection ES Errored Second ESF Extended Super Frame ET Elapsed Time EXTERN External F F1 Function 1 FALM Frame Alarm Seconds FAS Frame Alignment Signal FBE Framing Bit Error FBER Framing Bit Error Rate FE Frame Error FE1 Fractional E1 FREQ Frequency FRM Frame G GSM Global System for Mobile communications H HDBS High Density Bipolar Three HEX hexadecimal HOLDSCRN Hold Screen HLR Home Location Register Hz Hertz INTERN Internal INV Inverted ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ISUP ISDN User Part Ch 13 Abbreviations 13 3 K Kbps KiloBits Per Second L LAP B Link Access Protocol Balance LBO Line Build Out LED Light Emitting Diode LOFS Loss of Frame Second LOG Logical Error BIT error LOS Loss of Signal LOSS Loss of Signal Second Lpp Level peak to peak LVL Level MAX Maximum Mbps megabits per second MFAL Multiframe Alarm Seconds MFAS Multiframe Alignment Signal MFC Multi Frequency Compelled MFE Multiframe
16. FALM 3 35 LOFS 3 35 MFAL 3 36 MFE 3 36 Multiframe 3 53 PCM 30 3 8 PCM 31 3 8 VF Analysis 3 65 frequency 3 35 Frequency Synchronization 4 11 FRM 3 32 Front View Description 2 1 FRWD SEIZE 3 71 FSN 5 5 5 6 5 7 G G 703 10 1 10 7 Datacom Interface 9 12 G 703 Pin outs 9 21 G 703 Pulse Mask 3 55 G 704 10 1 G 706 10 1 G 821 3 40 10 1 G 821 Measurements Configuration 3 106 G 821 Screen 3 40 G 826 3 46 G 826 Measurements Configuration 3 106 G 826 screen 3 46 GRAPHIC screen 2 4 GRAPHIC KEY 3 3 Graphic key 2 4 graphic screen 3 4 GSM 16k BERT 7 33 Configuration 7 9 Index Control Channels 7 3 Filter 7 22 Monitor 7 29 Network Architecture 7 1 Protocol 7 4 Radio Transmission 7 2 Tracer 7 15 View Tracer 7 16 GSM Analysis 7 9 GSM Technology Overview 7 1 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT 7 28 GTT 5 4 H HDB3 3 6 3 104 HDLC 9 5 HEX 3 50 Hexadecimal keys 2 8 Histogram Analysis 3 60 Current Histogram 3 60 HISTORY key 2 6 2 8 HLR 7 24 HOLDSCR 3 31 HRP MODEL configuration 3 107 Hyper Terminal 4 40 Hz PPM 3 35 I frame 6 5 1 430 1 431 6 2 1 441 6 3 1 450 6 3 1 451 6 3 idle 3 57 Idie channel ABCD 3 111 Idie Channel Code 3 111 idle signal 3 65 IMEI 7 1 IMSI 7 1 In service testing 4 8 10 10 INPUT 3 33 INSERT TYPE 3 67 xi Instrument Stand Installation 1 2 Integrated Circuits 9 1 Intentional BPV 10 4 Interdigit 3 82 3 84 INTERDIGIT PRD 3 72 Interface Pins 9 6 9 18 internal timing 3
17. Figure 4 4 Plugging in THRU Mode 4 5 Ch 4 Applications Section 2 Basic Applications 2 1 Accept a New Circuit Here is a procedure for accepting a new circuit The setup is illustrated in Figure 4 5 1 Verify that the span is not in service This acceptance test will disrupt service Ensure that there is a loopback device at the far end of the span 2 From the MAIN MENU enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu press ENTER Use the following configuration TEST MODE El TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TX SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit design CRC 4 as specified by the circuit design TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK INTERN a Press the ENTER key when all of the settings are correct 3 Move the cursor to the TEST PATTERN menu item and press ENTER a Highlight the pattern you want to send Press ENTER 4 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as shown in Figure 4 5 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking history lights and turn them off b Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green 4 6 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 39140 y3vad007 yse Jepunjuauudinbe SASINSYd YINWOLSNO Te ASHUN LYOd TVBS er 10 eNUED 5 Accept a New Span Figure 4 4 7 Ch 4 Applications 5 Enter the MEASUREMENT RESULTS menu item Verify that the circuit performs to your company
18. GSM GSM Technology Overview GSM Network Architecture GSM Radio Transmission GSM Protocol TRAU Frames GSM Analysis Menus A bis Interface Configuration A bis Monitor A bis Traffic Layer 2 Traffic A MAP Interface A Map Configuration Setup Filter Start Tracer View Print Tracer GSM Voice TRAU BERT GSM Monitor Voice TRAU XMT GSM 16k BERT SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 11 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 SunSet 4 Version 2 37 Section 1 GSM Technology Overview 1 1 GSM Network Architecture GSM Global System for Mobile communication is governed by ETSI transmission standards GSM technology uses a digital standard for voice and data applications Figure 7 1 shows the different parts of a GSM network PSTN ISDN PSPDN CSPDN Mobile Base Station Network Station Subsystem Subsystem Figure 7 1 GSM Network The three major components of a GSM network include the Mobile Station MS Base Station Subsystem BSS and Network Subsystem NSS This GSM network is then connected to a fixed network like a Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN AMobile Station MS consists of a Mobile Equipment ME and Subscriber Identity Module SIM The SIM is physically a smart card which identifies the subscriber to the GSM network It also authenticates and encrypts a subscriber s voice identified by the International Mobile Subscriber Identity IMSI Once a SIM cardis inserted to a GSM t
19. Layer 2 SAPI Options O 63 NONE F3 Ch 6 ISDN 6 19 Select the SAPI value e Use NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to make the selection This refers to the Service Access Point Identifier There are four valid SAPI values defined by CCITT e 0 Callcontrol procedures e 1 packet mode using Q 932 call procedures e 16 Packet communication X 25 level 3 procedures e 63Layer2 management procedures 2 LAYER 2 TEI Options 0 127 Select the desired TEI value e Pressthe NEXT F1 orPREVIUS F2 keys to reach the desired value The Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI identifies the user device CCITT Q 921 has defined three groups of TEI values 0 63 Fixed or nonautomatic TEI assignment user equipment 64 126 Automatic TEI assignment user equipment 127 Group TEI for broadcast data link connection 3 FILTER TYPE Options CALLREF F1 CALLED F2 CALLER F3 NONE F4 a Select the filter type e CALLREF F1 identifies the call based on the Call Refer ence number the ISDN switch puts on each particular call transaction e CALLED F2 refers to the destination number of the transaction e CALLER F3 refers to the originating number of the transaction e NONE F4 provides no filtering elements this allows the SunSet to capture all ISDN messages b Enter the numeric value in the number field Press release the SHIFT key and enter the numbers directly from the keypad 6 20 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 2 3 2 Setu
20. MODE settings b You may change the status of the transmit leads e The G 703 DATACOM INTERFACE does not present options which may be changed e While in the GRAPH mode move the cursor to the control leads you want to change using the arrow keys e Press the ON F1 or OFF F2 key to change the state The following F keys are available e On F1 OFF F2 press to change the state of the highlighted lead e FREEZE RESUME F3 press to stop or restart the reporting of lead state data TABLE GRAPH F4 press this key to change the presentation of the data See Figure 9 7 for the Table screen Ch 9 Datacom 9 13 MEAS 22 36 15 DATACOM INTERFACE DTE TYPE RS232 STATE ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 7 ON 473 OFF FREEZE GRAPH Figure 9 7 Datacom Interface Table e Inthe TABLE mode you will also see the TIME the state of a lead last changed c When FREEZE is selected new F keys appear e Use the PREVIUS F1 and NEXT F2 keys to scroll through the pages of data 2 3 DATACOM Measurement Results e 2 pages of measurement results are available e See Chapter 3 1 1 for Measurement Results Definitions See Figure 9 8 for screen 1 bit error results and Figure 9 9 for screen 2 block error results Results definitions specific to this screen are DL This is a count of the number of occurrences of Data Loss DLS This is the number of seconds during which data was lost PATL Th
21. Max hold Min hold Current clock slips wander Signal level V V in V and dBdsx 7 to 36 dB Block Errors Block Error Rate Print on event can be enabled or disabled Print at timed interval selectable over 1 to 9999 minutes or at end of test Measurement duration continuous or timed settable up to 999 hours 59 minutes Programmable time and date for start and stop OTHER MEASUREMENTS Pulse mask analysis Scan period 500 ns Onscreen pulse shape display with G 703 Pulse Mask verifica tion Displays pulse width rise time amp fall time in nano seconds overshoot undershoot Pulse shape storage and printing Histogram analysis Graphical display of accumulated errors Bit Code CRC FAS MFAS and alarms LOS AIS LOF FAS RAI MFAS RAI events for L1 Rx and L2 Rx Stores and prints 60 days by hour and 60 hours by minute Storage of one complete histogram amp current Propagation delay Round trip signal transmission delay Measures in micro seconds and Uls Unit Intervals View received data View live traffic 4096 bits long 16 full frames one multi frame in PCM 30 or PCM 31 Displays 8 time slots per screen Stores 64 scrollable screens hold screen print Information displayed in ASCII reverse ASCII Binary and HEX View time slot 16 MFAS NMFAS ABCD in PCM 30 16 Frames View time slot 0 FAS NFAS CRC MFAS CRC words E bits Sa4 to Sa8 A bit in PCM 30 amp 31 16 Frames Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 3 Save
22. Printer Communication port 8 DIN RS232 V 24 serial port Text standard ASCII scape sequence code Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 11 Graphics standard Bit image Graphics Mode dot matrix Remote VT102 terminal emulation remote control optional Operating Temperature OxC to 50xC Storage Temperature 20xC to 70xC Humidity 5 to 90 non condensing Size 10 5 cm x 6 cm x 27 cm Weight 1 2 kg approx 2 0 Configurations Here are the various items which can be ordered in addition to the basic SunSet E10 The following E10 packages provide everything you willneed in one convenient order number However if you prefer you may order most items seperately Model Name and Description Test Set SSE10 SunSet E10 with 75Q unbalanced BNC f connectors Includes NimH internal battery Universal Charger SS138 Us ers Manual SS257 and software cartridge Alternate connectors may be specified at time of order A Replace all 75Q BNC f with 1 6 5 6 mm 75Q unbal connectors B Replace all 75Q BNC f with BR2 f 120Q bal connec tors Modularized Datacom SS251 Datacom Module Includes HDI 30 to DB 37 f Adapter Cable DCE and DTE adapters for V 35 X 21 V 11 RS232 V 24 RS449 V 36 G 703 co directional Tx Rx 3 pin CF SS251DC Installed datacom module hardware in E10 function disabled 12 12 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 SW251DC Software for datacom testing SS251DC required SS251 DCC Full datacom cables a
23. RSC Reset Confirm OE RSR Reset Request oD UDT Unitdata 09 UDTS Unitdata Service OA Table 5 15 SCCP Messages The filtering options for SNM are 1 SLS CODE Options NONE F1 0 to F The Signalling Link Selection Code is a 4 bit long code It is used where appropriate in load sharing e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number 2 HEAD CODE Options 00 to FF e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number The Heading codes for SNM are shown in Table 5 16 5 20 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 NM H in hex CBA Changeback Acknowledgment Signal 61 CBD Changeback Declaration Signal 51 CNP Connection Not Possible Signal 48 CNS Connection Not Successful Signal 38 COA Changeover Acknowledgment Signal 21 COO Changeover Order Signal 11 CSS Connection Successful Signal 28 DLC Signalling Data Link Connection Order Signal 18 ECA Emergency Changeover Acknowledgment Signal 22 ECO Emergency Changeover Order Signal 12 LFU Link Forced Uninhibit Message 66 LIA Link Inhibit Acknowledgment Message 36 LID Link Inhibit Denied Message 56 LIN Link Inhibit Message 16 LLI Link Local Inhibit Test Signal 76 LRI Link Remote Inhibit Test Signal 86 LUA Link UninhibitAcknowledgment 46 LUN Link Uninhibit Message 26 RCP Signalling Route Set Test Cluster Prohibited Signa
24. Verify that a Bit Error is measured in the Datacom X 50 Error screen 8 22 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 1 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 4 1 Section 3 Section 4 4 1 4 2 Chapter 9 Datacom Datacom Technology Overview 1 Introduction 1 Communication Components 1 Transmission Basics 2 Data Networks 3 Call Control Procedure 4 Physical Layer Protocol 5 Datacom Menus 7 Datacom Mode Test Configuration 7 Datacom Interface 10 Datacom Timing 13 Datacom Measurement Results 14 Other Measurements 16 Propagation Delay 16 Datacom Interface Pin outs 18 Datacom Applications 23 Point to Point Datacom Testing 23 Test the Datacom Port of a 2M Multiplex 26 SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 SunSet EO Version 2 37 Section 1 Datacom Technology Overview 1 1 Introduction Data communication touches upon every area of our lives Since the rapid technological development in the areas of ICs Integrated Circuits almost every form of communication can be transmitted digitally Most people associate data communication with computers however recent applications of data communica tion include voice video and image digitization Due to the accuracy and cost effectiveness of digitizing it is important to understand the components and the process inadata communications network 1 2 Communication Components In digital computers data is stored in individual bits These bits can have two defined states 1 on and 0 off
25. dBm 6 5 4 7 TWST PAGE UP PAGE DN PRINT RESTART Figure 3 55 DTMF MF Analysis The DTMF MF Analysis shows the following for the received digit e High and low frequencies For example the second digit 2 has high and low frequencies of 1982 and 1502 Hz respectively e dBm level e Interdigit the silent time between digits tones e Period the duration of a multitone digit e Twist the difference in power between the two frequencies of a digit Press Page Up F1 and Page Down F2 to see the rest of the digits received 3 82 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 OSE 2756 LINE 1 01 sec LINE 2 01 sec ABCD 0000 INIT ABCD 0000 INIT ABCD 0011 00 00 ABCD 0011 00 20 ABCD 1011 00 60 ABCD 1011 00 65 ABCD 0000 00 70 ABCD 0000 00 75 STOP RESTART Figure 3 56 CAS Analysis e For CAS live signals are displayed e The STOP function key will freeze the screen e The RESTART key will restart the analysis e Press PAGE UP and PAGE DN to scroll through the analysis 19 05528 DIMF MF DP CAS ANALYSIS DIGIT PPS PPRD BRK 120 58 120 58 120 58 120 58 120 58 120 58 120 58 O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PAGE UP PAGE DN PRINT RESTART Figure 3 57 DP Analysis PPS Pulses Per Second e PPRD Pulse Period duration of a complete off hook on hook cycle Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 83 e BRK the percentage of time a pulse is OFF compared to the full pulse off hook on hook period e Interdigit the
26. s LEDs for Line 1 and Line 2 show proper framing coding and no errors In other words you should see green LEDs for CODING FRAMING and you should see no red LEDs e Press the GRAPHIC key and verify that you are in THRU Mode f Next you should connect the cord from Line 2 Tx to the IN jack of Equipment 1 g Lastly connect the cord from Line 1 Tx to the IN jack of Equipment 2 Note The circuit will be disrupted for two or more seconds while the cords are moved Ch 4 Applications 4 49 Test Pattern All Zeroes Test Pattern 1 4 EQUIPMENT 2 EQUIPMENT 1 ee Cla Figure 4 24 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplex 3 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off a Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green 4 Press the ESCAPE key to return to the Main Menu a Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA Since you selected Rx DROP L2 Rx in TEST CONFIGURA TION the data displayed here is from Line 2 Rx b Verify that the pattern sent by Equipment 2 is shown here on all the timeslots According to Figure 4 24 you should see the 1 4pattern You have just ascertained that Line 2 is being received properly by the SunSet E10 5 Press the ESCAPE key to return to the Main Menu Enter TEST CONFIGURATION Change Rx DROP to L1 Rx 6 Escape back to the Main Menu a Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA This time the data displayed refers
27. 00 000 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 3 24 G 821 Screen Refer to the Measurement Definitions section as needed SIG ALM Screen This screen presents alarm and measurement parameters relating to the E1 signal Refer to Figure 3 25 Refer to the Measurement Definitions section as needed MEAS 17 25 41 ET 001 02 26 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD HDB3 LINE 1 ALM SIG LVL 0 3 dB LVL 0 3 dB Lpp 0 3 dB LVL 2 30 V LVL 2 29 V PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 3 25 SIG ALM screen E1 Mode Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 41 LINE 2 ALM SIG Screen Page 7 of E1 Mode s Measurement Results displays the Alarm Signal measurements for Line 2 This screen is similar to Line 1 ALM SIG screen However the level measurements LVL LVL Lpp are not given for Line 2 LINE 1 E BIT Screen The E BIT screen presents all measurements related to the E BIT information The 2 048 Mbps terminating equipment transmits an E bit error onthe 2 048 Mbps line when it receives a CRC error onits incoming 2 048 Mbps signal E bit error transmission is a relatively new feature in 2 048 Mbps transmission equipment Therefore it is likely there is embedded equipment which does not transmit the E bit error information correctly For this reason when the test set receives an E bit error it does not light the Error LED and it does not update the summary measurements E bit errors are only shown on the E BIT results screen
28. 0001 04 ABCD 1101 04 26 MFR2 10 04 36 MFR2 b01 04 04 MFR2 12 04 58 MFR2 b01 04 61 MRF2 11 04 80 STOP RESTART SCAN Figure 3 62 MFC Tracer The following function keys are available in this screen STOP F1 STOP stops the tracing process a Press PAGE UP F1 or PAGE DN F2 to view the traced MFC messages RESTART F3 RESTART empties the existing buffer and restarts the tracing process SCAN F4 SCAN starts the test set looking for the first channel to go off hook enabling you to trace signalling even when you don t know which channel to look at When achannel goes off hook the entire call is traced 3 90 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 6 7 3 MF CAS View Print Tracer e Clear print or view the buffer that stores the MF CAS records Upon entering this item an initial View Print Tracer screen appears This screen shows the total number of records stored 01 21 06 MF CAS VIEW PRINT TRACER TOTAL RECORD 2 FROM No 1 TO No ae CLR ALL PRINT VIE Figure 3 63 MF CAS View Print Tracer Screen 1 Specify which records to view in the FROM No and TO Nolines This screen gives you three F key options CLR ALL F1 This key clears all records stored in the MF CAS buffer You will be asked to press ENTER to continue the clearing process This two step process safeguards against accidentally erasing important records from the buffer Press ESCAPE if you decide not to conti
29. 1 6 Physical Layer Protocol Section 2 Datacom Menus 2 1 Datacom Mode Test Configuration 2 2 Datacom Interface 2 2 1 Datacom Timing 2 3 Datacom Measurement Results 2 4 Other Measurements 2 4 1 Propagation Delay Section 3 Datacom Interface Pin outs Section 4 Datacom Applications 4 1 Point to Point Datacom Testing 4 2 Chapter 10 Technology Overview Section 1 E1 Technology Overview 1 1 Introduction 1 2 Technical Standards 1 3 Basic Definitions 1 4 Converting a Voice Signal 1 5 2 048 Mbps Data Rate 1 6 Line Coding 1 7 Signal Levels 1 8 2 048 Mbps Framing 1 9 MFR2 DTMF DP Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Section 1 Troubleshooting Section 2 Calibration 2 1 Calibration Procedure Section 3 Customer Service Chapter 12 Specs and Configs Section 1 Specifications Section 2 Configurations SunSet EO Version 2 37 WNOWWNHA H a 12 Chapter 13 Abbreviations Warranty SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 lt gt sunrise Teecom DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY for SUNRISE TELECOM SunSet E10 Manufacturer Sunrise Telecom 22 Great Oaks Boulevard San Jose CA 95119 USA Statement of Conformity Based on test results using appropriate standards the product is in conformity with Electromagnetic Compatability Directive 89 336 EEC Low Voltage Direction 73 23 EEC Sample Tests Standards used EN 55011 1993 Radio Frequency Product Family Emission Standard EN 50082 1 1992 Electromagnetic Compatability Generic Immunity Standard IEC 8
30. 1 GSM Monitor See Figure 7 27 Use this procedure to monitor GSM transmis sions GSM LINE 2 Figure 7 27 GSM Monitor screen Ch 7 GSM 7 29 1 From the GSM VOICE TRAU BERT menu cursor to GSM MONITOR press enter 2 Observe the received TimeSlot subchannel activity reading the TimeSlots across the screen Definitions A 16 kbps Abis signalling Abis 64 kbps Abis signalling D Data Idle speech idle O Operations amp Maintenance S Speech Up Arrow uplink direction Down Arrow downlink direction Unknown Note When you are on a speech channel highlighted S Timing Alignment will be reported in the bottom right side of the screen in microseconds if applicable a Press F1 to change the observed line Line 1 or Line 2 b Press F3 to Jump the cursor between timeslots 3 Press D amp I F2 for Drop amp Insert testing The dropped signal will be received at the test set speaker A prerecorded Sunrise Telecom message will be inserted onto the same timeslot subchannel of the transmitted signal Note You mustbein RESUME mode to listen to the decoded RPE LTP speech signal Press PAUSE F3 to mute the speaker and RESUME F3 to listen 3 2 VOICE TRAU XMT e Transmit a prerecorded speech message e Observe received C bits e At any time you may press the PAUSE key to freeze the display Press RESUME F1 to resume measurements 7 30 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 04 53 25
31. 1 Rx or Line 2 Rx AMI or HDB3 Through Multiport sinusoidal 50 duty cycle requires optional SS251 Datacom Module Loop Recovered through Line 1 Rx or Line 2 Rx signal selectable AMI or HDB3 Pulse shape 3 0V 10 at 120 ohm 2 37V 10 at 75 ohm Conforms to ITU T G 703 ERROR ALARM INJECTION Code and or bit error programmable burst of 1 to 9999 errors manually or continuous rate of 2x10 to 1x10 CRC 4 FAS E bit single error Generate AIS TS16 AIS PCM 30 MFAS RAI PCM 30 FAS RAI PCM 30 amp 31 alarms E1 RECEIVERS Frequency 2 048 Mbps 6000 bps Input sensitivity Terminate Bridge 6 to 43 dB with Automatic Line Build Out Monitor 15 to 30 dB resistive Impedances Terminate Monitor 75 ohm or optional 120 ohm Bridge gt 5000 ohm Jitter tolerance to ITU T G 823 MEASUREMENTS Error Type Code bit CRC 4 FAS MFAS E bit errors slips Typical error type reports error count error rate ES ES SES SES UAS UAS EFS EFS AS AS DM DM ITU T G 821 Analysis error type reports Bit error and rate ES ES SES SES EFS EFS UAS UAS AS AS DM DM ITU T G 826 Analysis CRC 4 block based error type reports EB BBE BBE ES ES SES SES UAS UAS AS AS 12 2 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 DM DM M 2100 550 pass fail analysis programmable time period and HRP Alarm statistics LOS seconds LOF seconds AIS seconds FAS RAI seconds MFAS RAI seconds Frequency
32. 12 Invoke ID 7 25 ISDN 6 1 Address Field 6 4 Applications 6 30 Call setup 6 15 call setup 6 30 configuration 6 10 Control field 6 5 data link signalling 6 2 framing 6 30 Information Field 6 5 message group identifier 6 22 message structure 6 4 message types 6 23 monitoring 6 37 Physical layer 6 2 Placing a Data Call 6 39 Protocol 6 2 Running a BERT 6 39 Setup Filter 6 19 Tracer 6 26 transmit clock 6 12 ISDN Analysis Menus 6 10 ISDN Network Architecture 6 1 ISDN Primary Rate Menu 6 10 ISDN Protocol 6 2 ISDN Technology Overview 6 1 ISRM 6 18 ISUP 5 4 Filtering 5 17 ISUP Messages 5 7 ITU 10 1 ITU G 704 3 112 xii K Keys 2 1 2 1 2 2 arrow 2 6 ERR INJ 2 6 Error inject 2 5 ESCAPE 2 7 F keys 2 3 GRAPHIC 2 4 HISTORY Key 2 6 LIGHT 2 4 RESYNC 2 4 SHIFT 2 1 L L2 monitor flag 7 11 L2 MONITR 6 21 L2MON 7 11 L3 Decode 7 10 Language 3 128 LAP 6 6 LAP fields DASS2 6 7 LAP D 6 3 Layer 2 Traffic 7 19 layer 3 signalling protocol 7 11 LEDs 2 8 BIT ERR 2 9 Chapter 5 error 2 10 Signal 2 9 LOW BATT 2 8 PAT SYNC 2 9 PCM 30 2 9 PCM 31 2 9 Left Arrow 2 7 Length Indicator 5 5 Level 2 048 Mbps signal 10 6 LI 5 5 5 6 5 7 Lights description 2 8 Line code 3 6 Line Coding 10 3 LINE FREQUENCY screen SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 39 Link Access Protocol 6 6 Link Status Signal Unit 5 5 7 22 LL 9 6 Load Samples 3 119 Local Loop 10 13 Local Loopback 9 6 LOCK UNLOCK 3 32 LOFS 3 35 loop timing 3 13
33. 16 is used for either common channel or channel associated signalling as required Please note that in Figure 3 35 the template for the even frames 0000xyxx applies only to Frame 0 All other frames follow the template shown above the odd frames ABCDabcd Bits 1 4 of frame O are used as the multiframe alignment signal MFAS As seen in Figure 3 35 MFAS is 0000 The last four bits of frame O are designated as xyxx X is a spare bit and is set to 1 if not used Y represents an alarm indication to the remote end In undisturbed operation y will be 0 In an alarm condition y willbe 1 The rest of the frames contain signalling channels designated a b c andd Frame 1 contains channels 1 and 16 frame 2 contains channels 2 and 17 and so forth until frame 15 which contains channels 15 and 30 5 4 Pulse Mask Analysis The Pulse Mask Analysis option enables you to measure the quality of an E1 wave form The measured results compare favorably with pulse shape measurements obtained from testing with a digital oscilloscope Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 53 eThe Pulse Mask Analysis is performed for any received test pattern or live signal and line interface mode e The received signal shape is displayed on the SunSet s LCD screen e The ITU G 703 pulse mask can be superimposed for fast inspection e The SunSet will store the present pulse shape for later viewing The Pulse Mask Analysis menu is shown in Figure 3 36 MEAS 08 07 06 PUL
34. 3 3 02 E1 Mode Graphic 3 4 3 03 Select a Timeslot 3 7 3 04 Slave to Slave Timing 3 10 3 05 Loop Slave Timing 3 11 3 06 External Timing 3 12 Vv 3 07 Internal Timing 3 13 3 08 E1 MUX Menu 3 14 3 09 MUXTEST Menu 3 17 3 10 Internal Timing 3 17 3 11 Slave Timing 3 18 3 48 3 12 MUXTEST Configura tion Tx E1 3 19 3 13 MUXTEST Configura tion BERT TX E1 3 20 3 14 MUXTEST Mode BERT TX RS232 3 21 3 15 MUXTEST BERT TX RS232 3 21 3 16 Test Pattern Screen 3 22 3 17 User Test Pattern screen 3 25 3 18 User Test Pattern Label Screen 3 26 3 19 X 50 Test Pattern Screen 3 29 3 20 Measurement Results Screen 3 30 3 21 Line 1 Summary Screen E1 Mode 3 38 3 22 Line Frequency Screen E1 Mode 3 39 3 23 Line Frequency No Ref Signal 3 40 3 24 G 821 Screen 3 41 3 25 SIG ALM screen E1 Mode 3 41 3 26 Line 1 E Bit screen E1 Mode 3 43 3 27 Line 1 M 2100 550 screen E1 Mode 3 44 3 28 Line 1 Block Error E1 Mode 3 45 3 29 Line 1 G 826 Screen E1 Mode 3 46 3 30 Datacom G 821 Results E1 MUX Mode 3 47 3 31 OTHER MEASURE vi MENTS 3 48 3 32 View Received Data 3 49 3 33 FAS Frame Words 3 51 3 34 FAS Frame Words PCM 30 3 52 3 35 MFAS Frame Words 3 53 3 36 Pulse Shape Analysis Menu 3 54 3 37 Pulse Shape Analy sis 3 55 3 38 C bit Analysis 3 57 3 39 Histogram Analysis Menu 3 60 3 40 Current Histogram Menu 3 61 3 41 Current Histogram Screen 3 62 3 42 Measurement Types 3
35. 33 BIT ERR 2 9 BIT ERR Light 2 9 Bit Error SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 LED 2 9 Bit Stream 10 1 bitDECO 7 17 BLOCK 3 45 BLOCK ERROR 3 45 9 16 Block Error Ratio Block Size 3 105 BLOCK ERROR screen 3 44 Block Errors Block Size 3 105 BPV 3 34 BREAK percentage 3 72 BRIDGE 3 9 BSC 7 2 BSN 5 5 5 6 5 7 BSS 7 1 BTNR 190 6 5 6 22 BTS 7 1 Buffer Clear Buffer 3 126 C C link 5 2 C Bit Analysis 3 57 C Bit analysis framing 3 58 C bit coding GSM 7 7 C bits definitions 3 58 C R BIT 6 21 Calibration Procedure 11 3 Call Control Procedure 9 4 CAS 3 69 X 50 8 11 CASS 10 9 CC Message Types 7 13 CCH 7 3 CCITT 7 22 CCM 7 19 CCS7 5 1 Certificate of Origin w iii Channel 10 2 Channel Bandwidth 10 2 Channel data 4 17 Charger 2 11 4 29 Index CHINA 24 7 22 CHINA14 7 22 CIC 5 14 CIC CODE 5 17 Cigarette Lighter Battery Charger 4 29 Circuit Identification Code 5 14 CK 5 5 5 6 5 7 Clear to Send 9 6 CLK SR 3 32 CLKSLIP 3 34 Clock Slip 3 36 3 38 CLR PRINT BUFFER 3 126 Code error CODE ERR LED 2 10 CODE errors 3 34 10 3 Coding 3 104 10 3 common channel 7 12 Compelled Dialing 10 13 Compelled signalling 3 85 Configuration General 3 122 Configurations 12 12 Connecting the Cords 4 1 Connector Panel 2 11 2 11 2 12 CONTINU 3 31 Converting a Voice Signal 10 2 CRC 3 34 3 116 CRC DET LED 2 10 CRC 4 3 6 3 47 3 51 10 8 10 10 CRC LED 2 10 CTS 9 4 9 6 Current Histogram 3 60 Customer Service 11 7 Cyc
36. 50 INFO is shown in Figure 8 10 Ch 8 X 50 8 11 17 17 28 VIEW X 50 INFO HOUSE KEEPING ABCDEFGH 01100110 Figure 8 10 Division 2 View X 50 Info Please note that for Division 3 only the A housekeeping bit is displayed Section 3 X 50 Applications 3 1 Testing a 64K X 50 Frame Within a 2 Mbps Signal In the following procedure the E10 receives and transmits a single 64 kbps X 50 frame inside a 2 Mbps signal 1 From the Main Menu enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS X 50 SETUP a At the top line X 50 select ENABLE F1 to set up your X 50 frame b Before continuing make sure that the reverse video X50 message is displayed at the top of the screen Escape to the Main Menu 2 Enter Test Configuration a Choose E1 Mode and the configure the set as in Figure 8 11 8 12 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 20 30 24 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE El Tx INSERT L1 TX Rx DROP L1 RX Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING PCM 30 CRC 4 YES TIME SLOT I RXLVL 1 TERM RXLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK L1 RX Figure 8 11 Test Configuration Note FRAMING CRC 4 and TIMESLOT may be set as specified by the span design Therefore for these items Figure 8 11 shows only sample settings and other selections may also be valid for this procedure b For TIME SLOT you may choose among timeslots 1 31 for PCM 31 framing or timeslots 1 15 17 30 for PCM 30 3 Connect the E10 according to Figure 8 12 a Pre
37. 63 3 43 Propagation Delay 3 64 3 44 VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu 3 65 3 45 VF Measurements 3 66 3 46 View Line 1 amp 2 CAS 3 69 3 47 Dial Parameters 3 70 3 48 DTMF MFR2 DP Dialing 3 73 3 49 Group II Forward Signals 3 77 3 50 Group 1 Forward Signals 3 78 3 51 Group B Backward Signals 3 79 3 52 Group A Backward Signals 3 79 3 53 MF Combinations 3 80 3 54 DTMF DP CAS Analysis 3 80 3 55 DTMF MF Analysis SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 82 3 56 MF CAS Analysis 3 83 3 57 DP Analysis 3 83 3 58 Noise Analysis 3 84 3 59 MFC SS 5 Menu 3 85 3 60 MFC Cycle 3 86 3 61 MFC Dialing 3 86 3 62 MFC Tracer 3 90 3 63 MF CAS View Print Tracer Screen 3 91 3 64 MF CAS View Tracer 3 92 3 65 SS 5 Dialing 3 93 3 66 SS 5 View Tracer 3 95 3 67 MFC Example 3 95 3 68 SS 5 Example 3 96 3 69 VF Channel Access Menu 3 96 3 70 Signalling Emulator Menu 3 97 3 71 Edit Emulator Screen 3 97 3 72 Signalling Emulator Label Screen 3 98 3 73 Edit Emulator 2 3 99 3 74 Start Emulation 3 101 3 75 OTHER FEATURES Menu 3 102 3 76 MEAS CONFIGU RATION 1 Screen 3 103 3 77 MEAS Configuration 2 3 106 3 78 ERROR INJECTION Screen 3 108 3 79 Other Parameters Screen 3 111 3 80 ALARM GENERA TION 3 112 3 81 View Test Record 3 114 3 82 Send Frame Words Index 3 115 3 83 Automatic E Bit Transmission 3 117 3 84 MEMORY ALLOCA TION 3 120 3 85 Main Menu System Parameters 3 121 3 86 SYSTEM PARAM ETERS Menu
38. 7 19 depicts the Layer 2 traffic screen Ch 7 GSM 7 19 06 34 47 LAYER 2 TRAFFIC LINE 2 S 121 U 128 I UI 1202 TOTAL 264 TOTAL 1451 RESUME RESTART STATIST Figure 7 19 Layer 2 Traffic Screen This screen divides the traffic on both lines by the following formats S Supervisory Format used for control functions U Unnumbered Format used for additional control functions and information transfer I UI Information transfer used for information transfer between layer 3 entities This screen provides this information in either a count or percentage format Pressing STATIST F4 in the screen shown above would convert all the counts to percentages 2 2 A MAP Interface The A Map Interface is the interface between the Base Station Controller BSC and the Mobile Switching Center MSC Figure 7 20 depicts the A Interface menu which appears upon entering A INTERFACE Figure 7 21 shows the A Map Configuration screen 7 20 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 07 04 23 A MAP INTERFACE CONFIGURATION SETUP FILTER START TRACER VIEW PRINT TRACER Figure 7 20 A MAP Interface Menu 2 2 1 A Map Configuration CONFIGURATION LINE 1 Rx T S LINE 2 Rx T S 1 A INTR MODE CCITT NEXT PREVIUS Figure 7 21 A Map Configuration screen 1 Line 1 Rx T S Options 1 31 e Use the NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 keys to select the line 1 receive timeslot Ch 7 GSM 7 21 2 Line 1 Rx T S Options 1 31
39. 7 5 7 06 16 Kbit TRAU Frame 7 7 7 07 TRAU Speech C bit Coding 7 8 7 08 GSM Configuration Screen 7 9 7 09 16Kbps Config 7 10 7 10 A bis Setup Filter Screen 7 11 7 11 RLL Message Types 7 13 7 12 CCC Message Types 7 13 7 13 DC Message Types 7 14 7 14 TRX Message Types 7 14 7 15 A bis Start Tracer 7 Index 16 7 16 A bis View Display 7 17 7 17 BlTdeco screens 7 18 7 18 A bis Traffic Screen 7 19 7 19 Layer 2 Traffic Screen 7 20 7 20 A MAP Interface Menu 7 21 7 21 A Map Configuration screen 7 21 7 22 Setup Filter Screen 7 22 7 23 Start Tracer Screen 7 26 7 24 A Interface View Print Tracer scree 7 27 7 25 A Interface VIEW Display 7 28 7 26 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT menu 7 29 7 27 GSM Monitor screen 7 29 7 28 VOICE TRAU XMT screen 7 31 7 29 Uplink Downlink Directions 7 32 7 30 GSM 16K BERT 7 33 7 5 Layer 3 Protocols 7 6 8 01 X 50 Byte Structure 8 1 8 02 AMI Line Coding 10 4 8 02 Channel Rates 8 2 8 03 X 50 Division 3 Frame 8 3 8 04 HDB3 Encoding 10 6 8 04 Other Measure ments X 50 Analysis 8 4 8 05 X 50 Analysis screen 8 5 8 06 X 50 SETUP Screen 1X 8 5 8 07 X 50 Division 2 Phases 8 7 8 08 X 50 Division 2 Select Screen 8 8 8 09 X 50 Division 3 Select Screen 8 9 8 10 Division 2 View X 50 Info 8 12 8 11 Test Configuration 8 13 8 12 Testing 64K X50 Frame from a 2M Mul 8 14 8 13 E1 MUX Mode 8 17 8 15 Datacom Configura tion 8 21 8 16 Testing 64K X 50 Sig
40. 92 C2 D2 04 42 4A F2 EA 72 04 62 F2 1A 04 52 AA B2 OA CA 04 F2 6A A2 4A 04 2A 12 A2 04 32 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 23 82 5A 9A 04 22 F2 E2 04 8C 4C CC 2C AC 6C EC 1C 9C OC BO 50 3 2 User Test Patterns In addition to these standard patterns you may program and send a user pattern 1 Press USER F1 in the TEST PATTERN screen e The user test pattern screen now appears listing any stored patterns e This screen allows you to create edit view send or delete a pattern e See Figure 3 17 Sending a User Test Pattern 1 Inthe TEST PATTERN screen press USER F1 2 The test set will present a list of USER patterns a Use the Up Down arrow keys to cursor to the desired pattern 3 Press ENTER Viewing a User Test Pattern 1 From the USER TEST PATTERN screen move your cursor down to the desired test pattern 2 Press VIEW F1 3 You will see your selected pattern on the screen in hex binary and ASCIl a When you are finished viewing press ESCAPE to return to the USER TEST PATTERN screen 3 24 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 USER TEST PATT CURRENT IA C 0 Ls 2a I 4 5 6 Te 8 9 10 Figure 3 17 User Test Pattern screen Creating User Defined Patterns To program a user test pattern follow this procedure 1 Inthe SEND TEST PATTERN menu press the F1 key USER to enter the USER TEST PATTERN scree
41. F3 Select the desired SIC TYPE number e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to select a number e Select NONE F3 to not use this filter The Service Indicator Code SIC indicates the type of call requested i e speech or data It is used by the recipient PBX to select an outgoing path This code ensures that the path selected is capable of supporting the type of call requested The portion of the SIC code specifying the type of data is a three bit binary coded field These codes are defined in BTNR 188 190 This code defined for DASS2 is as follows 0 Speech Speech Data Data Teletex Videotex Facsimile SSTV NOOR WD This code defined for DPNSS is as follows Speech Data Data 7 Data used for interworking with DASS2 will be treated as if code 2 has been received BRON 7 DA Number Options YES F1 NO F2 e To choose a DA number press YES F1 e Use the down arrow key to move the cursor to the next line e Press release the SHIFT key and enter the desired numbers 1 9 from the keyboard e Please notthatyou are given the F key options for entering and The DA should not be prefixed by either Ch 6 ISDN 6 25 e You are allowed to enter up to 16 digits here e The Destination Address DA is a digit sequence which causes a call to be routed to the correct destination after it is sent over the network boundary 2 4 Start Tracer START TRACER begins the tracing of ISDN messages
42. F4 sets the increment decrement value used in options F2 and F3 e The Line 2 DPC defaults to the same number as selected here 4 INTERFACE Options NONE F1 A F2 MAP B G F3 Specify the desired interface e A Interface F2 is the interface between the BSC Base Station Center and the MSC Mobile Switching Station e MAP B G F3 refers to the inter MSC interfaces e MAP Mobile Application Part is used for the transfer of non circuit related signalling information on inter MSC interfaces Upon selecting MAP B G more filtering settings appear below The following filter items apply only to MAP B G Interface 5 ADDR SGNL Options NONE F1 CALLED F2 CALLER F3 Specify the addressing signalling direction e CALLED F2 refers to the destination number of the call e CALLER F3 refers to the origination number of the call If you select either F2 or F3 you may specify the number in Ch 7 GSM 7 23 the next two lines 6 SCCP SSN Options NONE F1 MAP F2 HLR F3 VLR more F1 MSC more F2 EIC more F3 AUC more F1 The Subsystem Number SSN identifies a SCCP user function e Select NONE F1 to capture all subsystem numbers e The following Subsystem numbers may be chosen MAP F2 Mobile Application Part HLR F3 Home Location Register VLR more F1 Visitor Location Register MSC more F2 Mobile Switching Center EIC more F3 Equipment Identifier Center AUC more
43. Frequency W WNDR Wander X XMT Transmit 13 6 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY A Hardware Coverage COMPANY warrants hardware prod ucts against defects in materials and workmanship During the warranty period COMPANY will at its sole option either i refund of CUSTOMER S purchase price without interest ii repair said products or iii replace hardware products which prove to be defective provided however that such products which COMPANY elects to replace must be returned to COMPANY by CUSTOMER along with acceptable evidence of purchase within twenty 20 days of request by COMPANY freight prepaid B Software and Firmware Coverage COMPANY warrants soft ware media and firmware materials against defects in mate rials and workmanship During the warranty period COM PANY will at its sole option either i refund of CUSTOMER S purchase price without interest ii repair said products or iii replace software or firmware products which prove to be defective provided however that such products which COM PANY elects to replace must be returned to COMPANY by CUSTOMER along with acceptable evidence of purchase within twenty 20 days of request by COMPANY freight prepaid In addition during the warranty period COMPANY will provide without charge to CUSTOMER all fixes and patches to the original product specifications sold which COMPANY issues during the warranty period COMPANY does
44. IAM contains the essential information required for the call It has the flexibility to expand with additional parameters as new service is required Figure 5 7 illustrates the typical information in an IAM message IAM Message Information Fields Message Type IAM Nature of Connection Continuity Check Forward Call Indicator National no interworking caller ISDN Calling Party s Category Ordinary User Service Information Speech Circuit Called Party Number 14158552301 Calling Party Number 14083638000 presentation allowed Figure 5 7 Typical IAM Information Fields 5 8 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 2 SS 7 Analysis Menus The SS 7 Analysis Menu may be accessed through the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu list Refer to Figure 5 8 SS 7 Analysis Menu 16 43 32 SS 7 ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION SU MONITOR SU ANALYSIS Figure 5 8 SS 7 Analysis Menu 2 1 Configuration e Select the timeslots to receive SS 7 signals e Select the SS 7 standard version to be used The items selected here will be used in following SS 7 proce dures Figure 5 9 displays the Configuration screen Ch 5 SS 7 5 9 CONFIGURATION Line 1 Rx T S 1 Line 2 Rx T S 1 SS7 VERSION _CCITT PC DISP FORMAT eytensvr Nm HEX DECIMAL Figure 5 9 SS 7 Configuration Screen Select the following 1 Line 1 Rx T S Options 1 31 Select the Line 1 timeslot on which you will receive the SS 7 signal e
45. LAP D defines three types of frames each with a different control field format Information transfer frames I frames carry the data to be transmitted for the user Additionally flow and error control data using the go back N ARQ Automatic Repeat Re quest mechanism are piggybacked on an information frame Supervisory frames S frames provide the ARQ mechanism when piggybacking is not used Unnumbered frames U frames provide supplemental link control functions and are also used to support unacknowledged operation All of the control field formats contain the poll final bit P F In command frames it is referred to as the P bit and is set to 1 to solicit poll a response frame from the peer LAP D entity In response frames it is referred to as the F bit and is set to 1 to indicate the response frame transmitted as a result of a soliciting command Information Field The information field is present only in I frames and some unnumbered frames In the case of both control signalling and packet information maximum length is 260 octets The information field contains the message type and param eters For example the SETUP message is used to set up a call It contains the bearer capability originating and destination ad dresses transit network selection and other pertinent data Layer 3 information is used for intra as well as interexchange calls using SS 7 1 5 DASS2 Technology Digital Access Signalling System 2 DASS2 is
46. LOSS 3 35 LOW BATT Light 2 8 Lpp 3 36 LSSU 5 23 7 22 M 2100 10 1 M 2100 Measurements Configuration 3 107 M 2100 550 3 43 M 550 10 1 M2100 500 screen 3 43 MAP 7 24 MAP B G 7 23 MAP interface 7 23 MAX Hz 3 36 MEAS CONFIGURATION 3 103 MEAS Configuration 2 3 106 MEASURE MODE 3 104 Measurement Definitions 3 33 Measurement Results 3 30 3 33 datacom 9 14 F key options 3 31 Measurements Duration of 3 103 Start 3 104 Memory Allocation 3 119 menu tree 3 1 Message Discriminator 7 12 Message Signalling Unit 5 5 Message Transfer Part 5 3 Index MF 10 13 MF Forward and Backward signals 3 77 MF CAS view print tracer 3 91 MFAL 3 36 MFAS 10 7 10 9 MFAS Framing Bits 3 52 MFAS ABCD 3 117 MFAS DISTANT 3 113 MFAS DISTANT Alarm 3 113 MFAS WORD 3 117 MFASE 3 36 MFC 3 85 10 13 10 14 View Example 3 95 MFC DIALING 4 25 MFC Dialing 3 85 3 86 MFC Tracer 3 90 MFE 3 36 MFR2 10 14 MFR2 compelled signalling 3 90 MIN Hz 3 36 Mobile Station 7 1 modem 4 36 MONITOR 3 9 Monitor an In Service Circuit 4 8 more 2 4 MS 7 1 MSC 7 2 7 23 7 24 MTP 5 3 7 6 Multi frequency Compelled 3 85 MultiFrame Alignment Signal 10 7 10 9 Errors 3 36 Multiplex Testing a Terminal Mulitplex 4 44 Testing the datacom port of 9 26 Multiplexing a 64K X 50 Frame 8 15 MULTIPORT 2 11 Multiport 2 11 xiii MUX 3 15 MUXTEST mode 3 16 BERT side 3 18 Datacom side 3 18 E1 side 3 16 measurement results 3 48 N Network codes 4 17 NFAS
47. Multiple bit errors within the same submultiframe will lead to only one CRC 4 error for the block Also itis possible that errors could occur such thatthe new CRC 4 bits are calculated to be the same as the original CRC 4 bits CRC 4 error checking provides a convenient method of identi fying bit errors within an in service system On an in service system itis generally not possible to measure the actual bit errors because there is no pattern synch Bit error measurement is used on an out of service system because the results are slightly more precise CRC 4 also uses a multiframe structure consisting of 16 frames as shown in Figure 10 8 However the CRC 4 multiframe is not necessarily aligned with the MFAS multiframe Each CRC 4 mul tiframe can be divided into 2 sub multiframes SMF These are labeled SMF 1 and SMF 2 and consist of 8 frames apiece We associate 4 bits of CRC information with each submultiframe The CRC 4 bits are calculated for each submultiframe buffered and inserted into the following submultiframe to be transmitted across the E1 span When the terminating equipment calculates an error using CRC 4 it should transmit an E bit to the far end thus informing the far end equipment of the error TIME SLOT 0 Bits Multiframe Sub Multiframe Frame pitt bit4 bit5 bit6 bit7 bit8 ia IRS IS 65 0 cl 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 SMF 1 2 c2 0 0 1
48. PCM 31 framing timeslots 1 through 31 correspond to channels 1 through 31 In PCM 30 framing timeslots 1 through 15 correspond to channels 1 through 15 and timeslots 17 through 31 correspond to channels 16 through 30 In PCM 30 timeslot 16 is used for the multiframe alignment signal also Fractional E1 is not offered with unframed signals because framing is required to determine the location of timeslots The time slots specified for transmit and receive need not be the same Also the number of selected timeslots can differ from the Tx side to the Rx side The SunSet will assume that all incoming data is received byte by byte in ascending channel order 7 RxLVL 1 and RxLVL 2 Options TERM F1 BRIDGE F2 MONITOR F3 Configures the two 2 048 Mbps receivers e These settings let the SunSet electrically decode a 2 048 Mbps signal under a wide range resistive or cable losses These settings also determine which electrical load will be placed on the circuit by the SunSet These settings have no effect on the transmitters On a 2 048 Mbps circuit there must always be exactly one receiver that applies the low impedance 75 ohm 120 ohm termination There should never be two or more receivers applying a low impedance termination WARNING IF YOU ARE UNCERTAIN CHOOSE BRIDGE THIS WILL PRO TECT THE 2 048 SIGNAL TERM F1 The TERM mode terminates the received signal with a 75y or 120y impedance termination The signal being tested ha
49. Pins E and H When the DCE is powered on and is not in test mode the DTE receives a DSR Data Set Ready on pin E When terminal is ready it transmits a DTR Data Terminal Ready on pin H Pin F The modem asserts DCD Data Carrier Detect whenever it receives a signal on the telephone line that meets its internal criteria for amount of energy at the carrier frequency e Pin N Initiates a remote loopback RL e Pin L Initiates a local loopback LL Pin Y AA Used for the transmit clock e Pin V X Used for the receive clock V 35 DB 34 Interface PIN Function BS TxD Cc RTS DTR U W TCLK T RxD Y AA TxCLK E DSR V X RxCLK D CTS F DCD N RL L IT B GND Figure 9 3 V 35 DB 34 Interface The following pin connections are required as minimum between a DTE and DCE P S R T Y AA V X and B 9 6 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 e Pin P S and R T are for the DTE to transmit and receive data Pin Y AA and V X are used for clocking purposes e Pin B is the signal ground between the DTE and the DCE Section 2 DATACOM Menus 2 1 DATACOM Mode Test Configuration The DATACOM Test Mode provides testing using standard protocols V 35 RS449 X 21 G 703 and RS232 e The 2 048 Mbps interfaces are ignored e You test only the low speed synchronous asynchronous signal on the MULTIPORT e See the Graphic screen to confirm your setup e Figure 9 4 displays the DATACOM Configuration screen 01 41 25 CONFIGU
50. Power and low battery LED indicators 16 dual color LED indicators for Line 1 amp Line 2 Current status and alarm history for signal code error PCM 30 PCM 31 AIS alarm CRC detected any error Pattern sync and bit error LED indicators TEST PATTERN GENERATOR General 1111 0000 1010 100100 1 in 3 1 in 4 1 in 8 3 in 24 FOX PRBS 2 1 n 6 7 9 11 15 20 23 Selectable QRS or 22 1 ITU Conforms to ITU T 0 151 0 152 0 153 Programmable 10 patterns 2048 bits long with user definable labels Test pattern inversion E1 GENERAL Bit Error Test rates 2 048 Mbps N contiguous and M non contiguous x64 kbps N amp M 1 to 31 Full duplex bi directional hitless in service drop and insert Drop and insert to internal test circuitry datacom interface op tional Nx64 kbps test pattern or 64kbps A law decoded VF channel to built in speaker microphone Automatic configuration Line Coding HDB3 AMI Framing Unframed PCM 30 PCM 31 with or without CRC 4 conforms to ITU T G 704 Programmable Send Frame Words manual auto E bits MFAS Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 1 Word bit 5 bit 6 MFAS RAI bit 7 bit 8 MFAS ABCD FAS RAI Display and Print Send and Receive FAS NFAS and MFAS NMFAS Words auto CRC 4 generation freely settable Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 and Sa8 bits to 1 or 0 for 8 frames Set idle channel code and ABCD bits E1 TRANSMITTERS Clock source Internal 2 048 MHz 5 ppm External Through Line
51. Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to select the timeslot 2 Line 2 Rx T S Options 1 31 Select the Line 2 timeslot on which you will receive the SS 7 signal e Use the F keys NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to select a timeslot 3 SS7 VERSION Options CCITT F1 CHINA24 F2 CHINA14 F3 ITALY F4 Determines the SS 7 standard to be used during your analysis e Press Fi to use the CCITT ITU version e Press F2 to use the CHINA 24 bit e Press F3 to select the CHINA14 bit version e Press F4 to select the ITALY version 5 10 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 4 PC DISP FORMAT Options HEX F1 DECIMAL F2 Determine the display format for DPC Destination Point Code and OPC Originating Point Code Press F1 to view the received data in hexadecimal format e Press F2 to view the received data in decimal format 2 2 SU Monitor The SU Signalling Unit Monitor menu contains three items 1 SETUP FILTER 2 START TRACER 3 VIEW PRINT TRACER 2 2 1 Setup Filter e Select various filter items to be used during the trace process including both Layer 2 Data Link Layer and Layer 3 Network Layer information e The SunSet will search for SS 7 messages which match the filtering items specified here e You may choose NONE for each item in this case the SunSet will search for all SS 7 messages Figure 5 10 shows the SU MONITOR screen followed by Figure 5 11 the Setup Filter screen Ch 5 SS 7 5 11 SU MONITOR
52. Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking history lights and turn them off Tx Rx TX Rx Lume I gh MON E1 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT E1TERMINAL EQUIPMENT ON OUT IN IN EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT Figure 4 6 Monitor an In Service Circuit MONITOR Tx Rx Tx Rx LINES sm J 1 EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT Figure 4 7 Monitoring an In Service Circuit BRIDGE Ch 4 Applications 1X RX TX RX LNE 4 CLINE 1 A tN Figure 4 8 Monitoring an In Service Circuit BRIDGE Mode with Alligator Clips 4 Examine the LEDs and the GRAPHIC screen for information about the circuit under test e The pulses light should be lit green e Valid framing type should be indicated e A steady ERROR or CODE light will tell you that the circuit is working but is experiencing trouble e Red SIGNAL is an indication of no signal e An ALARM indication shows a problem on the other side of the circuit e AIS indicates a trouble condition where a network element transmitting to the test set has lost its incoming signal and has replaced it with the AIS signal 5 To make a basic measurement a From the MAIN MENU move to the MEASUREMENT RESULTS 4 10 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 menu item Press the ENTER key b Verify thatthe span performs to your company s requirements for the
53. SNM 2 SNM 0 SNT 2 SNT 0 TUP 1 TUP 0 ISUP 9 ISUP 0 SCCP 4 SCCP 0 RESUME RESTART STATIST Figure 5 23 SU Analysis pg 1 5 28 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 SU ANALYSIS LINE 1 LINE 2 FISU S 00 4 FISU 00 LSSU 00 9 LSSU 00 MSU 98 5 MSU 98 RETRANSMISSION FIB 319 BIB 315 BIB RESUME RESTART Figure 5 24 SU Analysis screen pg 2 There are three available function keys in this screen PAUSE RESUME F1 Pause freezes the display so the data can be easily observed When paused measurements are still occurring but the counts are updated only in memory and not on the display e RESUME will update all the data to their current values RESTART F2 Restart causes the SunSet to restart the trace process STATIST COUNT F4 By pressing STATIST the FISU LSSU MSU as well as the count of FIB and BIB retransmis sion bits are displayed for both LINE 1 and LINE 2 COUNT returns you to the count screen and shows the counts of FISUs LSSUs MSUs etc Ch 5 SS 7 5 29 Section 3 Applications 3 1 Monitoring the Transmit Receive Links of a SS 7 Network e Monitor the sending and receiving links of the SS 7 network using the dual line receive jacks Use the following procedure 1 This test may be performed while the span is carrying live SS 7 traffic 2 From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION Select the following setup choices TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 TX RX D
54. Service at 1 408 363 8000 telephone or 1 408 363 8313 fax for assistance e Press ENTER to run the SELF TEST e Press a key as prompted when the test completes 8 4 CLR PRINT BUFFER Prevent unwanted printing by clearing the print buffer before using the printer e If you don t clear the print buffer the test set will print the entire contents of the buffer when you first enable the printer Forinstance the test set may have over 10 BASIC MEASURE MENTS or 800 events stored in the print buffer These must all be printed before the desired current tests or events are printed 3 126 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 To clearthe print buffer enter CLR PRINT BUFFER You will see the screen flash quickly The print buffer is now erased 8 5 VERSION OPTION This screen displays the software version type serial number and options installed in your SunSet E10 Figure 3 89 depicts a sample Version option screen Version 2 30 S N QP 000962 OPTION A SW100 Remote Control 750hm 2 37V interface SW251 MF DTMF DP SW252 NOISE SW253 SS 7 analysis SW254 ISDN analysis SS251 DATACOM module E BIT BLK ERR PROP DELAY SW259 SS 5 MFC PAGE UP PAGE DN Figure 3 89 Version Option Screen Note The serial number displayed in the screen should agree with the serial number written on the cartridge as well as the serial number written on the back of the set 8 6 FACTORY DEFAULTS e Resets all settings
55. Service Dual Drop and Insert THRU Testing To conduct a dual drop and insert THRU mode test on a line which is in service make sure all the connections are made in accordance with the numbering procedure in Figure 4 19 to ensure the least amount of interruption on the live circuits In service drop and insert testing is useful for a Placing a telephone call on a single channel b Sending and receiving tones to test channels c Sending and receiving test patterns to test NX64 Kbps circuits WARNING only experienced technicians should do this proce dure Any mistakes will disrupt service Use the following procedure If performed properly this test should disrupt the service for a duration of few hundred milliseconds 1 Press the enter key to move to the MAIN MENU 2 Press ENTER to enterthe TEST CONFIGURATION Configure the interface as follows TEST MODE El TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L2 Rx TxSOURCE THRU FRAMING as specified by the circuit design CRC 4 as specified by the circuit design TEST RATE 2 048M or NX64K for fractional E1 RxLVL 1 MONITOR BRIDGE RxLVL 2 MONITOR BRIDGE XMT CLOCK L1 Rx 3 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as shown in Figure 4 19 or 4 20 Figure 4 19 provides a BNC BNC diagram using equipment withouta monitor point while Figure 4 20 shows bantam to BNC cables using monitor points This mode allows an in service Ch 4 Applications 4 4 2 048
56. SunSet s serial port settings match those of your printer a The switches to configure your printer s serial port and print characteristics are usually located on the back or bottom of the printer b If you are using the Sunrise Telecom thermal printer refer to Figure 4 17 for the correct switch settings 4 32 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 PESTON DIP SW SETTING PARAMETERS PARAMETER SETTING 1 OFF INPUT SERIAL 2 ON PRINTING SPEED HIGH 3 ON AUTO LOADING ON 4 OFF AUTO LINE FEED OFF 5 ON SETTING COMMAND ENABLE 6 OFF PRINTING DENSITY 100 7 ON 8 ON CEN DIP SW SETTING PARAMETERS PARAMETER SETTING 1 ON PRINTING COLUMNS 40 2 ON USER FONT BACK UP ON 3 ON CHARACTER SELECT NORMAL 4 ON ZERO NORMAL 5 ON INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SET ENGLISH 6 ON OFF 8 OFF Position T DIP SW SETTING PARAMETERS PARAMETER SETTING 1 ON DATA LENGTH 8 BITS 2 ON PARITY SETTING NO 3 ON PARITY CONDITION ODD 4 ON BUSY CONTROL H W BUSY 5 OFF BAUD RATE SELECT 9600 bps 6 ON tj ON 8 ON Figure 4 17 Printer Switch Settings The test set s factory default serial port settings are BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY STOP BIT 1 BIT NONE BITS CHAR 8 BIT CR LF INSRT CR LF If you need to reconfigure the SunSet s serial port settings to match the settings of your printer use the following procedure a From the MAIN MENU select the SYSTEM PARAMETERS
57. Supports forward and backward call setups Talk listen send rreceive tones or noise measurement on dialed channel Automatic seizure and seizure acknowledgement Programmable idle seizure and seizure ack CAS ABCD states Bi directional MFR2 dial digits decoding with time stamp amp CAS 1000 events SS5 Conforms to ITU T Q 140 series standards Supports 2400Hz 2600Hz 2400 2600Hz SS5 line signalling Call setup with on line call progress status display Talk listen send receive tones or noise measurement on dialed channel Bi directional SS5 dial digit and control tones decode with time stamp Control frequencies decode SOCOTEL 1700 Hz 1900 Hz AON 425 Hz 500 Hz Echo suppressor canceller 2100 Hz SIGNALLING EMULATION SW261 10 sets of stored user signalling emulation set ups Each signalling emulation holds up to 50 total events Programmable send and receive signalling CAS digits MFR2 DP DTMF wait and time out periods Send period from 0 to 9999 ms time out for response from 0 to 9999 ms program up to 20 digits MFR2 DP and or DTMF GENERAL CE mark Languages English French Italian Spanish 2 Mbyte Field upgradable PCMCIA memory card 512 kbyte internal NVRAM data buffer Dynamic memory allocation for protocol analysis 16 lines x 32 character LCD with backlight Internal Battery 6 cell NimH battery pack Battery operation time 4 hours nominal 3 5 hours nominal with optional SS251 Datacom Module installed
58. TEST CONFIGURATION menu and select MUXTEST F3 for the Test Mode 3 Set the configuration according to the Figure 4 22 MUXTEST Configuration MEAS 2 31 03 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE MUXTEST El DATACOM Tx INST L1 Tx TYPE RS232 Rx DROP L1 Rx MODE DTE FRAMING PCM 30 CRC 4 YES BERT RXLVL 1 TERM EIT S Nx64K RXxLVL 2 TERM Rx RS232 XMTCLK Tx El L1 Rx INTERN L2 Tx Figure 4 22 MUXTEST Configuration NOTE In this procedure the multiplex must be DCE The SunSet E10 is DTE The above figure uses RS232 as the Datacom Type You may also select G 703 V 35 RS449 or X 21 4 Set the XMTCLK to INTERN if the multiplex receives timing from the test set s 2 048 Mbps Tx Set the XMTCLK to L1 Rx Ch 4 Applications 4 45 if the test set should receive timing from the multiplex 5 Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green a Press the ERR INJ key to insert a bit error You should see a flashing red BIT ERROR LED indicating that a bit error has taken place You have just injected an error from the E1 side through the multiplex to the datacom port b Press the HISTORY key to stop the blinking 6 Now you should check to see if you can inject an error from the datacom port through the multiplex to the E1 side a Set the Tx to the datacom type that you have selected in DATACOM TYPE Automatically the Rx will change to E1 b Press the GRAPHIC key and verify that you are now tra
59. TIME SLOT screen b Use the arrow keys to move the flashing cursor to the desired receive timeslot c Once your desired timeslot is flashing press SELECT F2 d You may also press UN SEL F3 to deselect a particular timeslot orCLR ALL F4 to erase all the selected timeslots and start with a clear screen e Repeat this procedure for the Transmit timeslot You may select only one receive and transmittimeslot The receive and transmit timeslots should normally be set to the same number 3 Connect the E10 to the circuit according to Figure 4 23 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking history lights and turn them off b Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green Ch 4 Applications 4 47 Nx64 Kbps 2 048 Mbps M ultiport Figure 4 23 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex The DTE supplies the 64Kbps signal which is transmitted to the SunSet E10 through the multiport The E10 multiplexes this 64Kbps signal onto a 2 Mbps signal which is then transmitted out the E1 L1 Txjack In Figure 4 23 the test set is connected to a IN OUT monitor jack The 2M signal is passed from the IN to the OUT jack and back to the L1 Rx jack on the test set This setup allows you to check the multiplexed signal The following steps outline the procedure for checking the multiplexed 2M signal 4 Inject an error from the Data Terminal Equipment Make sure that the BERT setting in TEST CONFIGURATION is set to E1DRP
60. This often happens if MONITOR is selected when the test set is plugged into an OUT jack Inthis case TERM should be selected instead of MONITOR In some cases it may not be clear if the MONITOR jack provides a bridged access or a protected monitor access In this case you should try BRIDGE first to see if this works Then try MONITOR if it doesn t 8 XMT CLOCK Options L1 RX F1 INTERN F2 L2 RX F3 MLTIPRT F4 The XMT CLOCK is used to time the Tx INSERT signal The other Tx signal uses the timing recovered from its Rx signal L1 Rx a Choose Tx INSERT L1 Tx and INTERN as your XMT CLOCK and the L1 Tx signal will use the internal timing of the test set The L2 Tx signal will use the recovered timing from L2 Rx b Choose XMT CLOCK L1 Rx and the test set receives its timing from the signal received on Line 1 Figures 3 4 3 5 and 3 6 portray three different timing sce narios possible when L1 Rx is selected Figure 3 4 represents slave timing Here XMT CLK L1 Rx butthe signal received onL1 Rx is timed off of the L1 Tx source Thus there is no true clock source In this case the transmit signal may die Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 9 TxINSERT L1 Tx TxSOURCE TESTPAT XMT CLK LI Rx Figure 3 4 Slave to Slave Timing Figure 3 5 depicts loop or slave timing Tx INST and XMT CLK are set for the same line Loop timing is necessary when transmit ting toward an exchange or other network element that requires
61. VOICE TRAU XMT LINE NUMBER LINE 1 TIME SLOT 7 SUB CHANNEL 1 IDLE CODE 10101010 LINK DIRCTN TIME ALGMNT N A RCV CBITS 1110 0 100000 1111011111 PAUSE DOWN Figure 7 28 VOICE TRAU XMT screen 1 From the GSM VOICE TRAU BERT menu select and enter VOICE TRAU XMT See Figure 7 28 2 LINE NUMBER Options LINE 1 F2 LINE 2 F3 Select the transmit line e Press the F key corresponding with the line you wish to transmit on 3 TIME SLOT Select the timeslot to transmit on from 1 31 The defaultis timeslot 1 Youmay change the timeslot by pressing the F keys a Press INC 1 F2 to increment the timeslot number by one b Press DEC 1 F3 to decrement the timeslot number by one c Press INC 10 F4 to increment the timeslot number by ten 4 SUB CHANNEL Select the subchannel to transmit on from 1 4 e The default is subchannel 1 e You may change the selection by pressing the F keys a Press INC 1 F2 to increment the subchannel number by Ch 7 GSM 7 31 one b Press DEC 1 F3 to decrement the subchannel number by one 5 IDLE CODE Set the idle code inserted on the nonselected channels a Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to a desired digit b Press the 1 F2 and 0 F3 keys to enter the idle code 6 LINK DIRCTN Options UP DOWN e Press the F2 key to select the link direction you wish to transmit e See Figure 7 29 Downlink Base Station Subsystem Figure 7 29 Uplin
62. When the G 826 Measurement is turned on the G 826 screen is displayed in MEASUREMENT RESULTS This G 826 screen presents the measurement parameters defined 3 106 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 in G 826 Available Seconds and Background Block Error and Errored Block Errored seconds and Severely Errored Seconds and Unavailable Seconds and 3 M 2100 Options ON F1 OFF F2 e When M 2100 is turned on the M 2100 screen is shown in MEASUREMENT RESULTS e This section refers to ITU specifications used when a 2 048 Mbps circuit passes through international boundaries It allocates a certain allowable error rate to each nation that carries the circuit The technician merely needs to enter the appropriate percent age allowed for the line under test e The SunSet makes the M 2100 550 calculations and reports whether the line passed or failed in the MEASUREMENT RESULTS M 2100 550 screen The next two settings refer to the M 2100 550 measurements 4 MEAS PERIOD Options 01 99 min This setting controls how often a new result is displayed in MEASUREMENT RESULTS LINE 1 2 M 2100 550 e Use the SHIFT key and the numeric keys to set the period 5 HRP MODEL Options 1 to 99 9 e Refer to M 2100 or to the older M 550 for information on how to select the Hypothetical Reference Performance model percent HRP e This percentage is chosen when more than one telephone company is providing a 2 048 Mbps ci
63. a Mistake in the Pattern While Entering the Pattern The following procedure may be implemented to correct any mistakes made while entering the pattern 1 This procedure assumes you are starting from step 4 of the Programming User Defined Patterns procedure 2 While entering the 1s and Os you notice an incorrect digit Press the SHIFT to remove the SHIFT indicator in the screen Cursor back to the incorrect digit and press the SHIFT key to display the SHIFT indicator Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 27 3 Enter the correct digit Press the SHIFT key to remove the SHIFT indicator Cursor to the end of the line Press the SHIFT key again to display the SHIFT indicator Enter in the rest of the digits Edit the code s label using the Correcting a Mistake procedure 4 Press ENTER to store the pattern Deleting a User Test Pattern Follow this procedure to delete a user test pattern you no longer want 1 From the SEND TEST PATTERN menu press the F1 key USER to enter the USER TEST PATTERN screen 2 Move the cursor to the test you want to delete and select DELETE F3 The pattern is deleted and you are finished Press ESCAPE to return to the main menu 3 3 X 50 Test Patterns Ifyou have enabled X 50 Analysis OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS X 50 SETUP the test patterns available to you are limited The X 50 test pattern screen appears in Figure 3 19 3 28 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 X50 X 50 TEST PATTERN BERT PA
64. a buffer where they are prepared to be sent in a stream In order for this stream to be sent the modems must be in perfect synchronization with each other The idle time between characters is eliminated The first bit of a character immediately follows the last bit of the previous character Ch 9 Datacom 9 3 there are no start stop bits 1 5 Call Control Procedure A standard call procedure is outlined in Figure 9 2 and de scribed below This procedure pertains to a full duplex circuit Since both carriers can be present simultaneously in a full duplex circuit it does not matter which side turns on RTS first In Figure 9 2 the West DTE happens to be first For half duplex circuits the side to transmit first must be arranged beforehand The West DTE sends RTS to the West DCE RTS Request To Send tells the modem to activate its outgoing carrier RTS results in two steps for the West DCE It turns on the Eastbound carrier as shownin Figure 9 2 and also sends CTS back to the West DTE CTS Clear To Send indicates that the carrier has been turned on and so the DTE may begin to transmit its data The East DCE senses that the Eastbound carrier from the West DCE is now present Consequently it sends CAR_DET to the East DTE CAR_DET Carrier Detect means that the DCE has sensed an incoming carrier This alerts the East DTE that it should shortly receive data from the West The East DTE also turns on its RTS This results in the same ste
65. a common channel signalling system intended for use between the customer s equipment PBX and an ISDN local exchange DASS2 is specified in BTNR 190 British Telecom A 2 048 Mbps line connects the PBXs to the ISDN exchange This 2 048M 32 timeslot signal is divided as follows Ch 6 ISDN 6 5 30 x 64 Kbps Circuit Switched Traffic Channels Timeslots 1 15 and 17 31 1 x 64 Kbps Frame Alignment Signal Timeslot 0 1 x 64 Kbps Signalling Channel Timeslot 16 The common channel signalling Link Access Protocol is always carried on timeslot 16 no other timeslots are used for DASS2 signalling DASS2 is based on the first three layers of the ISO reference model Layer 1 Physical Layer involves the activating deactivating of the physical connection Layer 2 Link Access Protocol provides secure error free transmission of the Layer 3 messages Layer 3 Call Handling Layer contains the call control messages conveyed within a HLDC High Level Data Link standard frame 1 5 1 DASS2 Layer 2 Layer 2 Data Link Layer provides a transport mechanism for the Layer 3 messages Link Access Protocol LAP operates in parallel with each other over the signalling channel timeslot 16 LAP control is effected using one of the two frame formats shown in Figure 5 6 6 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 FCS I C A 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits FCS C A gt 16 bits 8 bits 16 bits FCS Frame Check Sequence
66. a count of the Multiframe Alignment Signal Errors received since the beginning of the test Applies only to PCM 30 framing MFE This is a count of the number of Multi Frame bit Errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test This measure mentis reported as N A when there is no framing pattern within the received signal RCV Hz This is the current frequency measured during the last second SES This is the count of summary Severely Errored Seconds since the beginning of the test A severely errored second has an error rate of 10 3 or higher Severely errored seconds are not counted during unavailable time SES This is the percentage of seconds since the beginning of the test that are summary Severely Errored Seconds 3 36 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 SLIP This is a count of bit slips which have occurred since the beginning of the test A slip occurs when the synchronized pattern either loses a bit or has an extra bit stuffed into it UAS This is the count of UnAvailable Seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test Unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds The dis played value of unavailable seconds updates after the tenth consecutive severely errored second occurs Unavailable time also begins at a loss of signal or loss of frame UAS This is the percentage of summary unavailable seconds since the beginning of the test WANDR This is the total positive phas
67. abort editing The original user number will not be affected If you want to keep the edited changes when you are done editing the number press ENTER You will see the edited label in the list You have finished this procedure Press ESCAPE as necessary to return to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu 3 76 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 MF Signals According to the ITU Q 441 specification the tables and diagram on the following pages represent the MF Forward and Backward signals Combi Destination Meaning of the Signal Remarks nation of the Signal 1 H 1 Subscriber without priority 2 II 2 Subscriber with priority These signals 3 II 3 Maintenance equipment are used solely 4 II 4 Spare for national 5 II 5 Operator working 6 IL 6 Data Transmission 7 1 7 Subscriber or operator without These signals forward transfer facility are used for 8 IL 8 Data transmission international 9 IL 9 Subscriber with priority workin 10 I 10 Operator with forward transfer g facility 11 I 11 12 I 12 13 I 13 14 I 14 15 I 15 Figure 3 49 Group II Forward Signals Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 77 yun PUOTJVUIOJUT ue UO eus s IS117 9Y weg 19O P UNTO 9NU99 ISULI JeUONEU ISJUT UL UI SIPUWII J UIYM YUI eUONEUISJUT uv uo peusis JsILg 9 uwngop uonestznuapt Jo pug ST p09 Zursind jo pug Poepnypour Jut saws pounber 1ossoiddns oyoe Jfey Surumoouy Pepnpour jou YUL oes EI 9poD juourdinba 159 0 ss9
68. any hits that this procedure will introduce Ifa hitless drop insert is required you may wish to read Application 3 1 Dual Drop and Insert THRU Testing before continuing this procedure 2 Enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu a Configure the interface as follows TEST MODE El TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TxSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the span design CRC 4 as specified by the span design TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK INTERN b Press the ENTER key when all the settings are as desired 3 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as in Figure 4 5 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking history lights and turn them off 4 Press ESCAPE until you reach the MAIN MENU 4 22 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 a Move the cursor down to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu item and press ENTER b Press ENTER at the VF MEASUREMENTS menu item c Use the NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to set up the receive and transmit channels correctly d Select the rest of the menu items as follows INSERT TYPE TONE TONE FREQ Hz pick desired tone frequency TONE LVL dBm pick desired tone level LISTEN SIDE BOTH You are now transmitting a tone on the selected channel You can also view the received Level and Frequency 2 10 Place a Voice Call This application allows you to access dialing modes and signalling Verify the span is not in service if you will be using
69. being dialled However these tones are selected from a group of only six frequencies A and B bit signalling is used to seize and acknowledge the line The references can be found in the following standards tables e ITU Q 441 Tables 5 to 9 MFC Multi Frequency Compelled dialling allows the two exchanges to send digits to each other in both the forward and backward direction This helps ensure accurate transmission of the digits in a noisy environment The SS 7 signalling method is described in Chapter 5 10 14 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Section1 Troubleshooting Section 2 Calibration 2 1 Calibration Procedure Section 3 Customer Service SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 SunSet E10 h Version 2 37 Section 1 Troubleshooting Occasionally your SunSet E10 may not operate as expected Here is a general troubleshooting procedure a Check the manual for instructions on how to perform the desired procedure b Verify that the Test Configuration is set up properly c Check that cords are connected properly to the right jacks d If the set still does not behave as expected try turning the power off then on e If the set still does not behave properly try an NVRAM erase in SYSTEM PARAMETERS Note This will erase all user programmed information Turn the power off for 5 seconds then turn it back on Here are some helpful suggestions for specific problems that might occur Problem CODE light
70. bit Errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test This measurement is reported as N A when the SunSet has not synchronized on a known framing pattern within the received signal Hz PPM The hertz part per million count records any variance from 2 048 Mbps in the received frequency LOFS Loss of Frame Seconds is a count of seconds since the beginning of the test that have experienced a loss of frame LOSS Loss Of Signal Seconds is a count of the number of seconds during which the signal has been lost during the test LVL Positive LeVeL is the level of positive pulses being received by the SunSet Measurements are displayed in both Volts V and decibels variance from G 703 specified level dB Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 35 LVL Negative LeVeL is the level of negative pulses being received by the SunSet Measurements are displayed in both Volts V and decibels variance from G 703 specified level dB Lpp Peak to peak Level is the peak to peak level of negative and positive pulses being received by the SunSet Measurements are displayed in decibels variance from DSX level dB MAX Hz This is the maximum frequency measured since the beginning of the test MIN Hz This is the minimum frequency measured since the beginning of the test MFAL MultiFrame ALarm seconds is a count of seconds that have had far end multiframe alarm MFAS Remote Alarm Indication RAI since the beginning of the test MFASE This is
71. digits will be the response to your transmitted bits Three items are available for the receive side the first two Type and Code work in the same manner as in the send side 3 TOUT Options NONE F1 up to 9999 ms TOUT refers to Time Out This determines the length of time which the SunSet will wait for its received digits CAS before aborting the signalling sequence a To selecta time limit press the SHIFT key and enter the desired number digits up to 9999 ms b Press either the ENTER or ESCAPE key to exit the editor screen and save the settings 3 100 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 6 8 2 Start Emulation To begin an emulation sequence place the cursor on START EMULATION and press ENTER The screen which appears upon entering is shown in Figure 3 74 START EMULATION EMULATION FILE TX 1 T S RX 1 T S PREVIUS Figure 3 74 Start Emulation The following three items should be configured in this screen 1 EMULATION FILE The labels here refer back to the EDIT EMULATOR list Thus if you would like to use the emulator file saved with the label 04 in th EDIT EMULATOR list select 04 here e Press NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 to select the emulation file you would like to begin 2 Tx 1 T S Options 1 15 17 31 for PCM 30 framing 1 31 for PCM 31 framing e Press NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 to select the timeslot on which you will transmit your signalling bits during the emula tion process e This item w
72. e Use the NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 keys to select the line 2 receive timeslot 3 AINTR MODE Options CCITT F1 CHINA24 F2 CHINA14 F3 AINTR MODE specifies the signalling protocol used at the A interface e Press CCITT to use the standards defined by CCITT e Press CHINA 24 to use the China 24 bits standard e Press CHINA14 to use the China 14 bits standard 2 2 2 Setup Filter SETUP FILTER LSSU MON DISABLE LINE 1 DPC 06 FE 02 LINE 1 OPC _02 0B 06 INTERFACE EN Figure 7 22 Setup Filter Screen 1 LSSU MON Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 LSSU refers to the Link Status Signal Unit e LSSUs are used to indicate the status of node s level 2 message handling capabilities e ENABLE F1 or DISABLE F2 LSSU in the filtering process 7 22 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 2 LINE 1 DPC Options NONE F1 INC X F2 DEC X F3 1 10 50 F4 The Destination Point Code indicates the signalling point for which the message is intended e Use the F keys to enter the desired hexadecimal values for the DPC Pressing 1 10 50 F4 sets the increment decrement value used in options F2 and F3 e The Line 2 OPC defaults to the same number set as the Line 1 DPC 3 LINE 1 OPC Options NONE F1 INC X F2 DEC X F3 1 10 50 F4 The Originating Point Code indicates the signalling point that is the source of the message e Use the F keys to enter the desired hexadecimal values for the OPC Pressing 1 10 50
73. for PCM 30 6 NFAS WORDS These are the Non Frame Alignment Signal words In FAS framing the odd frames do not contain the frame alignment signal The bits are defined as follows i When CRC is enabled bit 1 is used for the cyclic Redundancy Check 4 performance monitoring When CRC is enabled this bit may not be changed here It may be changed when CRC is disabled 1 The second bit is always set to 1 to avoid FAS signal simulations A Bit A is used for the Remote FAS Distant Alarm Set this bit to 1 to indicate an alarm condition a bits 4 8 Spare bits they should be set to 1 when notin use e Press SEND F4 to transmit the words 3 118 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 7 8 Load Samples e Load samples of both SS 7 SS 5 and ISDN messages with 5 total records into the VIEW PRINT TRACER For example inthe OTHER MEASUREMENTS SS 7 ANALY SIS MSU MONITOR VIEW PRINT TRACER there should be a total of 5 MSU ISUP messages stored in the buffer For ISDN the buffer can be found in the OTHER MEASURE MENTS ISDN ANALYSIS VIEW PRINT TRACER Menu Load Samples can also store samples of SS 5 and MF CAS These buffers are located in the VF CHANNEL ACCESS MFC SS 5 DIAL ANALYSIS menu Warning If you already have stored records in any of these VIEW PRINT TRACERs these records will be replaced by the Load Samples and thus you willlose your existing database When you enter LOAD SAMPLES the test set will warn you of t
74. form 00101 1 Figure 3 34 shows the FAS frame words seen when in PCM 30 framing 07 31 55 FAS FRAME WORDS 12345678 12345678 c0011011 ilasssss 00011011 01011111 10011011 11011111 00011011 11011111 00011011 11011111 10011011 11011111 00011011 01011111 00011011 01011111 00011011 11011111 Figure 3 34 FAS Frame Words PCM 30 In Figure 3 34 the first bits of frames 1 11 odd send the pattern 001011 the CRC 4 multiframe alignment signal The first bits of frames 13 and 15 transmit the two E bits which are CRC 4 error indication bits A zero in this bit denotes received errored sub multiframes a one represents received frames free of errors You may refer to Chapter 10 Section 1 8 fora deeper understanding of PCM framing CRC 4 and E bit technology 5 3 View MFAS Words In View MFAS Words you may view the live presentation of Timeslot 16 Frames 0 15 Refer to Figure 3 35 To enter View MFAS Words 1 From the MAIN MENU select OTHER MEASUREMENTS 2 Select View MFAS words Note It is necessary to select PCM 30 framing in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu to enter this screen 3 52 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 06 30 55 MFAS FRAME WORDS 12345678 FRM 12345678 0000xyxx ABCDabcd 00001011 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 11011101 Figure 3 35 MFAS Frame Words Inthe Multiframe timeslot
75. frame indicator C5 Channel type full half C17 DTX indicator spare C6 11 Time alignment C18 21 Spare bits Figure 7 6 16 Kbit TRAU Frame The 64 kbps timeslots are divided into four 16 kbps subchannels Each devotes 13 kbps to voice with 3 kbps remaining for spare bits A Transcoder and Rate Adaption Unit TRAU does the required transcoding between the 64 kbps and 16 kbps channels A TRAU may be located at the BTS BSC or MSC If located outside the BTS the TRAU can be controlled by in band signalling using some of the spare bits A TRAU frame containing 320 bits is used to send signals between the BSC and the TRAU Its use is mandatory when the Abis interface is applied See Figure 7 6 The specific C bit coding for speech frames is shown in Figure 7 7 Ch 7 GSM 7 7 Speech Frame Coding Bit Uplink Downlink C1 C4 Frame type 0001 1110 speech speech C5 Channel type 0 0 full rate full rate C6 C11 Time Align 000000 No change in timing 000001 1x500us delay 000010 2x500us delay 100111 39x500us delay 101000 Not used 111101 Not used 111110 1x250us delay 111111 250us advance C12 16 Frame Ind C12 0 BFI 0 1 BFl 1 C138C14 DTX Ind C13 0 C140 SID 0 13 0 ca i SID 1 0131 2 C140 De C15 0 TAF 0 1 TAF 0 C16 Spare C17 DTX Ind 0 DTX no 1 DTX yes C18 C21 Spare BFI Bad Framelndicator DTX
76. frame loss light and other error lights are on but there should be no problem Suggestion 1 TEST CONFIGURATION MODE may be wrong Try TERM BRIDGE MONITOR 2 Check the cords they may be loose or dirty 3 Try reversing the Tx and Rx cords Problem CODE ERR LED is lit continuously for no apparent reason Suggestion 1 The Line Code might accidentally be set to AMI even though the received code is HDB3 Try pressing the AUTO key to automati cally reconfigure the line code 2 You may manually configure the line code in OTHER FEA TURES MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 CODE CONFIGUR Problem Keys do not work properly Suggestion 1 Verify shift status by pressing and releasing the SHIFT lock key Press and release the SHIFT lock key until the SHIFT status indicator in the upper left hand side of the screen achieves the desired condition Ch 11 Troubleshooting 11 1 2 Do not press SHIFT lock key simultaneously with another key 3 Press the key again The set may not have registered it the first time Problem Test set will not power up properly Suggestion 1 Make sure the battery is charged or the charger is plugged in 2 Make sure the software cartridge is inserted firmly and seated correctly Problem SunSet shows Security Violation when switched on Suggestion 1 Make sure the serial number of the software cartridge matches the serial number of the SunSet Problem Set performs improperly Suggestion
77. from the keypad e Cursor downto To No and repeatthe process to determine where you will stop viewing FLTR ON FLTR OFF F4 This key gives you the option of keeping the filter assignments on or off e Turning the filter off allows you to view all messages while saving any filter settings you may have selected in the Setup Filter screen without this option you would need to select NONE for all setup items FLTR ON allows you to post filter the captured messages Upon pressing VIEW F3 you will see the first specified message Figure 5 20 shows a sample screen Ch 5 SS 7 5 25 21 58 49 RECEIVE MESG NO 7 96 01 05 21 12 28 526 BSN 76 0 FSN 26 1 CIC BEL OPC 06 57 02 GSM EMPTY gt 78 B2 14 5A 2E EMPTY PAGE UP PAGE DN HEX L4deco Figure 5 20 View Message Sample The following F keys are available in this screen PAGE UP F1 View other pages of data by showing the previous page In Figure 5 20 pressing PAGE UP F1 would bring up Message number 6 PAGE DN F2 View other pages of data by showing the next page In Figure 5 20 pressing PAGE DN F2 would bring up Message numbers HEX DECODE F3 Displays the message contents for analysis e Hex shows the message in hexadecimal format e If you selected DECIMAL in the Configuration screen pressing HEX will show the OPC and DPC in decimal format L4deco F4 Decodes the Layer 4 message contents for analysis e Press F4 to decode w
78. identified B D CHANNEL INDICATOR 0h Channel is not the D channel PAGE DN RETURN Figure 6 14 Info Element Screen 6 28 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 Scroll through the screens with the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys Press RETURN F4 to return to the RECEIVE MSG screen Section 3 RJ 48 Pin Outs The following diagram illustrates the pin outs of an RJ 48 connector 8 1 Pins 8 1 RJ 48 Male Connector RJ 48 Female Connector Pins Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PRI TE Rx Rx Tx Tx NT Tx Tx Rx Rx BRI U Tx Rx S T Tx Rx Rx Tx PS2 PS2 PS1 PS1 Figure 6 15 RJ 48 Pin outs Ch 6 ISDN 6 29 Section 4 0 ISDN Applications 4 1 ISDN Call Setup ETSI 1 2 lt a This procedure outlines an ISDN call for the ETSI standard Verify the span is not in service this ISDN call will disrupt service From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION Configure the settings as follows TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 TX RX DROP L1 RX TXSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING PCM 31 CRC 4 as needed TEST RATE 2 048M TXLVL 1 TERM RXLVL 2 TERM XMTCLOCK INTERN Note You must select PCM 31 framing for any ISDN application b 3 4 a When your settings are correct press ENTER Escape to the Main Menu Enter TEST PATTERN Select your test pattern 1 8 is a good
79. in accordance with the filtering parameters which have been set up Three function keys are available in this screen RESTART F1 e Empties the existing buffer and restarts the tracing process PAUSE RESUME F2 e Stops the tracing process e Does not empty the buffer e No tracing is being performed while the test set is in PAUSE e RESUME will continue the tracing DECODE HEX F3 e Decodes the ISDN messages in detail e HEX will display the messages in hexadecimal format 2 5 View Print Tracer e View and print specific data capture by the test set e The Vie Print screen is shown in the next figure e The data is presented in accordance with the filters set in SETUP FILTERS 6 26 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 04 21 48 VIEW PRINT TRACER TOTAL RECORD 600 FROM No TO No 600 RAW DATA DISPLAY HEX FILTER IS OFF CLR ALL PRINT VIEW ASCII Figure 6 12 View Print Tracer There are four function keys available in this screen CLR ALL F1 This key is the first step in erasing the contents of the buffer After pressing F1 you will be asked to press ENTER to continue the process This second step provides security against accidentally erasing the buffer contest PRINT F2 Print the contents of the buffer date timestamp hexadecimal and full decode formats VIEW F3 View the contents of the buffer as specified from the VIEW FROM VIEW TO settings e The total record of data pages shown at top e
80. in the received signal as it is transmitting Pattern sync is derived from the line designated as Rx DROP inthe TEST CONFIGURATION The exact pattern may be observed in MEASUREMENT RESULTS When the test set is in BER mode the SunSet will automatically attempt to synchronize onthe pattern that is being sent If synchronization is lost the PAT SYNC LED lights red In LIVE mode BER or LIVE is set in OTHER FEATURES MEAS CONFIGURATION1 MEASURE MODE the LED is turned off BITERR The BIT ERR LED lights if a BIT ERRor has been detected The following LEDs provide the same functions for both Line 1 and Line 2 displays SIGNAL A green signal LED indicates that the SunSet is receiving valid 2 048 Mbps signals In contrast red LED indicates no signal PCM 31 PCM 30 Green LEDs specify the type of framing detected on the received signal PCM 31 indicates that the basic FAS Frame Alignment Signal has been detected PCM 30 indicates that the MF 16 Multiframe pattern has been detected as well as the basic FAS pattern Red LEDs indicate that the specified frame has not been detected If the received signal is unframed neither LED will be lit If the SunSet is configured for a particular type of framing in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu it will continuously search for that type of framing The appropriate LED willlight whenever the framing Ch 2 Test Set Description 2 9 is found CRC DET When CRC is enabled in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu
81. inverted FIB e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number 3 FISU LSSU Options ON F1 OFF F2 FISU Fill In Signal Unit is an idle signal used for error surveillance LSSU Link Status Signal Unit is mainly used at start up or when an error is found on the line Please note that FISU LSSU can be turned ON F1 only when one of the above filters BSN BIB FSN FIB has been set to 0 or 1 If NONE has been selected for all these filters then FISU LSSU can t be turned on 2 2 2 Start Tracer e Start Tracer begins the trace process using the filter values specified in the Setup Filter screen e The tracer display updates twice a second In this screen there are three function keys to choose from RESTART Restart causes the SunSetto restart the trace process Messages stored in the buffer will be erased PAUSE RESUME Pause freezes the display so the data can be easily observed Measurements are still occurring but the counts are updated only in memory and not on the display RESUME will update all the data to their current values DECODE HEX Displays the message contents for analysis e Select HEX to show the message in hexadecimal format Ch 5 SS 7 5 23 The E10 provides detail decoding for SS7 messages in levels 3 and 4 e Remember you are given the option of viewing the coded OPC or DPC in either hexadecimal
82. keys to select a specified Message Group e Select NONE F3 to capture all Message Group messages The message group identifier is a 4 bit binary coded field used to discriminate between message groups The following codes have been defined in BTNR 190 8765 Message Group 0000 0 Call Control Message Group messages re lated to call establishment control 0001 Reserved for extension of the Call Control 0010 2 User to user data message group DASS2 End to end message group DPNSS 0100 4 Maintenance message group DASS2 Link by link message group DPNSS 5 TYPE CODE Options O F or NONE F3 e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to select a message type e Select NONE F3 to not filter on a message type The message type discriminates between different messages within a given message group It is a 4 bit binary coded field The message group and message type both comprise the message header octet The following tables show the message types for their respective groups 6 22 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 1 Message Types for Group 0000 Call Control Type Message Type PBX ET ET PBX 0 4 Drownroan O mo Initial Service Request C Initial Service Request I Recall C Recall I Reserved Call Connected Reserved Reserved Clear Request Confirmation Call Accepted Reserved Subsequent Service Request I Subsequent Service Request Reserved Service Request W
83. knowledgment of the BSN message BIT Bit Error BPV Bipolar Violation BRI Basic Rate Interface BSC Base Station Controller Part of the GSM network manages the radio resources for one or more BTS BSN Backward Sequence Number Indication of the last mes sage received BSS Base Station Subsystem A major component of the GSM network contains the radio link with the Mobile Station BTS Base Transceiver Station Part of the BSS contains the radio transmitters and receivers BTSLP Bit Slip Occurs when the synchronized pattern either Ch 13 Abbreviations 13 1 loses a bit or gains an extra bit through stuffing BUFF Buffer A device that stores data temporarily from a faster device C CAS Channel Associated Signalling CC Connection Confirm CCH Control Channels CER CRC 4 Error Rate CIC Circuit Identification Code A label for circuit related mes sages CK Checksum The total of a group of data items used for error checking purposes CLKSLP Clock Slip COD Code CONFIG Configuration CR Connection Request C R Command Response A field bit indicating whether the frame transmitted is a command or response CR Carriage Return CRC 4 Cyclic Redundancy Check Code 4 D D Channel Demand Channel carries signalling information DASS2 Digital Access Signalling System 2 dB decibel dBdsx decibel referenced to G 703 power level DC Direct Current DCE Data circuit equipment
84. longer The SunSet s backlight has a programmable timer for automatic shut off This timer can be set from 1 to 99 minutes or continuous operation This feature is configured in SYSTEM PARAMETERS GENERAL CONFIG BACK LIGHT GRAPHIC The graphic key displays a picture of the current circuit configura tion and status After graphically viewing the configuration you may return to your previous location by pressing either GRAPHIC ESCAPE or ENTER The graphic may be invoked during basic menu setups and basic operations such as TEST CONFIGURA TION SEND TEST PATTERN and VF CHANNEL ACCESS The GRAPHIC screen is useful in verifying that the TEST CONFIGU RATION is correct for the circuit under test Graphics are not available in VIEW screens i e VIEW X 50 INFO VIEW RECEIVED DATA VIEW FAS WORDS VIEW MFAS WORDS PULSE MASK ANALYSIS 2 4 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 The graphics will update according to successful operations within the test set MEAS P15 Line 1 HDB3 Rx R Tx TERM o Line 2 TERM Figure 2 3 Graphic Screen Example Here is a description of some of the elements common toa graphic display The following letters will often be present in reverse video R this is where the SunSet performs its received measurement results T this is where the Sunset transmits a test pattern Arrows denote the direction the signal is travelling Boxed words or abbreviations provide additional information Tx the trans
85. may execute the selection by pressing the ENTER key In a few specific cases the simple action of highlighting an item will execute the selection The following menu tree shows the location of each menu item Some menu items are offered only with certain software options Parentheses at the right including the software option number indicate such items MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION select parameters here TEST PATTERN select or user defined test pattern MEASUREMENT RESULTS OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA VIEW FAS WORDS VIEW MFAS WORDS PULSE MASK ANALYSIS SS 7 ANALYSIS SW253 ISDN ANALYSIS SW254 GSM ANALYSIS SW258A GSMVOICE TRAU BERT SW258C X 50 ANALYSIS SW255 C BIT ANALYSIS SW257 HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS PROPAGATION DELAY VF CHANNEL ACCESS Dialing amp VF measurement VF MEASUREMENTS VIEW LINE 1 amp 2 CAS Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 1 DIAL PARAMETERS DTMF MFR2 DP DIALING SW251 DTMF MF DP CAS ANALYSIS NOISE ANALYSIS SW252 MFC SS 5 DIALING ANALYSIS SW259 SIGNALLING EMULATION DATACOMINTERFACE SS251 OTHERFEATURES MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 MEAS CONFIGURATION 2 ERROR INJECTION OTHER PARAMETERS ALARM GENERATION VIEW TEST RECORD SEND FRAME WORDS LOAD SAMPLES MEMORY ALLOCATION SYSTEM PARAMETERS GENERAL CONFIG ERASE NV RAM FULL SELF TEST CLR PRINT BUFFER VERSION OPTION FACTORY DEFAULTS LANGUAGE SELECTION Following selections within this chapter provide a detailed explanation for
86. measurement process The actual measurement results screens and the values dis played depend upon the Test Mode chosen in TEST CONFIGURA TION There are however some common features in all the Measurement Results screens Figure 3 20 displays a sample Measurement Results screen 16 47 42 RT CONTINU CLK SR INTERN XMT 2e20 TEST R 2 048M LINE 1 SUMMARY RATE 0 0e 10 RATE 0 03 08 RATE 0e 08 RATE 0 0e 07 BER 0 0e 10 EBER 0 03 07 RXLVL 0 4 dB RXLVL 0 4 dB Rx CLK 2048000 Hz PPM 0 0 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 3 20 Measurement Results Screen 3 30 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 Measurements may have a count number displayed on the left hand side and the corresponding rate or percentage displayed on the right hand side of the same line For example in Figure 3 20 CODE appears on the left and RATE on the right A key concept for the measurement result screens is availabil ity A circuit is available for use only when the bit error rate is low enough that the signal can get through and be understood A circuit is said to be unavailable at the beginning of 10 consecutive severely errored seconds which is are seconds with an error rate of 10 3 orhigher Errors errored seconds and severely errored seconds are not accumulated when the circuit is unavail able Therefore if you start continuously injecting errors to the test set at a2x10 3 error rate you will see increasing bit errors errored seconds and
87. or decimal format in the Configura tion screen 2 2 3 View Print Tracer e View and print specific data Figure 5 18 shows the initial View Print Tracer screen which appears upon entering 03 27 10 VIEW PRINT TRACER TOTAL RECORD 74 FROM No 1 TO No 74 THE FILTER IS OFF CLR ALL PRINT VIEW FLTR ON Figure 5 18 View Print Tracer Screen CLR ALL F1 This key is the first step in erasing the contents of the buffer After pressing CLEAR you will be asked to press ENTER to continue the process This second step provides security against accidentally erasing the buffer contents PRINT F2 Prints the contents of the buffer Figure 5 19 shows a sample printout 5 24 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 LINE 1 03 31 08 TUP IDPC 00 03 06 00 00 17 84 1E 80 02 90 14 11 01 00 A7 04 38 36 08 00 A6 00 LINE 1 03 31 08 LAYER 3 TUP SI 4 SSF 8 CIC 149 DPC 00 03 06 OPC 00 01 02 LAYER 4 IAM 40 1 Hi ei CLN PRTY 01 MSG INDI 700 ADDR SIG 04 38 36 08 00 CLN PRTY bits FEDCBA 000001 language French Figure 5 19 Sample Printout VIEW F3 Press to view any messages captured by the Sunset e Specify which messages to view The second line in this screen displays the total number of messages captured e Make sure the cursor is placed on the FROM No line e Specify the message number at which you wish to begin the viewing process by pressing the SHIFT key and entering the desired numbers
88. other call parameters Enter the desired information e Referto section 2 2 of this chapter for further details on each item a When your parameters are correct press CALL F4 to begin establishing your connection with the switch 10 When you are finished press DISC 1 F3 to disconnect 4 3 ISDN Monitoring Use this procedure to monitor an ISDN line 1 This test may be performed while the line is in service 2 From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION a Configure the settings as follows TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 TX RX DROP L1 RX TXSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING PCM 31 CRC 4 as needed TEST RATE 2 048M TXLVL 1 MONITOR RXLVL 2 MONITOR XMTCLOCK INTERN b When your settings are correct press ENTER 3 Escape to the Main Menu 4 Connect the test set to the circuit as shown in the next figure a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking LEDs and Ch 6 ISDN 6 37 turn them off You may perform this test anywhere you have access to an E1 circuit i e central office customer premises span In the sample figure the E10 is plugged in at the customer premises 4 Customer Premises Central Office SWITCH NT Figure 6 20 ISDN Monitoring From the Main Menu enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA a Page down using the PAGE DN F2 key to view TS 16 b You should see six consecutive ones together with two zeroes 5 a Da aS Escape back t
89. placed in a sequence at a fixed rate Ch 10 Technology Overview 10 1 Channel Asingle portion of the bit stream which is available for bidirectional communication 1 4 Converting a Voice Signal Totransmit voice in a digital medium such as a 2 048 Mbps line we first need to encode the analog voice signal in a binary format Then we must convert it to a bit stream suitable for digital transmission This conversion can be achieved through Pulse Code Modula tion Refer to Figure 10 1 voice frequency signal y E 11101101 11100000 10101001 00010001 resulting ps bit stream gt time igral bevel ange angle ag Figure 10 1 Converting a Voice Signal The Nyquist theorem requires that the signal be sampled at twice the signal s maximum frequency in order for the signal to be reproduced without a loss of information For voice signals the maximum frequency is approximately 4000 Hz This provides adequate clarity while conserving transmission bandwidth Thus we must sample our 4000 Hz voice signal at a frequency of 8000 Hz 8000 samples second The amplitude of the analog voice signal is sampled 8000 times per second Each amplitude value is expressed as an 8 bit code word These 8 bit words occurring 8000 times per second form 10 2 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 a 64 Kbps digital bit stream The 8 bit code word is formed by comparing the amplitude of the analog sample to a
90. service delivered The MEASUREMENT RESULTS screen also shows you what kind of pattern if any is being received by the test set 6 Unplug the test set and turn it off 2 3 Checking for Frequency Synchronization Frequency synchronization can be a problem when the customer purchases a channelized E1 circuit the customers circuit passes through a synchronous network element such as an exchange PBX ora digital cross connect system the E1 circuit passes through more than one carrier Frequency synchronization problems result in bit slips a major source of service impairment Referring to Figure 4 9 for the setup illustration use this procedure to identify frequency synchroniza tion problems 1 This test may be performed while the span is carrying live customer traffic 2 Obtain a 2 048 Mbps reference frequency source On a 2 048 Mbps circuit one side will usually be known to generate a synchronized signal This side can be used as the reference The other side can be measured for frequency synchronization 3 Move to the MAIN MENU by pressing the ENTER key Enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu item by pressing the ENTER key a Set the screen settings to TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TX SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the span design CRC 4 as specified by the span design Ch 4 Applications 4 11 TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 MONITOR RxLVL 2 MONITOR XMT CLO
91. signal 3 16 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 MEAS 3 10331 EST CONFIGURATION EST MODE MUXTEST El DATACOM Tx INST L1 Tx TYPE RS232 Rx DROP L1 Rx MODE DTE FRAMING PCM 30 CRC 4 YES BERT RXLVL 1 TERM E1T S Nx64K RXLVL 2 TERM RX RS232 XMTCLK PNRM Tx El L1 Tx INTERN L2 Tx Figure 3 9 MUXTEST Menu e INTERN F2 configures the set for master timing Here the set supplies the timing source but the source is not synchronized to the network Figure 3 10 depicts internal ti ming Datacom Mux Test Mode INTERNAL TIMING E1 Side 2 048 Mbps Transmit out E1 port Receive from DATACOM XMT CLOCK INTERNAL Datacom Side 64 Kbps Figure 3 10 Internal Timing Menu Descriptions 3 17 e To configure the set for slave timing where the MUX supplies the timing source set the XMT CLK for the same line as Tx INST If TxX INST is L1 Tx then XMT CLK should be L1 Rx Con versely if Tx INST is L2 Tx then XMT CLK should be L2 RX e Figure 3 11 displays slave timing Datacom Mux Test Mode SLAVE TIMING Internal Datacom Side EM Soe ee Timing 4 Kbps 2 048 Mbps Transmit out E1 port Tx INST L1 Tx Receive from DATACOM XMT CLK L1 Rx Figure 3 11 Slave Timing DATACOM SIDE 1 TYPE Options V 35 F1 RS449 F2 X 21 F3 G 703 more F1 RS232 more F2 Determines the electrical interface at the multiport BERT SID
92. similar to controlling the SunSet directly The remote control allows a remote user and a local user to use the test set together at the same time This simultaneous usage feature can help a team of people fix a problem faster Refer to Figure 4 16 fora diagram ofthe pin to pin assignments of the DIN to DB 9 cable supplied by Sunrise Telecom Refer to Figure 4 15 for the pin to pin assignments of the Sunrise Telecom Null Modem Adapter You may need a break out box null modem patch box and other RS 232C communications tools if you wish to set up your own serial communications Here are some helpful hints The test set Ch 4 Applications 4 35 is configured as a DTE You will need a modified null modem cable if you wish to connect directly to a terminal It often is successful if pin 4 DTR of the modem or terminal is connected to pin 8 CTS of the test set DB25 connector Pin 8 of the test set DB9 connector must show green on a breakout box in order for the test set to print To begin remote operation follow this procedure 1 Connect the Sunrise Telecom DIN 8 to DB 9 Printer Cable SS115B to the SunSet E10 2 If you are plugging directly into a terminal connect the Sunrise Telecom Null Modem Adapter SS122A to the free end of the Printer Cable a Connect the Null Modem Adaptor to your computer or terminal b Skip steps 3 4 5 6 7 3 Connect the printer cable s DB9 end into a modem A 9600 baud error correcting mod
93. the CRC DETect LED lights green if CRC 4 check sequences are detected by the SunSet If CRC is enabled butno CRC is detected the LED lights red When CRC is disabled it does not light ERROR The ERROR LED lights red if any of the following errors have been observed CRC errors frame errors E bit errors The ERRORLed will light if CRC 4 errors are detected when CRC error checking has been enabled and frame errors are detected when the signal is a framed signal CRC 4 and framing are both configured in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu CODE ERR The CODE ERR LED lights red if a coding violation is detected on the received signal A code error is a bipolar violation that is not part of a valid HDB3 substitution AIS The AIS LED lights red if the SunSet detects an unframed all ones signal on its receive jack ALARM The ALARM lights if the SunSet detects FAS ALM MFAS ALM or AIS T S 16 2 10 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 2 5 Connector Panel The SunSet E10 has a connector panel as shown in Figure 2 4 TX RX TX RX SERIAL PORT int 15v OOO il Ee LINE 2 CLINE MULTIPORT Figure 2 4 Connector Panel SERIAL PORT The serial port is used for sending information to the Sunrise Telecom thermal printer or for operating the Remote Control This portuses an RS 232C DTE configuration with hardware flow control when the 8 pin DIN to 25 pin D Sub conversion cable is connected MULTI PORT The MULTI PORT is provided for DATA
94. the operation If the operation you are trying to perform will not begin try pressing the ENTER key When the ENTER key is used to invoke the operation you may need to press ESCAPE to return to the previous menu 2 3 Orange Labels SHIFT The SHIFT lock key is pressed to provide access to the functions specified by orange labels The SHIFT lock key should always be pressedfirst then must be released before the desired orange label key is selected SHIFT lock status is displayed in reverse video in the upper left hand corner of the screen The SHIFT lock indicator must not be present when the white label functions are to be used The SHIFT lock indicator must be present when the orange label functions are to be used Ch 2 Test Set Description 2 7 A B C D E F These keys are used to enter hexadecimal numbers and to provide labels for user defined information 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 These keys are used to enter user test patterns and telephone numbers They can also be used to provide labels for user defined information PRNSCRN The PRINT SCReeN key is used to print any alphanumeric and graphical information appearing on the screen 2 4 LEDs The bi color LEDs Light Emitting Diodes provide a visual indication forthe condition of the received signal The LEDs provide enough diagnostic information at a glance that additional testing may not be required by some users A LED will be lit green continuously when the particu
95. to Line 1 Rx b Verify that the pattern transmitted by Equipment 1 is shown on all available timeslots in this screen With reference to Figure 4 24 you should see the ALL ZEROES pattern on all timeslots 4 50 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 You have just verified the Line 1 signal is being received properly by the Sunset E10 Now you are ready to connect the test set to the Datacom device 7 Escape to the Main Menu a Enter TEST CONFIGURATION b Select E1 MUX Mode and configure the other settings as follows E1 TX INST L1 TX RX DROP L2 RX FRAMING as provisioned CRC 4 as provisioned RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMTCLK L1 RX DATACOM TYPE Interface type of connector TxSRC EIDRP MODE this is set as DCE MUX BERT Interface type chosen above E1INS EIDRP E1T S As required 8 Connectthe test set to the datacom device through the multiport Refer to Figure 4 25 Ch 4 Applications 4 51 Test Pattern 511 Datacom Device as DTE Test Equipment 1 t Equipment 2 OUT OUT IN IN Test Pattern 0000 Test Pattern 1 4 Figure 4 25 Emulating Add Drop MUX 9 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off a Verify that the PAT SYNC LEDis lit green and no red error LEDs appear 10 Escape to the Main Menu a Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA b Verify thatthe E10is receiving DTE s test pattern on its m
96. to the factory default settings Upon pressing ENTER at the FACTORY DEFAULTS line the screen should read Working There is no Factory Defaults screen and this process does not include a second step as in pressing ENTER a second time to continue Therefore do not press the ENTER key on the Factory Default selection unless you Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 127 want all the settings to return to the default settings Section 9 LANGUAGE SELECTION e Select the test set s working language MEAS 20 00 39 SELECTION LANGUAGE SELECTION LANG BEN ANGLAIS FRANC ITALIEN ESPAGN Figure 3 90 Language Selection Screen a Press the corresponding F key to select a language e English F1 e French F2 e Italian F3 e Spanish F4 All menu choices and settings will be shown in the language selected 3 128 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 1 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 2 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 13 1 2 13 2 2 14 Section 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Chapter 4 Applications Connecting the Cords Basic Applications Accept a New Circuit Monitor an In service Circuit Checking for Frequency Sync Measure Signal Level Run a Timed Test Manual Start Auto Start Observe Network Codes or Channel Data Monitor a Voice Frequency Channel Simple Talk Listen Send a Tone Place a Voice Call Fractional E1 Testing Using the Battery and AC Charger Printing from t
97. tones a high and alow to representa digit The frequency chart is indicated in Figure 10 11 High Frequency Hz 1209 1336 1477 O pl Br Low 6 Frequency 51 Figure 10 11 DTMF Frequency Key Pad Ch 10 Technology Overview 10 13 For example if the number 5 button is pressed frequencies of 1336 Hz and 770 Hz are generated DTMF registers converters or receivers then recognize these tones as representing the digit5 and translate them into digital signals Pulse signalling is an older technology than DTMF and was originally used for rotary phone sets When anumber is dialled a series of short IDLE SEIZURE signals are created with specific timing usually 10 pulses per second If anumber 3 is dialled the wheel will send 3 IDLE SEIZURE signals with a specific inter digit timing between the digits The switch will interpret the number of IDLE SEIZURE signals and the inter digit duration to determine the digit that has been dialled B bit dialing is used to toggle the B bit when seizing the line In the seizure state the B supervision bit is toggled ABCD ABCD If the number 463 is dialled the B bit will flash 4 times then rest for approximately one second toggle six times rest again and toggle 3 times ISDN provides digital services to end users with regular phone lines Interoffice Signalling MFR2 is a common signalling method used in the interoffice environment Similarto DTMF MFR2 uses two tones for each digit
98. via HDI 30 multiport E1 Mux Hitless 2048 kbps and Nx64 kbps E1 drop and insert via V 35 RS449 V 36 X 21 V 11 DCE only Hitless 64 kbps E1 drop and insert via RS232 DCE sync Hitless Nx64 kbps drop and insert N 1 to 8 via G 703 co directional Emulates terminal multiplex or add drop multiplex Muxtest tests 2 048 Mbps Nx64 kbps terminal multiplex Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 5 MFR2 DTMF DP DIALING amp ANALYSIS SW251 Programmable dial 1 to 32 digits 10 sets alphanumeric label Programmable dial tone level 5 to 20 dBm res 1 dB Programmable dial tone period and interdigit timing Programmable dial pulse break period MFR2 DTMF freq level twist tone period interdigital period received digit decode and analysis DP break PPS period received digit analysis Bi directional CAS ABCD signalling transition analysis VF NOISE MEASUREMENTS SW252 Signal to noise ratio measurement Noise measurements with 3 1 kHz flat psophometric weighting 1010 Hz notch with flat filters SS7 ANALYSIS SW253 Supports ITU T Q 700 series Chinese 14 or 24 bits Italian standards Bi directional analysis to bit level layers 2 3 amp 4 Configurable analysis channels Line 1 2 SU traffic analysis Statistical counters for FISU LSSU MSU SNM SNT TUP ISUP and SCCP messages FISU LSSU MSU and retrans mission counts on FIB and BIB based on number of messages MSU tracer Supports TUP ISUP SCCP SNM SNT messages User
99. voice channel level voice channel Rx ABCD view received data view FAS words view MFAS words etc For example if you are running a bit error rate test on the received signal from line 1 then you should choose Rx DROP as L1 Rx 3 Tx SOURCE Options THRU F1 TESTPAT F2 e THRU F1 is used for full duplex drop and insert testing on an in service line In this case the signal received on the Rxjack willbe transmitted out the Tx jack for Line 1 and Line 2 You will be inserting a signal on one or more channels on the line you chose in Tx INSERT The channels and corresponding ABCD bits on that line that are not being used will be passed through the set unchanged from Rx to Tx TESTPAT F2 is used for out of service bit error rate testing Inthis case atest pattern will be transmitted on the selected Tx INSERT jack During Nx64 or VF CHANNEL ACCESS testing anidle code will be inserted on the unused channels On the line that is not selected the channels and ABCD bits are passed through unchanged from Rx to Tx 4 FRAMING Options PCM 30 F1 PCM 31 F2 UNFRAME F3 Choose the framing that is appropriate for the circuit under test e If you are unsure of the proper framing push the AUTO key Use the combination which synchronizes properly and or allows error free measurement results PCM 30 means the set will synchronize on both Frame Alignment Signal FAS and MultiFrame Alignment Signal MFAS e PCM 31 means that
100. will stay on continuously until you press the LIGHT key again CONTINU is the default setting e Choosing TIMED F1 and the backlight will automatically turn itself off after the indicated number of minutes a Press the SHIFT lock key to display the SHIFT indicator b Type in any number of minutes between 1 and 99 c Press the SHIFT lock key again to remove the SHIFT indicator Printer items The factory default settings work with the printer supplied by the factory However you can alter these settings if you want to use the SunSet E10 with another printer Figure 3 88 shows the pin to pin assignments of the DIN to EIA 232 C cable supplied by Sunrise Telecom You are free to use this information to attempt to set the SunSet E10 up with another printer However Sunrise Telecom does not warrant the operation of the test set with any printer other than the one supplied by Sunrise Telecom Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 123 DIN 8 PIN EIA 232 C D SUB PIN DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION DSR 6 DSR TE TXD Gr RXD GND TI GND cts L7 Crs DIR IT DTR Figure 3 88 Printer Cable Pin Assignments 4 BAUDRATE Options 1200 F1 2400 F2 9600 F3 The Baud rate determines the number of shortest signalling elements per second on a transmission medium e The default setting is 9600 this setting is recommended for remote control operations 1200 and 2400 will not support remote control features 5 PARITY Option
101. 0 5 10 SU Monitor Screen 5 12 5 11 Setup Filter 5 12 5 12 SI Field Filtering Options 5 14 5 13 TUP Head Codes 5 16 Vill 5 14 ISUP Message Types 5 18 5 15 SCCP Messages 5 20 5 16 SNM Heading Codes 5 21 5 17 SNT Heading Codes 5 22 5 18 View Print Tracer Screen 5 24 5 19 Sample Printout 5 25 5 20 View Message Sample 5 26 5 21 Layer 4 Decode 5 27 5 22 SS7 Menu SU Analysis 5 28 5 23 SU Analysis pg 1 5 28 5 24 SU Analysis screen pg 2 5 29 5 25 Monitoring In service SS 7 Links M 5 31 5 26 Setup Filter Screen 5 32 5 27 SU Analysis 5 34 5 28 SU Analysis statisti cal view 5 35 6 01 ISDN Architecture 6 1 6 02 ISDN Protocol Architecture Layer 1 6 2 6 03 ISDN Frame Struc ture 6 4 6 04 LAP Frames DASS2 6 7 6 05 SABMR UA Frames 6 9 6 06 ISDN Primary Rate Menu 6 10 6 07 ISDN Configuration 6 11 6 08 Call Setup Screen 6 15 6 09 Start Link Call Setup SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Screen 2 6 16 6 10 D Channel Filter ETSI 6 19 6 11 D Channel Filter DPNSS DASS2 6 21 6 12 View Print Tracer 6 27 6 13 View Message Screen 6 28 6 15 RyJ 48 Pin outs 6 29 6 16 ISDN Call Setup TE 6 32 6 17 ISDN Call Setup NT 6 33 6 18 DASS2 Standard PBX Mode 6 36 6 19 DASS2 Standard ET Mode 6 36 6 20 ISDN Monitoring 6 38 6 21 Place a Data Call 6 40 6 22 BERT Results 6 41 7 01 GSM Network 7 1 7 02 GSM Framing 7 3 7 03 CCH Functions 7 4 7 04 GSM Signalling Protocol
102. 00 0 LSSU 00 0 LSSU 0 MSU 100 MSU 100 RETRANSMISSION FIB 938 FIB 466 BIB 334 BIB 351 RESUME RESTART Figure 5 28 SU Analysis Statistical View Ch 5 SS 7 5 35 5 36 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 1 5 2 1 6 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 24 25 Section 3 Section 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Chapter 6 ISDN ISDN Technology Overview Introduction ISDN Network Architecture ISDN Protocol ISDN Messages DASS2 Technology DASS2 Layer 2 DASS2 Frame Types DPNSS Technology ISDN Analysis Menus Configuration Start Link Call Setup Setup Filter Setup Filter for ETSI Setup Filter for DPNSS and DASS2 Start Tracer View Print Tracer RJ 48 Pin outs ISDN Applications ISDN Call Setup ETSI ISDN Call Setup DASS2 DPNSS ISDN Monitoring Placing a Data Call amp Running a BERT SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 oo oo oV0 PrPD 29 30 30 35 37 39 SunSet Eo D Version 2 37 1 0 ISDN Technology Overview 1 1 Introduction ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network was conceived to provide digital services to the end users using regular phone lines Specifically ISDN targets both residential and business custom ers Two configurations were designed 2B D for BRI Basic Rate Interface and 30B D for high speed PRI Primary Rate Each B channel has 64 kbit s availability for voice or data transport The D channelis used for signalling and dat
103. 01 2 IEC 801 3 IEC 801 4 IEC 950 1991 Safety of Information Technology Equipment The tests have been performed ina typical configuration The conformity is indicated by the symbol CE i e Conformit eurpo enne SunSet EO Version 2 37 Chapter 1 Unpacking Section1 Unpacking the SunSet SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 SunSet E10 h Version 2 37 Section 1 Unpacking the SunSet Use the following procedure for unpacking your new SunSet 1 Remove the packing list from the shipping container 2 Remove the SunSet and accessories from the shipping con tainer 3 Inspect all parts and immediately report any damage to both the carrier and Sunrise Telecom 4 Verify that all parts specified on the packing list were received 5 Complete the Warranty Registration Card and return it imme diately to Sunrise Telecom or your national distributor NOTE Sunrise Telecom must receive your Warranty Reg istration Card in order to provide you with updated software releases 6 Ensure the software cartridge is fully seated in its slot refer to Figure 1 1 Software Cartridge Installation Ch 1 Unpacking 1 1 Software W INseRTHERE WW SS250 WARNING High voltages may be present Re on E1 lines Insert or remove SunWare WARNING High voltagoa may ba present Eaa only wah payer off Use Sunset cartridges only with power off Use SunSet ge ly Se charger only Set access mode before plugging into
104. 1 0 1 1 3 0 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 4 c3 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 5 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 6 c4 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 7 0 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 8 cl 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 9 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 10 c2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 11 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 SME 12 c3 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 13 E 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 14 c4 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8 Figure 10 8 CRC 4 Multiframe Format Ch 10 Technology Overview 10 11 E bit Performance Monitoring When the terminal equipment of a 2 048 circuit is optioned for CRC 4 transmission E bittransmission may also be enabled E bit performance monitoring of the circuitis now possible The terminat ing equipmenttransmits an E bit error on the 2 048 Mbps line when it receives a CRC 4 error However E bit error transmission is a relatively new feature in 2 048 transmission Therefore it is likely that the embedded equipment does not transmit the E bit error information correctly You should check the specifications of your network Refer to Figure 10 9 1 SunSetEl0 No Errors Protected Monitor Trouble Point Error Source CRC Error gt Terminal e i r Terminal Equipment A Network a Equipment B Gps _ PER E bit Error SunSet E10 Protected Monitor E bit Errors 2 Figure 10 9 E bit Performance Monitoring In service Circuit When this type of terminal equipment detects an incoming CRC 4erro
105. 22 SYSTEM PARAMETERS GENERAL CONFIG ERASE NV RAM FULL SELF TEST CLR PRINT BUFFER VERSION OPTION FACTORY DEFAULTS Figure 3 86 SYSTEM PARAMETERS Menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 121 8 1 General Configuration e Set the correct time and date e Set the backlight duration e Set several printing options Figure 3 87 depicts a sample screen 20 21 11 GENERAL CONFIG DATE Y M D 96 01 03 TIME H M S 20 13 24 BACK LIGHT KAONE PRINTER BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY NONE STOP BIT L SBIT BITS CHAR 8 BIT CR LF INSRT CR LF TIMED CONTINU Figure 3 87 General Configuration Screen The following items are available for configuration 1 DATE Y M D e Set the date by pressing the SHIFT key and the appropriate number keys for the year month and day The test set inserts the hyphens for you Numbers that are out of range will be rejected Press the SHIFT lock key again to remove the SHIFT indicator 2 TIME H M S e Set the time by pressing the SHIFT key and the appropriate number keys for the hour minute and second The test set inserts the colons for you Numbers that are out of range will be rejected e Press the SHIFT lock key again to remove the SHIFT indicator 3 122 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 BACK LIGHT Options TIMED F1 CONTINU F2 This timer controls how long the backlight will stay lit when you press the LIGHT key e Choosing CONTINU F2 means that the backlight
106. 3 112 3 38 registration 1 1 remote alarm indication 3 51 Remote Control 4 35 cursor commands 4 38 Windows 95 4 40 Remote Defect Indication 3 47 Remote Loopback 9 6 repair 11 7 Request to Send 9 6 RESULTS FREQUENCY screen 3 38 RESYNC key 2 4 Return Merchandise Authori zation 11 7 Right Arrow 2 6 RJ 4 cable 4 36 RJ 48 Pin outs 6 29 RL 9 6 RLL 7 12 RLL Message Types 7 13 RLM 7 19 RMA 11 7 RS 232 interface 2 11 RS 232 Pin outs Datacom 9 19 RS 449 Pin outs Datacom 9 22 RS530 Pin outs 9 23 Datacom 9 23 RT 3 32 RTS 9 4 9 6 RX BNC connector 2 12 RX jack 2 11 Rx DROP 3 5 RxLVL 1 3 8 RxLVL 2 3 8 Index S S frame 6 5 SABMR 6 8 SACCH 7 3 SAPI 6 14 6 19 7 11 SAPI values 6 20 7 12 SCCP 5 4 7 24 Filtering 5 19 GSM 7 6 SCP 5 1 SELECT TIMESLOT screen 3 6 Self Test 11 3 SELF TEST FREQ CAL 3 126 Send Test Pattern 3 22 Serial Number 1 4 Serial Port 2 11 Communications 4 36 remote control settings 4 36 Settings 4 30 Service Access Point Identi fier 6 4 7 11 Service Indicator Code 6 25 Service Indicator field 5 13 SES 3 36 3 47 Setup Filter DASS2 DPNSS 6 21 ISDN 6 19 6 21 SS 7 5 11 Setup Filter for ETSI ISDN 6 19 SF 5 6 SHIFT key 2 1 2 7 SHIFT lock key 2 1 2 7 SI FIELD 5 13 SIC 6 25 SIC CODE 6 25 SIF 5 5 SIG ALM screen 3 41 Signal level 4 13 10 6 Signalling 10 13 Signalling Connection Control XV Part 5 4 Signalling emulator 3 96 Edit emulator 3 97 Start emulation 3 101 Signallin
107. 3 121 3 87 General Configura tion Screen 3 122 3 88 Printer Cable Pin Assignments 3 124 3 89 Version Option Screen 3 127 3 90 Language Selection Screen 3 128 4 01 Plugging In Monitor Mode 4 2 4 02 Plugging In Bridge Mode 4 3 4 03 Plugging in TERM Mode 4 4 4 04 Plugging in THRU Mode 4 5 4 05 Accept a New Span 4 7 4 06 Monitor an In Service Circuit MONIT 4 9 4 07 Monitoring an In Service Circuit B 4 9 4 09 Frequency Synchro nization 4 12 4 09 Monitoring an In Service Circuit BRID 4 10 4 10 Measuring Signal Level 4 15 4 11 View Received Data 4 18 4 12 Place a Call 4 24 4 13 MFC Dial Screen 4 25 4 14 Fractional E1 Testing 4 28 4 15 SS122A Null Modem vii Pin Assignments 4 31 4 16 SS115B Printer Cable Pin Assignments 4 32 4 17 Printer Switch Settings 4 33 4 18 Typical Setup 4 38 4 19 Dual Drop and Insert THRU Mode Test 4 42 4 20 In Service Dual Drop and Insert THRU 4 43 4 21 MUXTEST Setup 4 45 4 22 E10 MUXTEST Configuration 4 45 4 23 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex 4 48 4 24 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplex 4 50 4 25 Emulating Add Drop MUX 4 52 5 01 SS 7 Network 5 2 5 02 SS 7 and OSI Protocol Architecture 5 3 5 03 MSU Message Structure 5 5 5 04 LSSU Message Structure 5 6 5 05 FISU Message Structure 5 7 5 06 ISUP Messages Used in a Typical Pho 5 8 5 07 Typical IAM Informa tion Fields 5 8 5 08 SS 7 Analysis Menu 5 9 5 09 SS 7 Configuration Screen 5 1
108. 48 kbps Nx56 Nx64 N 1 to 32 Send test patterns RS232 V 24 Async DCE and DTE 2047 511 127 63 1111 0000 and FOX All other interfaces all available patterns Automatic pattern synchronization G 821 measurements Measurement of Data Loss Data Loss Seconds Slips Slip 12 4 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 Seconds Pattern Sync Loss and Pattern Sync Loss Seconds Bit error injection Histograms for Bit Error ES SES UAS Datacom Timing Analysis Resolution 300ms Change of state of the following control leads is recorded and displayed Table or Graphic Mode RS232 V 24 Async Sync DTE DCE V 35 DCE DTE RS449 V 36 DTE DCE RTS CTS DTR DSR DCD RL LL X 21 DTE DCE C Transmit control leads selectable on off RS232 V 24 Sync and Async DTE RTS DTR RL LL RS232 V 24 Sync and Async DCE CTS DSR DCD V 35 DTE RTS DTR RL LL V 35 DCE CTS DSR DCD RS449 V 36 DTE RTS DTR RL LL RS449 V 36 DDE CTS DSR DCD X 21 DTE C X 21 DCE Storage Capability Graphical Mode Last 40s of change Table Mode 100 pages Tx data clock selectable internal or receive Receiver ranges V 35 high 0 2 to 7 0V low 7 0 to 0 2V RS449 V 36 high 0 2 to 6 0V low 6 0 to 0 2V RS232 V 24 high 3 0 to 25 0V 1 low 25 0 to 3 0V Transmitter ranges V 35 0 44 to 0 66V differential output RS449 V 36 2 0 to 5 0V differential output RS232 V 24 12 to 15V high 12 to 15V low Modes Datacom
109. 99Yy pojdosor jou jsonbay ZI epoDd Joyerado Aelap 0 ss999Vy IT 9P0D Joje1odo SUIWIODUT 0 Ss999V a au G a 0 a p sn jou s eusisg povasutr 1ossoiddns oyoe jyey Surono 10 BdIpUI apod AUNOD Quaudinba 153 oye wo ne Aq 9 oyes pur Ted ISO L p gt mba 100saiddns oy99 ou IoywoIpul apoo ANUNOD posinbas Jossoiddns oy99 Jfey Surosjno 1oyeoIpul opos ANunoy apoo Amunoo y pue uoneoTput apoo Anuno9 oy 197e JUN oy uo payrusuen oq Aew speusis say IOAOMOY IIUI PSULIJ euoreulojut Uv UI SOJVUIUIIO JUH e UYM MLI oy JO uoneunsop Jo Aunos y UT SOJEUTULIOI JI UOYM YUI PUOTVUIOIUT uv UO ponrusuen eUsIs Is r OY dn oyew speusis osoyy 9 uunjoJ o xsia 6a 8 xsia Lusiq 9 usq s xsia pusiq e xsd aid q usq JISIp Suneurwriostq Q1S1p asensury eds QISIp osensue areds G131p adendue areds QISIp aden ue areds ys ueds y 3 p sdenZue uerssny JISIp sdendue uewoo 11SIp osensueT ys psug Sip odendue ysus g 1131p odengue Tee Ser Ho HNNAN DODOA ti oie eee Baan Bian ANNTNH OM OD sy ewoy P peusis y Jo SurueaW peusis y Jo uoneusisog uoneurquoy Figure 3 50 Group 1 Forward Signals SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 78 Combi Destination Meaning of the Signal nation of the Signal 1 B 1 Spare for national use 2 B 2 Send special information tone 3 B 3
110. ANNEL ACCESS menu list Upon entering the screen will appear as in Figure 3 54 21 33 36 DTMF MF DP CAS ANALYSIS TONE TYPE wig Rx 1 T S 01 Rx 2 T S 01 press ENTER to start Figure 3 54 DTMF DP CAS Analysis Select the following 3 80 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 1 TONE TYPE Options CAS F1 MFR2 F2 DTMF F3 DP F4 Select the tone type to be analyzed e Channel Associated Signalling F1 e Multifrequency signalling for Register 2 F2 e Dual Tone Multifrequency F3 e Dial Pulse F4 2 Rx 1 T S Options 1 31 Select the Line 1 transmit timeslot to be analyzed Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as necessary 3 Rx 2 T S Options 1 31 Select the Line 2 receive timeslot to be analyzed e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as necessary 4 When your settings are correct press ENTER Note that the actual Rx T S you will monitor is determined by the Rx DROP setting in your TEST CONFIGURATION 5 Inthe next screen press ANALYZE F1 to view the analysis of the received digits 6 Press ESCAPE as necessary to return to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu The following three screens are sample printouts of the CAS DTMF and DP analyses Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 81 19 05 28 DTMF MF DP CAS ANALYSIS DIGIT 1 10 INTD 097 L H Hz 1740 1877 PERD 105 dBm 6 5 4 8 TWST 1 7 DIGIT 2 12 INTD L H Hz 1502 1982 PERD dBm 6 5 4 8 TWST DIGIT 3 11 INTD L H Hz 1385 1983 PERD
111. BCD with a label of TESTO1 1 From the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu use the cursor keys to move the cursor to DTMF MFR2 DP DIALING and press ENTER 3 74 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 2 In the DTMF MFR2 DP DIALING screen choose the dial METHOD MF FRWD F1 MF BKWD F1 DTMF F3 MF and F4 are also available 3 At the NUMBER line select USER more F1 4 Atthe USER DIAL NUMBER menu move the cursor to a blank space anywhere between 1 to 10 a Choose CREATE F1 5 The cursor should now stay at the LABEL editing position ready to accept the entry 6 Choose TOGGLE F3 The letter A on the alphabet grid starts blinking 7 Use the cursor keys to move around the alphabet grid until T starts blinking a Choose SELECT F4 You should now see T as the first character of the label Select the E S and T letters by following the same procedure 8 After you have selected the last T choose TOGGLE F3 The alphabet grid should stop blinking Press the SHIFT lock key to display the SHIFT indicator 9 Press the 0 key then press the 1 key 10 Now you have entered the label You should see TESTO1 displayed next to LABEL Press the SHIFT lock key to remove the SHIFT indicator e DO NOT PRESS the ENTER key 11 Press the cursor key down once to move the cursor to the NUMBER section Now you are ready to enter the telephone number 12 Press the SHIFT lock key once a Verify that the SHIFT indicator is shown on t
112. BER menu use the arrow keys to move the cursor to a blank line a Press CREATE F1 b Alternatively you may press STORE more F2 in the MFC DIALING screen 2 Enter the LABEL first a With the cursor placed on the LABEL entry press TOGGLE F3 to access the alphabet grid below b Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired letter c Press SELECT more F4 Continue this process as necessary d When you are finished with the alphabet grid press TOGGLE F3 to return to the LABEL entry e Press INSERT F1 key to enter the letters A F or numbers 0 9 f Use the DELETE F2 key to delete any unwanted digits g You may enter up to 10 digits for the Label 3 Next enter the number Move the cursor to the NUMBER entry a Use the INSERT F1 key to enter the letters A F and the numbers 1 9 b Press the DELETE F2 key to delete any unwanted digits c You may enter up to 32 digits for the NUMBER 4 When you have finished press the ENTER key This stores your new number and returns you to the USER DIAL NUMBER menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 89 6 7 2 MFC Tracer This menu displays and stores MFR2 Compelled signalling sequences It simultaneously monitors both directions and records both the CAS bits and the dialled digits It also shows a timestamp for each sequence Refer to Figure 3 62 17 42 29 LINE 1 01 sec LINE 2 01 sec ABCD 101 INIT ABCD 1001 INIT ABCD 0001 00 ABCD 0001 04 ABCD
113. Bit Error MIN Minimum MSC Mobile Switching Centre MON Monitor msec 1 millisecond 1 1000 of a second law mu law voice companding law usec 1 microsecond 1 millionth of a second N nsec nano second one billionth of a second NE Network Element NT Network Termination NV RAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory P P F Pass Fail PAT Pattern PBX Private Branch Exchange ppm parts per million 13 4 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence PRI Primary Rate Interface PRN SCRN Print Screen PRNT Print PRNTR Printer Q QRS Quasi Random Signal R R Receive RAI Remote Alarm Indication RCV Receive REF Reference RESYNCH Resynchronization RLL Radio Link Layer RT Remaining Time RX Receive S SABME Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended SAPI Service Access Point Identifier SCCP Signalling Connection Control Part SCRN Screen SES Severely Errored Second SF Super Frame SIG Signal SLIPS Clock Slips SPLT Split SS SunSet SW Software SYNC Synchronized T T Transmit TCH Traffic Channels TE Terminal Equipment TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier TERM Terminated Ch 13 Abbreviations 13 5 T S Time Slot TS 16 Time Slot 16 TERM Terminated TRAU Transcoder and Rate Adaptation Unit TX Transmit U UAS Unavailable Second UI Unit Interval V V Volts VAC Volts AC VF Voice
114. CK L2 Rx a Press the ENTER key when all of the settings are correct 5 Plug the reference E1 signal into the Line 2 RX jack e This is usually the MONITOR jack of the known synchronized signal 6 Plug the Line 1 RX jack into the MONITOR jack of the side to be tested Line 1 was set as the Rx DROP line which deter mines the measured line and reference line 7 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking history lights and turn them off MON EQUIPMENT N ELTERMINAL known to be il aur T EQUIPMENT e roperl N synchronized gt lt J synchronized EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT Figure 4 9 Frequency Synchronization 8 From the MAIN MENU move your cursor to the MEASUREMENT RESULTS menu item and press the ENTER key a Press the PAGE DN F2 key until you are reviewing the FREQUENCY screen b Observe if the frequency value will vary from the 2 048 MHz reference frequency You will also see gt gt gt or lt lt lt indicating 4 12 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 the rate of frequency slippage c Note the WNDR value This will provide an indication of any low frequency variation in the E1 signal s frequency 2 4 Measure Signal Level A signal level measurement can be performed by itself or in conjunction with one of the other tests 1 Choose what kind of RX LVL you want to use e You can make the measurement in TERM MONITOR and BRIDGE
115. COM testing This port uses an HDI 30 pin connector interface to connect with other industry standard interfaces such as RS 232 V 24 V 35 X 21 V 11 RS449 V 36 RS530 and 64Kbps G 703 codirectional 15V NimH The 15V NimH jack is where the AC Battery Charger is connected Only use a Sunrise Telecom charger The SunSet may be operated with a discharged battery provided the charger is connected The battery will charge while the SunSetis being operated if the charger remains connected The following ports are duplicated for Line 1 and 2 TX The TX 75 ohm BNC connector is where the 2 048 Mbps line signal is transmitted from the SunSet Optionally 75 ohm 1 6 5 6 mm or 120 ohm BR2 connectors are available Ch 2 Test Set Description 2 11 RX The RX 75ohm BNC connector is where the 2 048 Mbps line signal is received by the SunSet Optionally 75 ohm 1 6 5 6 mm or 120 ohm BR2 connectors are available 2 12 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 Section 1 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 Section 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 Section 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Section 5 Section 6 6 1 6 2 Chapter 3 Menu Descriptions Introduction Test Configuration E1 Test Mode E1 MUX Mode MUXTEST Mode Send Test Pattern Standard Patterns User Test Patterns X 50 Test Patterns Measurement Results E1 Results amp General Definitions E1 MUX Mode Results MUXTEST Mode Results DATACOM Mode Results Other Measurements View Received Data View FAS Words
116. DN Applications ISDN Call Setup ETSI ISDN Call Setup DASS2 DPNSS ISDN Monitoring Placing a Data Call amp Running a BERT GSM Section 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 GSM Technology Overview GSM Network Architecture GSM Radio Transmission GSM Protocol TRAU Frames SunSet EO Version 2 37 11 23 24 27 30 30 oOMmanawRNH 29 30 30 35 37 39 Apo Section 2 GSM Analysis Menus 2 1 A bis Interface 2 1 1 Configuration 2 1 2 A bis Monitor 2 1 3 A bis Traffic 2 1 4 Layer 2 Traffic 2 2 A MAP Interface 2 2 1 A Map Configuration 2 2 2 Setup Filter 2 2 3 Start Tracer 2 2 4 View Print Tracer Section 3 GSM Voice TRAU BERT 3 1 GSM Monitor 3 2 Voice TRAU XMT 3 3 GSM 16k BERT Chapter 8 X 50 Section 1 X 50 Technology Overview 1 1 X 50 Byte Structure 1 2 X 50 Framing 1 2 1 Division 2 Framing 1 2 2 Division 3 Framing Section 2 X 50 Analysis 2 1 X 50 Setup 2 2 View X 50 Info Section 3 X 50 Applications 3 1 Testing a 64K X 50 Frame 3 2 Multiplexing a 64K X 50 Frame 3 3 Test a Multiplex 3 4 Test a 64K X 50 Signal from X50 MUX Chapter 9 Datacom Section 1 Datacom Technology Overview 1 1 Introduction 1 2 Communication Components 1 3 Transmission Basics 1 4 Data Networks 1 5 Call Control Procedure SunSet E10 gt Version 2 37 11 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 28 29 30 33 NNN a Fa 12 12 15 18 21 BRonw _ 18 23 23 Test the Datacom Port of a 2M Multiplex 26
117. Discontinuous Trans SID Silence Descriptor SP Speech Indicator TAF Time Alignment Flag Figure 7 7 TRAU Speech C bit Coding SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 2 GSM Analysis Menus Enter the GSM ANALYSIS item in the MAIN MENU then enter A bis INTERFACE The A bis Interface Menu contains four items CONFIGURATION A bis MONITOR A bis TRAFFIC and LAYER 2 TRAFFIC 2 1 A bis Interface 04 45 32 CONFIGURATION LINE 1 RX T S LINE 2 RX T S 1 L3 Decode YES GSM Abis rate 64 kbps SAPI amp TEI DECIMAL NEXT PREVIUS Figure 7 8 GSM Configuration Screen 2 1 1 Configuration From the A bis INTERFACE menu enter CONFIGURATION The following items should be set up in this screen 1 LINE 1 RX T S Options 1 31 e Use the F keys NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 to select the desired number This item specifies the received time slot for Line 1 2 Line 2 RX T S Options 1 31 Ch 7 GSM 7 9 e Use the F keys NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 to select the desired number This item specifies the received time slot for Line 2 3 L3 Decode Options YES F1 NO F2 Decide whether to have the test set decode Layer 3 messages 4 GSM Abis rate Options 64 kbps F1 16 kbps F2 Select the Abis rate lf you select 16 kbps you will be presented with two additional line items 04 45 32 CONFIGURATION LINE 1 Rx T S LINE 2 Rx T S L3 Decode GSM Abis rate SAPI amp TEI Line 1 Rx S c
118. During VF CHANNEL ACCESS when the TEST CONFIGU RATION TxSOURCE is set to TESTPAT idle channel code and signalling A B C D bits will be inserted into the unselected channels The idle channel code and signal can be programmed inthe MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAMETERS IDLE CHNL CODE and IDLE CHNL A B C D menu items 6 1 VF Measurements The VF MEASUREMENTS menu lets you choose e which channel to test for both transmitting and receiving Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 65 ewhether to talk send a tone or place quiet termination on the transmit signal e the tone frequency and level e which signalling bits to send e to listen for both or either line It also tells you e the received signalling bits e the received 8 bit data e the received frequency and level Refer to Figure 3 45 VF Measurements VF MEASUREMENTS x 1 DI Rx 1 01 Rx 2 T 01 INSER TALK TONE 1020 TONE 0 Tx 1 A B C D 1001 LISTEN SIDE BOTH RX 1 A B C D 1001 Rx 1 DATA 11010011 Rx 1 FRO LVL 1004 00 3 PREVIUS Figure 3 45 VF Measurements Using Figure 3 45 as an example the following features were set The Tx T S and Tx A B C D are set for Line 1 in this screen since TxX INSERT was setfor Line 1 inthe TEST CONFIGURATION screen To insert on Line 2 and consequently see Tx 2 T S on this screen select Tx INSERT L2 TX in TEST CONFIGURA TION Similarly the labels Rx 1 A B C D Rx DATA and Rx FREQ can all be chang
119. E 1 E1T S Options Nx64 Select which NX64 Kbps channels to insert or drop the signal on e Pressing the F1 key on this slot will lead you to the SELECT TIME SLOT screen Here you may select your transmit receive time slots a Cursorto the desired timeslot then press SELECT F2 This timeslot will remain highlighted Continue selecting timeslots as needed b You may deselect the timeslot highlighted by the cursor by 3 18 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 pressing UN SEL F3 Pressing CLR ALL F4 will erase all the selections so you may start the process over Figure 3 3 provides the SELECT TIME SLOT screen for E1 mode 2 Rx Options E1 F1 DATACOM TYPE selected above i e RS449 Determines the side Bit Error Rate Test measurements are performed on e The test set will automatically configure the Rx and Tx selections to be opposite sides Thus if you select E1 for Rx The Tx side will automatically be changed to the low speed datacom side 3 Tx Options E1 F1 DATACOM TYPE selected above F2 This determines the side to which you send the test pattern e The test set automatically configures the Rx and Tx to be opposite sides Thus if you select E1 for Tx the Rx side will automati cally be changed to the low speed datacom side Figures 3 12 and 3 14 illustrate the Rx and Tx selections MULTIPORT Datacom Side L1 Tx 64 Kbps E1 Side 2 048Mbps a N Transmit ou
120. ED will light green only if the test set receives the same inverted pattern as it transmits 2 IDLE CHANNEL CODE Options any 8 bit pattern Program the idle code to be any 8 bit pattern e This code is used during VF channel access operations when the Tx Source is set to the TESTPAT mode e The idle code is also used in fractional E1 testing to fill up the unused channels 3 IDLE CHANNEL ABCD Options any 4 bit pattern Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 111 Program the idle channel signalling bits of channels 1 through 30 in the MFAS framing mode e These signalling bits are found in time slot 16 of frames 1 through 15 e The factory default 1101 is set in accordance with ITU G 704 4 REFERENCE CLOCK Options NORMAL F1 MLTIPRT F2 Determine the source of the reference clock e Press F1 to use the normal reference clock as configured in TEST CONFIGURATION INTERN L1 RX e Press F2 to use a reference source from the Multiport 5 TEST PAT SELECT Options 20ITU F1 QRS F2 Determines whether to place 20ITU F1 or QRS F2 in the SEND TEST PATTERN screen 7 5 ALARM GENERATION Figure 3 80 depicts the ALARM GENERATION screen 17 31 55 ALARM GENERATION FAS DISTANT ENABLE MFAS DISTANT PANN AIS DISABLE T S 16 AIS DISABLE DISABLE Figure 3 80 ALARM GENERATION 3 112 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 e View a listing of the alarms you may trans
121. ENTER You have just programmed the set to inject Bit errors at 1x10 6 rate each time you press the ERR INJ key Note when the setis injecting errors ata constant rate an ERR INJ indicator will be shown at the upper center of the screen To turn off the error rate injection press the ERR INJ key once and verify that the ERR INJ indicator on the screen has turned off Note Code error injection is disabled when you are using atest pattern which includes long strings of zeroes such as 1 8 3 24 and 0000 unframed The rationale is that injected code errors violate the intentional bipolar violations of HDB3 coding and cause bit errors If youchange the framing to PCM 30 or PCM 31 youwill be able to inject and detect code errors 3 110 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 7 4 Other Parameters Figure 3 79 depicts the OTHER PARAMETERS screen OTHER PARAMETERS PATTERN INVERSION BIRNEN IDLE CHNL CODE 211010101 DLE CHNL A B C D 1101 ENCE CLOCK NORMAL SELECT 20ITU Figure 3 79 Other Parameters Screen 1 PATTERN INVERSION Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 Enable or disable pattern inversion When pattern inversion is enabled transmitted 1s will be turned into Os and transmitted Os will be turned into 1s Forinstance with pattern inversion selected a 3 in 24 pattern will actually be transmitted as a 21 in 24 pattern e The PAT SYNC L
122. ENU The following display definitions are used in this screen PAGE Indicates which of the available 64 pages of data is currently being displayed T S Specifies the Time Slot being viewed BINARY This column shows the binary data actually being received on the line Each line represents the 8 bit time slot HEX This column shows the hexadecimal representation of the 8 bits being transmitted in each time slot ASCII This column displays the ASCII representation of the 8 bit binary framing word which has been received The character displayed to the left of the parentheses represents the 8 bit framing words translated in their present order The character displayed within the parentheses represents the 8 bits trans lated in reverse order 5 2 View FAS Words View FAS Words may be accessed via the Other Measure ments menulist Valid framing is required to enter this screen View FAS Words allows you to view the live presentation of E1 framing binary words Time slots 0 of frames 0 through 15 are displayed in this screen Refer to Figure 3 33 FAS Frame Words 3 50 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 FAS FRAME WORDS 12345678 12345678 c0011011 ilasssss 10011011 01011111 00011011 01011111 10011011 11011111 10011011 01011111 00011011 LOT TT 00011011 11011111 10011011 11011111 10011011 11011111 Figure 3 33 FAS Frame Words The even frames 0 through 14 contain the FAS Frame Alignment Signal in bits 2
123. ERM E1INS PATRN XMTCLK L1 RX EIT S Nx64K L1 Tx L2 Tx Figure 3 8 E1 MUX Menu E1 The only difference in the E1Mux settings in the Transmit Clock If necessary you may refer to the more detailed descriptions of each E1 configuration selection in Section 2 1 of this chapter 7 XMT CLOCK XMT CLK will automatically be set for the Tx INST selection e If TX INST L1 Tx then XMT CLK L1 Tx If Tx INST L2 Tx 3 14 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 then XMT CLK L2 Tx e E1 MUX uses a loop timing clock For loop timing the same line is chosen for TxX INST and XMT CLK DATACOM The datacom settings configure the multiport 1 TYPE Options V 35 F1 RS449 F2 X 21 F3 G 703 more F1 RS232 more F2 TYPE determines the electrical interface at the multiport 2 Tx Source Options PATRN F1 E1DRP F2 Tx Source sets the transmit source for the multiport e Choose PATRN to send a test pattern out the multiport e Choose E1DRP to send the dropped NX64 Kbps signal out the multiport MUX The MUX settings define the multiplex configuration forthe E10 1 BERT Options E1DRP F1 DATACOM TYPE selected above F2 RS232 G 703 etc Determines which multiplexed circuit direction will be bit error tested e E1DRP means the NX64 Kbps signal dropped from the 2 048 Mbps signal will be bit error tested e RS232 V 35 etc means the signal coming from the low speed RS232 side will be tested 2 E1INS Options
124. Enter TEST CONFIGURATION a Choose E1 MUX MODE b Configure the set as follows E1 Settings TxXINSERT L1 TX RX DROP L1 RX FRAMING As specified by your span design CRC 4 AS specified by your span design RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMTCLOCK L1 RX DATACOM SETTINGS TYPE Select the datacom interface that will provide the 64Kbps X 50 frame Choose from V 35 F1 RS449 F2 X 21 F3 G 703 more F1 and RS232 more F2 For RS232 only the synchronous mode is available TxSRC Select the source of the signal transmitted onto the datacom 64 kbps X 50 side e If PATRN F1 is chosen the E10 will internally transmit the test pattern selected in the TEST PATTERN screen on the datacom 64 kbps X 50 side You should see a reverse video T located next to the datacom port e If E1DRP F2 is selected the E10 will drop a 64 kbps time slot Selected in E1 T S onto the datacom 64 kbps X 50 side You should see a line connecting the DROP from LINE 1 to the datacom port in the graphic screen eYou can verify your selection by pressing the GRAPHIC Ch 8 X 50 8 15 key MODE This is set as DCE MUX settings BERT Select the side for BER testing This selection will de termine which side will be displayed in MEASUREMENT RESULTS and in the LEDS e You may choose to display the information about the dropped 64Kbps timeslot on the E1 side by pressing E1DRP F1 You may display information about the datacom type s
125. F1 Authentication Center 7 ADDR NUMB Options YES F1 NONE F2 e Select NONE F2 to capture all address numbers e When you press YES F1 you must enter in the desired number If you have previously entered a number in this spot that number will appear again e To enter a new number press the SHIFT key and enter in the necessary numbers from the keypad 8 TCAP OTID Options YES F1 NONE F2 MAP uses the SS 7 TCAP Transaction Capability Action Part to control end to end dialogue and remote operation handling The Originating Transaction ID is part of the TCAP sublayer e Upon selecting YES F1 the previously entered ID number will appear e You may enter a new number by pressing the SHIFT key and entering the necessary numbers from the keypad e You may enter up to ten decimal digits e Remember to press the SHIFT key when you are finished 7 24 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 9 TCAP DTID Options YES F1 NONE F2 TCAP DTID refers to the TCAP Destination Transaction ID e Upon selecting YES F1 the previously entered ID number will appear e You may enter a new number by pressing the SHIFT key and entering the necessary numbers from the keypad e You may enter up to ten decimal digits e Remember to press the SHIFT key when you are finished 10 INVOKE ID Options YES F1 NONE F2 The Invoke ID is part of TCAP s component portion information element tag part of the TCAP Transaction Sublayer
126. I Information Field C Control Field A Address Field Figure5 LAP Frames In brief the LAP fields shown above are defined as Address Field e Transmitted first e Contains 2 octets e Identifies the traffic channel carried on timeslot 0 associated with its signalling frame Control Field e Transmitted second e One octet long e Contains a frame type code and sometimes a sequence number Information Field e Not always present in the LAP frame e Contains an information block from 0 45 octets long which is transferred transparently across the link Frame Check Sequence e Transmitted last e Composed of two octets e Conveys the Cyclic Redundancy Code corresponding to the Ch 6 ISDN 6 7 Address control and possibly Information fields e FCS is calculated according to the method defined in BTNR vol 190 5 5 1 5 2 DASS2 Frame Types There are three frame types Unnumbered Information UI Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode Restricted SABMR and Unnum bered Acknowledgment UA A frame may be transmitted as either a command or response frame as indicated by the Command Response bit within the Address Field Command frames are used to carry information and control the link Response frames acknowledge the receipt of a command frame UI may be either a command UIC or a response UIR SABMR is only a command while UA is only a response UIC s control field carries a Send Sequence Number which identifies th
127. IFT lock key to display the SHIFT indicator b Enter the numbers 1 through 9 A B C and D 32 digits may be programmed c For MF method and can not be used Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 73 d For DTMF dialing the E and F keys represent and respectively Note MF 0 is combination 10 and is shown on the display as A e Press the ENTER key to dial the number This will send the indicated digits with DIAL PERIOD and SILENT PERIOD as indicated in VF CHANNEL ACCESS DIAL PARAMETERS Speed Dialing Procedure Use this procedure to speed dial a user number which was programmed at an earlier time 1 From the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu enter the DTMF MFR2 DP DIALING item 2 Press ENTER to get into the DTMF MFR2 DP DIALING screen 3 Choose the dialing method and cursor down to the NUMBER 4 Choose more F4 twice and then choose USER F1 to get the list of USER DIAL NUMBERS This is your speed dialing list 5 Move the cursor down to the desired number and press ENTER twice to dial the number You will be returned to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS screen Entering amp Editing Speed Dialing USER Numbers e Program and store up 10 DTMF DP or MF user numbers e Each user number can have up to 32 digits e An alphanumeric label 10 characters long can also be pro grammed for each phone number The label makes it easier to remember what the number is used for Follow this procedure to program the number 12345A
128. IS ISDN ANALYSIS GSM ANALYSIS X 50 ANALYSIS C BIT ANALYSIS HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS PROPAGATION DELAY Figure 3 31 OTHER MEASUREMENTS Most of these menu choices are described here in Section 5 A few however are discussed within their own chapters SS 7 is handled in Chapter 5 ISDN in Chapter 6 GSM in Section 7 X 50 in Chapter 8 and Datacom in Chapter 9 You may find all other selections in this section 3 48 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 5 1 View Received Data Refer to Figure 3 32 View Received Data for a typical screen display Note This item is not available when in DATACOM Mode or when X 50 Analysis has been enabled MEAS 01 30 09 VIEW RECEIVED DATA i 00 BINARY HEX ASCII 00011011 10001110 01000100 11011010 01100101 00100010 10100001 00110000 D PAGE UP PAGE DN RESUME Figure 3 32 View Received Data To view this screen use the following procedure 1 Move the cursor to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS item in the MAIN MENU and press ENTER 2 Move the cursor to the VIEW RECEIVED DATA item Press ENTER 3 View the live presentation of the data 4 Choose PAUSE F3 to trap the current data on the E1 line 5 Choose PAGE UP F1 or PAGE DN F2 to view more data e Note the PAGE number in the upper left hand portion of the screen e 64 pages of data are available Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 49 6 When you have finished press the ESCAPE key twice to return to the MAIN M
129. K F1 NX56 F2 NX64 F3 300 more F1 600 more F2 1200 more F3 2400 more F1 4800 more F2 9600 more F3 14 4K more F1 9 2K more F2 38 4K more F3 9 8 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Note For RS232 SYN substitute 56K for F2 and 64K for F3 For RS232 Asynchronous the following rates are available 14 4k F1 19 2k F2 38 4k F3 50 more F1 150 more F2 300 more F1 600 more F2 1200 more F3 2400 more F1 4800 more F2 9600 more F3 For G 703 the test rate is automatically configured for 64K e Choose the desired rate for the circuit being tested by pressing the corresponding F key for Modes V 35 RS449 X 21 and RS232 a For G 703 Mode you are given only the Nx64K option where N 1 8 b Press the Nx64 F1 key to change the N value 4 TxDATACLK Options INTERN F1 RECEIVE F2 Determines the transmit signal clock source Note Clocking applies only to synchronous transmission Thus for RS232 asynchronous signals this item will not appear in the menu Additionally X 21 DCE is forced to INTERNAL timing and DTE is forced to RECEIVED timing e Press INTERN F1 to select the test set s internal clock The set is the master timing source on the circuit e Press RECEIVE F2 to use the signal received at the multiport as the transmit signal clock source The test set is slave to the device to which it is sending signals The following three items apply only to asynchronous datac
130. LOOP F1 DATACOM TYPE F2 is the type selected above X 21 RS449 etc PATRN F3 e lf DATACOM TxSRC is set to PATRN E1INS will automatically be configured for the specific DATACOM TYPE E1 Insertcontrols which signal will be inserted into the 2 048 Mbps line It may be changed only if TxSRC is set to E1DRP Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 15 LOOP F1 meansall 30 or 31 channels willbe looped through from 2 048 Mbps receive to 2 048 Mbps transmit Nothing will be inserted e X 21 V 35 etc means the low speed NX64 Kbps signal will be inserted on the 2 048 Mbps transmit e PATRN F3 means that the TEST PATTERN will be inserted on the 2 048 Mbps transmit signal 3 E1T S Options Nx64K Select which NX64 Kbps channels to insert or drop the signal on e Press Nx64K F1 to enter the Select Time Slot screen Refer to E1 T S in Section 2 1 for further details on selecting time slots However the AUTO F key is available only when E1DRP is selected in BERT 2 3 MUXTEST MODE MUXTEST provides testing through a multiplex from either the low speed datacom side to the high speed 2 048 Mbps side or from the high speed 2 048 Mbps side to the low speed datacom side Figure 3 9 shows the MUXTEST menu E1 SIDE Refer to Section 2 1 for a detailed description of each E1 configuration selection The Transmit Clock is the only variable 1 XMT CLOCK Options L1 Rx F1 INTERN F2 L2 Rx F3 The XMT CLOCK is used to time the Tx INSERT
131. LOSS AISS LINE 2 LOFS FALM MFAL LINE 1 or BIT CODE CRC FE LOSS AISS LINE 2 LOFS FALM MFAL DATACOM BIT BIT CODE CRC FE LOSS AISS LOFS FALM MFAL DATACOM BIT Figure 3 42 Measurement Types LINE 1 2 F2 Selects the parameters of either E1 Line 1 E1 Line 2 or Datacom e When the set is configured to the DATACOM MUXTEST or E1MUX test mode the datacom s parameters will auto matically be selected and you will not be given the LINE 1 2 option ZOOM F3 Use this key to zoom into the next lower time period at the display cursor location e Select a minute hour or day interval as your time period JUMP more F2 Moves the display cursor by 10 steps in the display period e Use the left or right arrow keys on the keypad to move the cursor one period at a time PRINT more F3 Print the current histogram display page e The print result is in the graphic format shown on the LCD screen e A current PRINT session can be aborted by pressing the Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 63 ESCAPE key Note the following important points e The HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS will display either the current or saved results e Each time MEASUREMENTS RESULTS is entered the SunSet will replace the file in the CURRENT HISTOGRAM data For each file the HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS feature will store the most recent 60 hours of data with a display resolution PE RIOD of 1 minute e For each file the HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS feature w
132. M Line 2 Rx S C Figure 7 9 16 kbps Config a Selectthe receive Subchannels from 1 4 F1 F4 for each line 5 SAPI amp TEI Options HEX F1 DECIMAL F2 Select the formatting of the SAPI and TEI 7 10 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 2 1 2 A bis Monitor The A bis MONITOR menu contains three items SETUP FILTER START TRACER VIEW PRINT TRACER 2 1 2 A Setup Filter The Setup Filter screen appears in Figure 7 10 SETUP FILTER L2MON SAPI TEI MSG DISC MSG TYPE CHNL NUM TM SLOT IMSI NO Figure 7 10 A bis Setup Filter Screen The following filtering items should be configured 1 L2MON Options YES F1 NO F2 This item refers to the L2 monitor flag It allows you to display not display layer 2 information fields in the captured message e Press YES F1 to display these fields or NO F2 to not display them 2 SAPI Options NONE F1 INC x F2 DEC x F3 1 10 50 F4 e Use the F keys to enter a hex code from 00 to 3F e SAPI Service Access Point Identifier identifies the layer 3 signalling protocol e This filter allows you to zoom in on GSM messages only Ch 7 GSM 7 11 e Use the F keys to enter the desired value in hexadecimal code e Pressing 1 10 50 F4 sets the increment decrement value used in options F2 and F3 Thus far five SAPI values have been defined 00 identifies radio signalling 01 reserved for packet mode Q 931 1F reserved for packet mode X 25 3E
133. Mbps circuit to pass through the test set Be sure to plug in the cords in the order shown in the two diagrams First plug in cords one through six a Verify that the test Line 1 and Line 2 LEDs show proper framing coding and no errors Verify that the Graphic shows the test set is in THRU mode b Then plug in cords seven and eight Warning You might want to practice on an out of service circuit first to make sure you can perform this procedure correctly EQUIPMENT 2 Figure 4 19 Dual Drop and Insert THRU Mode Test BNC BNC Note The circuit will be disrupted for two or more seconds while the cords are moved 4 42 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 LINE 4 2 048 Mbps EQUIPMENT 1 EQUIPMENT 2 Figure 4 20 In Service Dual Drop and Insert THRU BNC to Bantam 4 Depending on the test application you may wish to do the following For talk and listen you should a Press ESCAPE to get to the MAIN MENU b Move your cursor to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu item and press the ENTER key c Press the ENTER key on the VF MEASUREMENTS menu item d Select the receive listen and transmit talk channels they are usually the same channel number e Choose TALK for the INSERT TYPE and L2 Rx for the LISTEN SIDE f You can nowtalk and listen on the channel you have selected Adjust the volume to the desired level by using the vo
134. N A LINE 1 G 826 BBE SES SSES SUAS 001 SAS 4 0 0 1 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP Figure 3 29 Line 1 G 826 Screen E1 Mode Note You must turn on G 826 measurements in OTHER FEA TURES MEAS CONFIGURATION 2 This ITU standard a replace ment of the earlier G 821 specifies required performance charac teristics of 2 048 Mbps lines The parameter definitions given in G 826 are block based This makes in service measurement con venient The following definitions are specific to this screen AS This is the count of bit Available Seconds since the beginning of the test G 826 Available Seconds equals the length of the total test time minus any UAS AS This is the percentage of bit Available Seconds since the beginning of the test BBE A Background Block Error is an errored block not occurring as part of a SES Severely Errored Second BBE The percentage of errored blocks since the beginning of the test excluding all blocks during SES and unavailable time 3 46 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 EB An Errored Block is a block containing one or more bit errors RDI A Remote Defect Indication is used by the near end to estimate far end errors particularly SES s SES A Severely Errored Second is a one second period which contains greater or equal to 30 errored blocks SES This is the percentage of Severely Errored Seconds since the beginning of the test Note The test set looks for E bits when CRC 4 has b
135. NG EMULATOR EDIT EMULATOR START EMULATION Figure 3 70 Signalling Emulator Menu 6 8 1 Edit Emulator e Create save and edit your signalling sequences e The Edit Emulator as shown in Figure 3 71 contains the list of your ten emulator files EDIT EMULATOR DTMF1 DTMF2 DPOOOO 1 2 Big 4 Bus 6 Ts Bis Ir 0 H DELETE Figure 3 71 Edit Emulator Screen To create a new file Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 97 1 Place the cursor on an empty line and press EDIT F1 Anew screen will appear with the cursor at the LABEL entry 2 To create a LABEL press the EDIT F1 key You will enter the Signalling Emulator Label screen shown in Figure 3 72 Follow these steps to create a label 1 Press TOGGLE F3 to enter the alphabet grid 2 Use the arrow keys to move the flashing cursor to the desired letter 3 Press SELECT F4 4 Continue steps 2 and 3 until you have completed your label When you have finished press TOGGLE F3 to escape the alphabet grid 17 03 38 SIGNALLING EMULATOR LABEL Mi INSERT DELETE TOGGLE SELECT Figure 3 72 Signalling Emulator Label Screen 5 If you make a mistake while entering the letters press DELETE F2 e You may also use the SHIFT key and the alphanumeric digits available on the keypad for entering the label 6 When your label is complete press the ENTER key to return to 3 98 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 the Signalling Edit Emulator screen R
136. NONE F3 F keys to make the selection This code specifies which network facilities are invoked Gen erally For the TE mode NSF is set to NONE F3 For the NT mode NSF is set to 2 6 DIAL METHOD DASS2 DPNSS Options EN BLOC F1 OVERLAP F2 A calling PBX may send at ET either an ISRM C or an ISRM I followed by further information ISRM C Initial Service Request Message Complete contains all the called digits to initial the message flow between two PBX ora PBX and ET Ifthe originating PBX knows the whole selection block is available and is nottoo long for the ISRM Selection Field then the ISRM C is sent EN BLOC F1 corresponds to the transmission of the complete selection block However if the PBX does not know if the whole selection block is available or if the block cannot fir into the Selection Field of an ISRM then an incomplete ISRM message will be sent If neces sary the following parts of the selection block will be transmitted one at a time in sequence When the PBX sends an incomplete ISRM followed by SSRMs Subsequent Service Request Mes sages this is referred to as Overlap Sending Thus press OVERLAP F2 to send sections on e ata time or press EN BLOC F1 to send all of the digits at once 7 Press the CALL F4 key to begin establishing your connection to the switch after you see the reverse video READY at the top of the screen The screen will display the SEND and RECEIVED messages o
137. Note The SunSet will transmit IDLE pattern upon entering the C bit Analysis screen The following programmable fields are available in this screen 1 L1 Tx T S Options 1 15 17 31 Select the desired transmit timeslot on which to send C bits e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as necessary e To send C bits on Line 2 and thus this item changes to L2 Tx Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 57 T S set TX INSERT to L2 Tx in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen e As PCM 30 framing is required for this C bit analysis you may not select timeslot 16 2 TRANSMIT Options USER F1 IDLE F2 This setting determines bit 2 e IDLE F2 sends logic 1 as bit 2 When 1 is placed in this spot C bit framing will be ignored e USER F1 activates the C bit framing and sets the user programmable bits a Cursor down to the SEND bits b At each bit press the SHIFT key and enter either 0 or 1 The cursor automatically moves one spot to the right once a bit is entered When the cursor highlights a specific bit information about this C bit will be displayed at the bottom of the screen Definitions of C bits 2 15 are shown below 3 58 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Bit Assignment bit 2 ESCAPE 0 C Frame active 1 C Frame ignored bit 3 2Mb loops 0 Subscriber 1 Network bit 4 Loop 2 or Loop 3 0 Subscriber 1 Network bit 5 Loop 2 instruction 0 Active 1 Non active bit 6 Loop 3 instruction 0 Active 1 Non active bi
138. O EVENT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OR LICENSE FEE FOR THAT PRODUCT NOR SHALL COMPANY IN ANY EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDEN TAL CONSEQUENTIAL INDIRECT OR SPECIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WHATSOEVER ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THE SALE OF THE MERCHANDISE HERE UNDER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES ARIS ING FROM OR RELATED TO LOSS OF BUSINESS LOSS OF PROFIT LOSS OF GOODWILL INJURY TO REPUTATION OVERHEAD DOWNTIME REPAIROR REPLACEMENT OR CHARGE BACKS OR OTHER DEBITS FROM CUSTOMER OR ANY CUSTOMER OF CUSTOMER F No Guaranty Nonapplication of Warranty COMPANY does not guaranty or warrant that the operation of hardware soft ware or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Further the warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from 1 Improper or inadequate maintenance by CUSTOMER 2 CUSTOMER supplied software or interfacing 3 Unauthorized modification or misuse 4 Operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product 5 Improper site preparation or maintenance or 6 Improper installation by CUSTOMER w ii SunSet E10 Version 2 37 SUNRISE TELECOM Certificate of Origin To Whom It May Concern We Sunrise Telecom with principle location of business at 22 Great Oaks Blvd San Jos CA 95119 do hereby certify that the following product is manufactured in the United States of America Model Name SSE10 SunSet 10 All versions of software Warranty SET S
139. On the other hand analog logic has a range of possible states When graphed analog signals are sine waves while digital signals are square Sound since itis always changing is analog Therefore phone lines carry analog signals In order for a computer to send its digital data over the phone line this data must be converted into an analog signal A modem reads the computer s digital signals and converts them into tones that can be sent over the phone line The modem on the other end picks up these tones and turns them back into digital signals that are sent to the receiving computer Modulation is the process of converting the digital waveform into ananalog signal suitable for phone line transmission demodulation is the inverse analog to digital A Modem as in Modulation Demodulation carries out these processes The three major components of data communication are the terminal the modem and the host computer At the terminal analog information meaning information from the outside world is translated into digital format This digital data is then transmitted to a host computer A host computer is a large computer system which is able to run programs from several different users at the same time The terminal equipment is referred to as DTE Data Terminal Equipment The Modem is called DCE Data Communication Equipment and sometimes Data Set Figure 9 1 depicts the Ch 9 Datacom 9 1 relationship between these data communicatio
140. RATION MODE DATACOM EZA DCE SYN E 48k TXDATA C INTERN Figure 9 4 DATACOM Mode The following items should be configured for the DATACOM Mode Ch 9 Datacom 9 7 1 TYPE Options V 35 F1 RS449 F2 X 21 F3 G 703 more F1 RS232 more F2 Type determines the electrical interface at the multiport Press the F key corresponding to the desired interface type RS449 F2 is analogous to V 36 X 21 F3 to V 11 G 703 more F1 to V 24 2 MODE Options The MODE options depend upon the specific TYPE chosen in the slot above For V 35 RS449 X 21 DTE F1 DCE F2 For G 703 None Mode is forced to CO DIR For RS232 DTE SYN F1 DCE SYN F2 DTE ASY F3 DCE ASY F4 For V 35 RS449 and X 21 Choose DTE F1 to emulate Data Terminal Equipment choose DTE to plug the test set into DCE equipment e Select DCE F2 to emulate Data Circuit Equipment and be plugged into DTE equipment The same rules for selecting DTE DCE apply to RS232 s options For RS232 additionally e Choose between a synchronous SYN or asynchronous ASY data signal with either DTE or DCE configuration Forexample DTE SYN F1 configures the set to emulate Data Terminal Equipment with synchronous transmission 3 TEST RATE Options The TEST RATE options available to you depend upon the MODE selected above For V 35 RS449 X 21 and RS232 Synchronous the following rates are available 48
141. RC DET OALARM SunSet 10 01 30 09 VIEW RECEIVED DATA PAGE 00 T S BINARY HEX ASCII 00 00011011 1B 01 10001110 8E q 02 01000100 44 a 03 11011010 DA I 04 01100101 65 e 05 00100010 22 D 06 10100001 A1 07 00110000 30 PAGE UP PAGE DN RESUME lt gt N SUNRISE TELECOM JJ A B c D RESYNC LIGHT GRAPHIC ERRINJ E 1 2 3 AUTO VOL UP VOL DN HISTORY F 4 5 6 lt A gt SHIFT 7 8 9 escape V ENTER POWER PRN SCRN 0 WS 9 Y Figure 2 1 SunSet E10 Front View SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 2 2 White Labels F keys F1 F2 F3 F4 These keys are used to select choices F1 through F4 at the bottom of the LCD display When you configure a setup screen a number of options are typically available for each setup item The available choices appear on the bottom of the screen The desired option may be invoked by pressing the corresponding F key directly below Refer to Figure 2 2 2 30 02 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE El Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING ESSN CRC 4 YES TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK INTERN PCM 30 PCM 31 UNFRAME Nga un int I m Press the Desired F Key Figure 2 2 F Keys
142. ROP L1 RX FRAMING as required by circuit CRC 4 as required by circuit TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 MONITOR RxLVL 2 MONITOR XMTCLOCK INTERN a When your settings are correct press ENTER 3 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as shown in Figure 5 25 5 30 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 ANAWdINOA TWNIWHYAL ASS ANAWdINOA WNIWHAL 4FSS Figure 5 25 Monitoring In service SS 7 Links Monitor Mode 5 31 Ch 5 SS 7 4 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off 5 Escape to the Main Menu a Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS SS7 ANALYSIS CONFIGU RATION b Select the receive timeslots for lines 1 amp 2 e Use the NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 keys to select a timeslot for each line between 1 and 31 on which you will receive the SS 7 signal c Cursor to SS7 VERSION d Press F1 to use the ITU CCITT standard You may also choose either CHINA 24 F2 or CHINA14 F3 ITALY F4 e The last configuration item PC DISP FORMAT determines the display format for the OPC and DPC codes e Press HEX F1 to view enter these codes in hexadecimal format or press DECIMAL F2 for decimal format f When you have finished press ENTER to return to the SS7 Analysis menu 6 Scroll down to SU MONITOR and press ENTER a Select SETUP FILTER 7 Refer to Figure 5 26 for a sample SETUP FILTER screen
143. Register VLR contains information about all Mobile Stations within the area served by the MSC Information such as the Mobile Station s identity the area in which it was last registered additional information pertaining to the subscriber and any supplementary services available are found in the VLR A MSC refers to the VLR each time a Mobile Station receives ormakes acall Asecurity register called the Authentication Centre AUC validates a SIM and performs complex mathematical calcu lation on the same secret information stored in SIM Another security register is the Equipment Identity Register EIR Usinga list of three categories the EIR ensures that all ME s being used are valid and authorized to function on the Public Land Mobile Network PLMN Together the MSC HLR VLR AUC and EIR make up the Network Subsystem that connects the GSM network to a fixed network 1 2 GSM Radio Transmission At the physical layer Mobile Stations and Base Station Subsytems use a combination of Frequency Division Multiple Access FDMA and Time Division Multiple Access to send infor mation The 890 915 Mhz range is used for uplink transmission from MS to BSS and the 935 960 Mhz range for downlink from BSS to MS transmission Each 25 Mhz bandwidth is divided into 124 carrier frequencies 7 2 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 spaced 200 Khz with one or more carrier frequency allocated to each base station A GSM Traffic Channel TCH multiframe compr
144. SE SHAPE ANALYSIS LINE 1 START NEW ANALYSIS VIEW LAST PULSE SHAPE Figure 3 36 Pulse Shape Analysis Menu 3 54 SunSet 2109 Version 2 37 15346395 Pattern LIVE G 703 Width Rise 27 ns Fall 22 ns Over S 5 73 100nS G 703 NO MASK PRINT RESTART Figure 3 37 Pulse Shape Analysis 5 4 1 Start New Analysis Follow this procedure to start a new pulse shape analysis 1 Select the correct line interface in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu 2 In the Main Menu move the cursor to OTHER MEASURE MENTS press ENTER 3 Cursor to PULSE MASK ANALYSIS and press ENTER 4 Cursor to START NEW ANALYSIS press ENTER In three to five seconds the captured pulse shape will be displayed on the screen In this screen there are four F key choices G 703 F1 Displays the ITU G 703 mask with the captured signal NO MASK F2 Removes the G 703 mask PRINT F3 Print the pulse shape screen on the Sunrise Thermal Printer Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 55 RESTART F4 Starts a new pulse shape capture and analysis Definitions for this screen are Width Pulse Width in ns Rise Rise Time in ns Fall Fall Time in ns Over Over Shoot percentage Undr Undershoot percentage Level Signal level in dB 5 4 2 View The Last Pulse Shape e View the last pulse shape captured by the SunSet E10 e You may view this pulse shape at any time even after the SunSet has been turned off for an
145. SETUP FILTER LAYER 3 LINE 1 DPC XX XX XxX LINE 1 OPC XX XX XX SI FIELD TUP LAYER 2 BSN BIB XX X FSN FIB XX X FISU LSSU ON OFF Figure 5 26 Setup Filter Screen 5 32 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 8 The SunSet E10 uses the Originating Point Code OPC and the Destination Point Code DPC to filter SS 7 messages a Tocapture all messages regardless of these point codes press NONE F1 for each as was done in Figure 5 26 e Depending on your PC DISP selection in the Configuration screen you can enter specific codes in either decimal or hexadecimal format b Specify a particular Service Indicator Field to filter c Upon selecting a SI Field more filtering choices will be provided below e For TUP in Figure 5 26 CIC CODE HEAD CODE ADDR SGNL and ADDR NUMB are provided below e You may enter specific values in each by first pressing the F4 key as needed to set the desired increment decrement values at 1 10 or 50 Then use the F2 and F3 keys The specific filtering options appearing below SI FIELD depend upon the SI Field chosen e For ISUP messages there will be a MESG TYPE instead of a HEAD CODE e For SCCP messages there are only SLS CODE and MESG TYPE fields e For SNM and SNT messages there are only SLS CODE and HEAD CODE fields Refer to Section 2 2 of this chapter for a more detailed description of each of these filtering fields 9 When your settings are complete press EN
146. SETUP FILTER START TRACER VIEW PRINT TRACER Figure 5 10 SU Monitor Screen SETUP FILTER LAYER 3 LINE 1 DPC XX XX XX LINE 1 OPC XX XX XX SI FIELD TUP LAYER 2 BSN BIB XX X FSN FIB XX X FISU LSSU ON OFF Figure 5 11 Setup Filter To enter a number in the following items use the 1 10 50 F4 key to set the scale of the numeric change correspondingly the F2 key will read INC 1 10 or 50 and F3 will display 1 10 or 50 As an example when starting from 00 to enter a value of 55 press the more F4 key until F2 reads 50 then press F2 next press more again until F3 reads 1 then press F3 five times until the digits read 55 The following filter items are available 5 12 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Layer 3 Signalling Network 1 LINE 1 DPC Options NONE F1 0 to 16383 in Decimal NONE F1 00 00 00 to 07 FF 07 in Hexadecimal The Destination Point Code DPC indicates the signalling point for which the message is intended e The Line 2 OPC defaults to the same number set as the Line 1 DPC Thus the filtering applies to all SS 7 messages being received Line 1 DPC and sent Line 2 OPC from the selected signalling point 2 LINE 1 OPC Options NONE F1 0 to 16383 in Decimal NONE F1 00 00 00 to 07 FF 07 in Hexadecimal The Originating Point Code OPC indicates the signalling point that is the source of the message e The Line 2 DPC defaults to the same numbe
147. Subscriber line busy 4 B 4 Congestion encountered after changeover from Group A signals to Group B signals 5 B 5 Unallocated number 6 B 6 Subscriber s line free charge 7 B 7 Subscriber s line free no charge 8 B 8 Subscriber s line out of order 9 B 9 10 B 10 B 11 2 B 12 Spare for 13 B 13 National Use 14 B 14 15 B 15 Figure 3 51 Group B Backward Signals Combi Destination Meaning of the Signal nation of the Signal 1 A 1 Send next digit n 1 2 A 2 Send last but one digit n 1 3 A 3 Address complete changeover to reception of Group B signals 4 A 4 Congestion in national network 3 A 5 Send calling party s category 6 A 6 Address complete charge set up speech conditions 7 A 7 Send last but two digits n 2 8 A 8 Send last but three digits n 3 ai Eh Spare for National Use 11 A 11 Send country code indicator 12 A 12 Send language or discriminating digit 13 A 13 Send nature of circuit 14 A 14 Request for information on use of an echo suppres sor Is an incoming echo suppressor required 15 A 15 Congestion in an international exchange or at its output Figure 3 52 Group A Backward Signals Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 79 Frequencies Hz 1380 1500 1620 1740 1860 1980 B k TE ti ae agm iso pozo poo 780 coo 0 me Te fe ee e F FEF F an Girecnon Figure 3 53 MF Combinations 6 5 DTMF MF DP CAS Analysis Enter the DTMF MF DP CAS Analysis via the VF CH
148. SunSet E10 Version 2 37 numbers e Press CALLED F2 to look for a specific called number the destination of the call After pressing the F2 key a new line ADDR NUMB will appear below a enter the specific number by pressing releasing the SHIFT key and pressing the desired keypad number keys e Press CALLER F3 to look for a specific caller number the origin of the call After pressing the F3 key a new line ADDR NUMB will appear below a Enter the specific number by pressing releasing the SHIFT key and pressing the desired keypad number keys The filtering options for SCCP are as follows 1 SLS CODE Options NONE F1 0 to F e The Signalling Link Selection Code is a 4 bit long code Itis used where appropriate in load sharing e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number 2 MESG TYPE Options 00 to FF e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number e The message types for SCCP are given in table 5 15 Ch 5 SS 7 5 19 SCCP Messages Code hex AK Data Acknowledgment 08 CC _ Connection Confirm 02 CR Connection Request 01 CREF Connection Refused 03 DT1 Data Form 1 06 DT2 Data Form 2 07 EA Expedited Data Acknowledgment OE ED Expedited Data 0B ERR Error OF IT Inactivity Test 10 RLC Release Complete 05 RLSD Released 04
149. T S Nx64K RXLVL 2 TERM Rx El XMTCLK Tx RS232 L1 Rx INTERN L2 Tx Figure 3 15 MUXTEST BERT TX RS232 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 21 Section 3 Send Test Pattern From the Main Menu enter Test Pattern The screen displays alist of the patterns available for transmitting receiving Figure 3 16 shows the Test Pattern screen 15 03 27 H3 EST PATTERN 2823 2e20 2el5 20ITU 2047 511 127 63 1111 1010 0000 FOX 1 3 1 4 1 8 3 24 PATTERN 2e23 USER Figure 3 16 Test Pattern Screen Note When X 50 Analysis is enabled OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS X 50 SETUP the test patterns available are limited and the screen appears quite differently Section 3 3 discusses the X 50 patterns 3 1 Standard Patterns Tosend one of the standard patterns shown above in Figure 3 16 1 Use the arrow keys to highlight the desired pattern e As each pattern is highlighted the SunSet begins transmitting that pattern This section defines the various patterns transmitted and recognized by the SunSet E10 Here are the test patterns 3 22 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 2 1 where m 15 20 23 are pseudo random bit sequences The signal is formed from a 15 20 or 23 stage shift register and is not zero constrained The patterns conform to the ITU 0 151 technical standard 20ITU 2e20 is the 2e20 1 pseudo random bit sequence This signal is formed from a 20 stage shift register and is not z
150. TE Configure the other five settings as desired e Refer to section 2 1 of this chapter for details on each item Once your settings are correct press ENTER to return to the ISDN menu 8 Cursor down to START LINK CALL SETUP and press ENTER a Checkto see if a UA message has either been sent or received 9 a e UAconfirms that the Data Link Connection has been reset and that the set is ready to transmit receive Information I frames e AREADY indicator at the of the screen indicates the link is up Set up the call by pressing CALL F2 In the following screen you may enter four other call parameters Enter the desired information e Referto section 2 2 of this chapter for further details on each item When your parameters are correct press CALL F4 to begin establishing your connection with the switch 10 When you are finished press DISC 1 F3 to disconnect 6 34 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 4 2 ISDN Call Setup DASS2 DPNSS This procedure outlines an ISDN call for DASS2 and DPNSS standards 1 Verify the span is not in service this ISDN call will disrupt service 2 lt From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION a Configure the settings as follows TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 TX RX DROP L1 RX TXSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING PCM 31 CRC 4 as needed TEST RATE 2 048M TXLVL 1 TERM RXLVL 2 TERM XMTCLOCK INTERN Note You must select PCM 31 framing for any ISDN appli
151. TER to return to the SU MONITOR Menu a Select START TRACER e The SunSet now begins the tracing process using the filter selections from SETUP FILTER e You may pause the screen to look at the message closely by pressing the PAUSE F2 key e Use DECODE F3 to decode the message e Use the F1 key to restart the filtering process b When you are finished press ESCAPE Ch 5 SS 7 5 33 10 From the SU MONITOR Menu enter VIEW PRINT TRACER This screen allows you to view and print specific data captured by the SunSet E10 a Use the PAGE UP and PAGE DN keys to view all the captured messages Refer to section 2 2 3 of this chapter for more details and sample screens 11 Press the ESCAPE key twice to return to the SS 7 ANALYSIS Menu a Select SU ANALYSIS e Both Line 1 and Line 2 message counters are displayed in this screen As the various types of messages are coming across Lines 1 and 2 the counter will increment the counts appropri ately See Figure 5 27 e Press the F1 key to PAUSE the measurements and F2 to RESTART them e Press F4 for a STATIStical display See Figure 5 28 02523507 SU ANALYSIS LINE 2 FISU 0 LSSU LSSU 0 MSU MSU 1 TOTAL 7358 TOTAL 1 MSU MESSAGES SNM 66 SNM SNT 972 SNM TUP 63 TUP ISUP 2516 ISUP SCCP 71 SCCP 101 RESUME RESTART STATIST Figure 5 27 SU Analysis 5 34 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 02 23 07 SU ANALYSIS LINE 1 LINE 2 FISU S 00 0 FISU S
152. TEST MODE DATACOM TYPE V 35 MODE DTE TEST RATE as specified by the span design TXDATA CLK RECEIVE Note If the test set must supply the clock then select INTERN for TxDATA CLK If the test set should follow timing from the network select RECEIVE 4 Connect the SunSet E10s to the circuit as shown in Figure 9 17 5 Press ENTER to return to the MAIN MENU a Select DATACOM INTERFACE and press ENTER The DATACOM INTERFACE menu is displayed 9 24 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 ERSNEITIT vep yu ey u 31d SEN JIA GEA 4300 SEN LA SEA Gen wonan UOINDDSUUOI UONDSUUOD GH IAH uid og uld 0g Bee SOS ile potoroto OL SUNS OLI I SUNS 17 V 35 Datacom Test Figure 9 9 25 Ch 9 Datacom 6 Examine the receive information The terms are defined as follows CTS Clear to Send DSR Data Set Ready DCD Data Carrier Detect 7 On the transmit side turn the following signals ON or OFF to test whether the other data communication equipment is receiving the SunSet s signal The moving arrow will go up to indicate a lead is active or down to indicate it is inactive RTS Ready to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready RL Remote Loopback LL Local Loopback 8 Escape to MAIN MENU cursor down to MEASUREMENT RESULTS press ENTER One can extract all the measurement information 4 2 Testing the Datacom Port of a 2M Multiplex e Test
153. TION PIN 2TxD m 2 ABS __ TS 4 6DTR DM STK _ TCLK 24 14RD __ xD 3 CONNECTOR DB 37 CONNECTOR DB 25 yos _ ms 16DSR _ sR 6 20 DCD DCD 8 22 TxCLK TXCLK 15 24 RXCLK RxCLK 17 25 RL RL 21 26 LL L 18 29 GND GND 7 Figure 9 12 RS 232 Pin outs RS232 is an EIA recommended standard which is functionally identical to ITU s V 24 It specifies a 25 pin connector where 20 pins are used for routine operation Three pins 11 18 amp 25 are unassigned and two pins 9 amp 10 are used for modem testing Ch 9 Datacom 9 19 q CONNECTOR DB 37 CONNECTOR DB 15 Connections Between Pins X 21 DCE Connections Between Pins X 21 DTE DB 37 Pin X 21 DB 15 Pin DB 37 Pin X 21 DB 15 Pin 14 2 2 a 13 9 30 9 2 4 14 4 30 11 13 11 18 3 4 3 17 10 3 20 4 5 18 5 3 12 17 12 6 6 16 6 5 13 15 13 29 8 29 8 Figure 9 13 X 21 Pin outs X 21 is ageneral recommendation by ITU for synchronous opera tion on public data networks Ithas a 15 pin connector The signals may be used as either balanced or unbalanced circuits 9 20 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 DATACOM Cable Provides HDI 30 to DB 37r interface direct one to one connection CONECTOR DB 37 G 703 Pin Assignments HDI 30 Dual DB 3 PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION PIN 25
154. TIP TnTIP_ 1 Plug 26 TxRIN TXRIN 2 Plug 1 27 RXTIP RxTIP 1 Plug2 28 RxRIN RxRIN 2 Plug 2 G 703 Pin outs 1 N 3 CONECTOR DB 3 G 703 is the co directional interface Itusesadifferentcodingthan the other standards allowing for the use of less bandwidth Ch 9 Datacom 9 21 q CONNECTOR DB 37 2 CONNECTOR DB 37 CONNECTION BETWEEN PINS RS 449 DCE CONNECTION BETWEEN PINS RS 449 DTE PIN 2 30 HDI 30 FUNCTION RxD CTS DSR DCD RxCLK TxCLK TxD RTS DTR TCLK L LL GND RS 449 DB 37 FUNCTION RxD CTS DSR DCD RXCLK TXCLK TxD RTS DTR TCLK RI m GND PINE 24 6 27 9 29 11 31 13 26 8 23 5 22 4 25 7 30 12 35 17 L 14 10 19 HDI 30 PIN 2 30 FUNCTION RS 449 DB 37 FUNCTION Figure 9 15 RS 449 Pin outs RS449 is an EIA specification describing the signals that make up the DTE DCE connection It has a 9 pin connector used for the secondary channel and a37 pin connector used for everything else If a modem does not have a secondary channel this 9 pin connector is not present 9 22 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 RS530 EIA53 Orevices LZ 5 os q CONNECTOR DB 37 CONNECTOR DB 25 CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PINSRS 530DCE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN PINSRS 530DTE HDI 30 RS 530 DB 25 HDI 30 RS 530 DB 25 PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION PIN PIN FUNCTION FUNCTION PIN
155. TOP BIT setting Two options are available 1 BIT F1 and 2 BIT F2 This setting must match with the configu ration of your remote control Normally this is configured as 1 BIT f Access the BITS CHAR setting Two options are available 7 BIT F1 and 8 BIT F2 This setting must match with the configu ration of your remote control Normally this is configured as 8 BIT 6 Set up a terminal to dial up the far modem and commence communications Any terminal or personal computer with VT 100 terminal emulation software should work 7 Call up the far modem with your terminal 8 Once communication has been established with the far modem log on to the SunSet E10 by typing in logon e You donotneed to press the return key after typing the letters The test set will automatically repaint the screen If you make a mistake while typing logon just type it again Note If you log into the set while it is in graphic mode the graphic may be distorted Simply press the return key on your terminal and then P for graphic to see the graphic in its proper form Ch 4 Applications 4 37 Remote Site serial ort p Modem telephone line Host Location e logon ng Modem on Figure 4 18 Typical Setup 9 Use the SunSet E10 just like you would use it locally The same menus will be presented to you e The key opti
156. TTERN MOLE USER PATTERN FO00000S LIIL 1010 Figure 3 19 X 50 Test Pattern Screen This screen contains the following items 1 BERT PATTERN Options 0000 F1 1111 F2 1010 F3 511 more F1 2047 more F2 2e15 1 more F3 USER more F1 Select a standard pattern to use for your bit error rate testing here e Refer to Section 3 1 for definitions of each of these patterns 2 USER PATTERN e Enter six digits in binary code 0 or 1 The first bit is reserved as the framing bit F and the last as the status bit S e To enter your code press the SHIFT key then enter 0 and 1 as desired Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 29 Section 4 Measurement Results To observe MEASUREMENT RESULTS 1 Select MEASUREMENT RESULTS from the MAIN MENU 2 Press START to begin taking results 3 Press the ESCAPE key when you are finished The SunSet E10 continuously performs measurements on its received signal s when the START F key has been pressed While ameasurementis being made the MEAS status indicator appears in reverse video at the top of the screen When the measurement is stopped the indicator will disappear The user need not access the Measurement Results menu in order for results to be compiled once the START key has been pressed Measurements are automatically restarted every time the configuration is significantly changed The Measurement Results screens allow you to view the accumulated measurements and restart the
157. This means that the LEDs will show information about the signal received on the E1 L1 Rx port Upon injecting the error a red error LED should light up on the test set If it does you have just verified the proper multiplexing ability of the SunSet E10 You may also want to check the de multiplexing ability of the E10 1 To do so keep the same setup as shown in Figure 4 23 2 Change the BER setting in TEST CONFIGURATION to the datacom type selected above 4 48 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 3 4 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplexer The SunSet E10 has the capability to emulate an Add Drop Multiplex Use the following procedure to drop and insert 64Kbps timeslots between a datacom device and E1 lines 1 From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION Select E1 Mode and configure the other settings as follows TX INST L1 TX RX DROP L2 RX TxSOURCE THRU FRAMING As provisioned CRC 4 As provisioned RXLVL 1 TERM RXLVL 2 TERM XMTCLK L1 RX 2 Connect the test set to two terminal equipments in the order shown in Figure 4 24 a Plug into the OUT jack of Equipment 1 connect the same cord to Line 1 Rx on the test set b Next plug a second BNC cord to The OUT jack on Equipment 2 connect this cord to Line 2 Rx on the test set c Next plug your third BNC cord to Line 1 Tx of the test set and then plug a fourth cord into Line 2 Tx Do not connect either of these cords to the Terminal equipment yet d Verify that the E10
158. View MFAS Words Pulse Mask Analysis Start New Analysis View the Last Pulse Shape C bit Analysis Histogram Analysis Current Histogram Propagation Delay VF Channel Access VF Measurements View Line 1 amp 2 CAS SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 30 33 48 48 65 65 69 Section 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 Section 9 Dial Parameters DTMF MFR2 DP Dialing DTMF MF DP CAS Analysis Noise Analysis MFC SS 5 Dial Analysis MFC Dialing MFC Tracer MFCAS View Print Tracer SS 5 Dialing SS 5 Tracer SS 5 View Print Tracer View MFC SS 5 Example Signalling Emulator Edit Emulator Start Emulation Other Features Meas Configuration 1 Meas Configuration 2 Error Injection Other Parameters Alarm Generation View Test Record Send Frame Words Load Samples Memory Allocation System Parameters General Configuration Erase NV RAM Full Self Test Clear Print Buffer Version Option Factory Defaults Language Selection SunSet EnD Version 2 37 102 103 106 108 111 112 114 115 119 119 121 122 125 126 126 127 127 128 Section 1 Introduction The SunSet E10 operates by a menu driven format Before you can select a menu item you must first highlight the desired line using the arrow keys You can easily recognize a highlighted item because the surrounding area is darkened while the writing is light colored This appearance will be referred to as reverse video in this manual After highlighting the item you
159. WORDS 3 118 Noise Analysis 3 84 NSF Code 6 17 Null Modem Adapter 4 36 Nyquist Theorem 10 2 O Off hook signalling 10 14 On hook signalling 10 14 OPC 5 11 5 13 5 32 7 23 Open System Interconnect 5 2 Option 3 127 Orange Labels 2 7 Originating Point Code 5 13 7 23 Originating Transaction ID 7 24 OSI standard 9 5 OTHER FEATURES 3 102 Other Measurements 3 48 Datacom 9 16 Other Parameters 3 111 OVERLAP 6 18 P P F 3 44 parity 3 124 PAT SYNC 2 9 PAT SYNC LED 2 9 PATL Datacom 9 14 PATLS Datacom 9 15 Pattern Inversion 3 111 Pattern synchronization 2 9 XIV PCM 10 2 PCM 30 3 58 PCM 30 2 9 3 5 10 7 PCM 31 2 9 3 6 10 7 Percent Errored Seconds 3 35 Percent Unavailable Seconds 3 37 PERD 3 100 PERIOD 3 44 poll final 6 5 Power POWER LED 2 8 Primary Rate 6 1 Primary Rate Interface 6 1 Printer Automatic printing 4 34 settings 3 123 Switch Settings 4 32 Printer Cable 4 31 4 36 Printer Cable Pin Assign ments 3 124 Printer port 2 11 Printing 4 30 Configurations 3 105 PRN SCRN key 2 8 Product Definition 2 1 Propagation Delay 3 64 Datacom 9 16 Protective Jacket 1 3 Protocol GSM 7 4 SS7 5 2 pulse calls 3 72 Pulse Code Modulation 10 2 Pulse Mask Analysis 3 53 View Last Pulse Shape 3 56 Pulse Shape 10 7 Q Q 441 3 77 10 14 Q 921 6 14 6 15 Q 931 6 11 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 R radio link 7 12 Radio Transmission 7 2 RATE errors 3 34 RCV Hz 3 36 RDI 3 47 Reference Clock
160. X25 Network 1 451 Packet level study Packet level ali X 25 Data Link LAP D 1 441 LAPB Physical Layer 1 1 430 1 431 A Circuit Leased Packet Signal Packet Telemetry switching circuit switching D Channel B Channel Figure 2 ISDN Protocol Architecture Layer 1 1 430 1 431 The ISDN physical layer functions are listed below e Encoding of digital data for transmission across the interface e Full duplex transmission of B channel data e Full duplex transmission of D channel data e Multiplexing of channels to form basic or primary access transmission structure e Activation and deactivation of physical circuit e Terminal identification e Faulty terminal isolation e D channel contention access The last function is needed when there is a multipoint configu ration for basic access 6 2 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 Layer 2 LAP D 1 441 The purpose of LAP D is to convey user information between layer 3 entities across the ISDN network using the D channel The LAP D service will support e Multiple terminals at the user network installation e Multiple layer 3 entities The LAP D standard provides two forms of service to LAP D users the unacknowledged and the acknowledged information transfer services Their characteristics are described as follows Unacknowleaged operation Layer 3 information is transferred in unnumbered frames Error detection is used to discard damaged frames but the
161. You may view all of the pages or you may limit your viewing to acertain number of pages 1 Place the cursor on the FROM No line 2 Press the SHIFT key then enter the number from the keypad This will be the first message displayed Move within the number using the cursor arrow keys Release the SHIFT key 3 Cursor down to TO No 4 Enterthenumberfrom the keypad repeating step 2 This will be the last message displayed When you have selected the message numbers press VIEW F3 to begin viewing the messages The received 5 lt Ch 6 ISDN 6 27 messages will be shown as in the next figure ASCI HEX F3 Change the Raw Data Display setting whether the message will be displayed in HEX or ASCII before decoding 04 43 49 RECEIVE MESG NO 577 RECEIVED MESSAGE LINE 1 96 01 18 04 18 20 454 CALL PROCEEDING CHNL CREF NO 1 PAGE UP PAGE DN HEX INFO Figure 6 13 View Message Screen e This screen displays one message e View other pages of messages by pressing the F1 or F2 keys to page up or page down respectively e Some screens will have an additional Information Element available this is noted by the presence of an INFO F4 key See the following sample figure 04 43 49 INFORMATION ELEMENT 1 2 ETSI Info Element Protocol CHANNEL IDENTIFICAION 18h INTERFACE ID PRESENT 0h Interface implicitly identfed INTERFACE TYPE 1h Primary rate interface PREFERRED EXCLUSIVE 1h excclusive only
162. ZE ABCD bits specified in the DIAL PARAMETERS menu e After it receives the BAK SEIZE ACK ABCD bits specified in the DIAL PARAMETERS menu it sends the first digit and dialing proceeds as shown in Figure 3 60 e Press ENTER to start the process Forward dialing MANUAL F2 mode e Cursor down to the number and enter the desired dialing number e Press SEIZE F2 and the ENTER key to begin dialing The test set will ignore the ABCD bits that are received It will dial the first forward digit and wait for the acknowledging backward digit Then it will dial the next forward digit and so on Backward dialing e Choose AUTO F1 to automatically acknowledge the seizure from the other end e Choose MANUAL F2 to perform the seizure acknowledgment yourself you must enter the expected digit responses Manual dialing e Enter a 1 for each incoming digit that is to be accepted with more digits still required e Enter a 3 as the response to the last digit e Enter a 6 in response to the called subscriber service code Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 87 BKWD Signalling Auto e Enter the send next digit using the NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 key If uncertain choose SEND NEXT 1 e Choose FRWD END If uncertain choose F e When finished entering the digits press ENTER to start the backward dialing sequence In BKWD AUTO mode the set will await for the seizure acknowledge the seizure wait for a digit acknowledge the digit wait for th
163. a disruptive access mode 1 This test must be performed in out of service mode 2 Move to the MAIN MENU by pressing the ENTER key a Enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu by pressing the ENTER key b Use the following configuration TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TxSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit design CRC 4 as specified by the circuit design TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK L1 Rx c Press the ENTER key when all of the settings are as desired 3 Move your cursor to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu item and Ch 4 Applications 4 23 press ENTER 4 Move the cursor to VF MEASUREMENTS and press ENTER a Enter the desired transmit and receive timeslots for Line 1 e The channel number will bypass any time slots containing the E1 framing information e In FAS framing no access is granted to time slot 0 while in MFAS framing access to time slots 0 and 16 is denied b Choose your INSERT TYPE TALK will allow you to talk and listen c Choose the line you want to listen to probably L1 Rx for the LISTEN SIDE menuitem You willbe able to receive listen and transmit talk on the selected channel 5 Plug the set into the circuit as shown in Figure 4 12 Exchange SunSet E10 PCM 30 CRC Yes or No Figure 4 12 Place a Call a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking history lights and turn them off b Verify thatt
164. a communication its capacity for BRI and PRI is 16 kbit s and 64 kbit s respectively Using ISDN users can transport data at a higher rate in addition to utilizing a variety of new services such as Group IV FAX and personal digitialized video communication 1 2 ISDN Network Architecture In accordance with Figure 1 an ISDN user can access the following services using an ISDN TE Terminal Equipment e Packet switched data e Circuit switched data e Circuit switched voice e Common Channel Signalling e User to user signalling Packet switched Data Circuit switched Voice Data ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN TE TE Switch Switch Common channel Signalling SS 7 User to user Signalling Figure 1 ISDN Architecture Ch 6 ISDN 6 1 1 3 ISDN Protocol The D channel provides the signalling for all the B channel connections Therefore the ISDN protocol is mainly concerned with the first three layers of the D channel signalling However there are occasions in which the B channel is connected to a packetized network where it can provide its own signalling The signalling at the Data Link Layer for channels B and D are called LAP B Link Access Protocol Balance and LAP D respec tively Referring to Figure 2 here are the different layers of the protocol Application Presentation End to end user Session signalling Transport Call control X 25 Further
165. al electrical and procedural characteristics of a SS 7 link e Level 2 Data Link Level provides the functionality needed to do SU alignment error detection correction link synchroniza tion and flow control e Level 3 Signalling Network Level provides two major subfunctions signalling message handling and signalling net work management Signalling message handling contains a discrimination function determining if a message is destined to its node a distribution function delivering a message to the appropriate user part and a routing function picking the appropriate route to a destination node The signalling network management provides the procedures needed to restore normal signalling conditions in the event of failure or link congestion SCCP Ch 5 SS 7 5 3 The Signalling Connection Control Part provides the routing capabilities for signalling messages through the GTT Global Title Translation process Using the SCP as the main data base for storing SP addresses other SPs can be freed of this task SCCP provides the functionality needed for non circuit services i e transactional services for database access These services are dividedinto two groups connection oriented andconnectionless Connection oriented services provide segmenting and reassembly capabilities of the network service data units that need to be transmitted through the SS 7 network Connectionless services provide the capability to transfer one d
166. ally used e 1 Packet mode using Q 931 call procedures e 16 Packet communications X 25 level 3 e 63Layer2 management procedures e All other values are reserved for future implmentation 9 LAYER 2 TEI Options O 127 Select the desired TEI value e Press the appropriate F keys to reach the desired value F1 increments by tens F2 increments by one F3 decrements by tens F3 decrements by one The Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI e Identifies the user device e Comprises the Address Field s second octet bits 2 8 e Identifies the user device e Forapoint to point data link connection TEI may be associated with a single Termianl Equipment TE 6 14 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 CCITT Q 921 has defined three groups of TEI values 0 63 Fixed or nonautomatic TEI assignment user equipment 64 126 Automatic TEI assignment user equipment 127 Group TEI for broadcast data link connection Note A value of 0 is normally used 2 2 Start Link Call Setup The test set will automaatically attempt to start the Ink on the channel entered in the CONFIGURATION menu You should receive a message indicating USE LINE 1 only for CALLS SETUP The screen will appear as in Figure 6 8 CALL SETUP SEND RR SEND UA LINE 1 RECEIVED MESSAGE Layer 2 mesg RR SAPT 0 TEI 0 Figure 6 8 Call Setup Screen Upon entering the test set will begin transmitting the 7E idle code on the D channel The set will automatically being s
167. aming information Use the following procedure 1 Verify that the fractional circuit is not in service This test will disrupt service If a hitless drop insert is required you may wish to read Application 3 1 Dual Drop and Insert THRU Testing before continuing this procedure 2 From the MAIN MENU enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu Configure the interface as follows TEST MODE El TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TX SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the span design CRC 4 as specified by the span design TEST RATE Nx64K RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK INTERN e Note that when you press Nx64K the SunSet will display a fractional E1 TIMESLOT screen e Manually configure the timeslots as desired e If the timeslot configuration is not known AUTO configure to the active channels AUTO configuration may not yield the proper channels if e Any of the active channels are transmitting an idle code e The idle code set up in the OTHER FEATURES TEST PARAMETERS OTHER PARAMETERS IDLE CHNL CODE item is not the same as the idle code of the circuit being tested 4 26 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 A good way for you to observe the idle and active channels for yourself is to plug the set in using the 2 048 Mbps test rate and then go to OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA This will allow you to double check the information being transmitted on a channel by channel basis a Press th
168. ansmit channels will have the ABCD bits passed through the set in THRU Tx SOURCE from TEST CON FIGURATION IFTXSOURCE is TESTPAT then the idle channels will have the CAS bits specified in OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAM ETERS IDLE CHNL A B C D 5 FRWD SEIZE A forward seizure signal is transmitted at the beginning of a call to initiate circuit operation e Use the SHIFT key and keypad numbers to enter the four forward seizure supervision bits 6 BAK SEIZE ACK These bits are used to acknowledge a seizure signal in the backward direction in MFC backward dialing mode e Use the SHIFT key and keypad numbers to enter the four backward seize acknowledgment supervision bits 7 DIAL PULSE 10pps Dial pulse is permanently set to 10 pps This item is for viewing only and may not be changed Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 71 8 BREAK Options 40 50 60 Select the desired BREAK percentage e Press NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 as necessary e Percent break is the ratio of the break IDLE interval to the total pulse cycle interval 9 INTERDIGIT PRD Options 200 900 hundred intervals only Select the desired interdigit period e Use the F keys NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as necessary 10 B BIT DIALING Options YES F1 NO F2 e B Bit dialing applies to pulse calls When B bit dialing is enabled and you place a call the B supervision bit of the selected timeslot toggles between 0 and 1 e Before you dial change the t
169. ansmitted in blocks Many data transmission systems reject blocks containing bit errors and retransmit the entire block of data Therefore block measurements can be more meaningful Figure 3 28 shows a Block Error screen 3 44 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 MEAS 17 30 06 ET 001 07 48 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD HDB3 RCV 63 XMT 63 LINE 1 BLOCK ERROR BLOCK SIZE 1000 of BLOCKS 539428 BLOCK ERROR 0 BLK ERR RATE 0 0e 06 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP Figure 3 28 Line 1 Block Error E1 Mode The following measurements are particular to this screen BLOCK SIZE This indicates the number of bits in the block size used for the measurements As in Figure 3 28 one block is typically 1000 bits long You may change the block size used in OTHER MEASUREMENTS MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 of BLOCKS This shows the total number of blocks received by the Sunset E10 BLOCK ERROR Block error shows the number of blocks received by the E10 which contain bit errors BLK ERR RATE The block error rate refers to the fraction of blocks in error the number of blocks received with 1 or more bit errors BLOCK ERROR divided by the total number of blocks received of BLOCKS Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 45 LINE 1 G 826 Screen Page 9 of E1 Mode s Measurement Results shows the Line 1 G 826 results Refer to Figure 3 29 MEAS 01 19 54 DATE 99 05 02 ET 000 14 25 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD HDB3 RCV P15 CRC4 YES E BIT YES RDI
170. arges the battery quickly This enables the user to return to the field as soon as possible This fast charging action causes no damage to the battery The charger recognizes when the battery is fully charged At this point the charger switches from fast charging to a trickle charging mode Trickle charging completes the charging cycle for maximum battery output This trickle charging mode does not damage the battery over long periods of time However to get maximum life from your battery remove it from the charger when it is fully charged Here are some tips for obtaining the best performance out of your SunSet battery 1 Use the backlight only if it is needed The SunSet will operate a little longer if the backlight is left off 2 Turn the power key off when the set is not in use 3 Use the Cigarette Lighter Battery Charger SS104B when transporting the SunSetin the field This will help maintain a full battery charge when AC power is not available 4 Ifyou are going to perform extended testing and you are not sure if the battery will last plug the charger in at the beginning of the test so that the set will run indefinitely If you wait until the battery is low during the middle of the test to plug the charger in the set s processor may reset and drop the current test as the charger is plugged in 5 Recharge the battery between uses even if the time available for arechargeis short The AC Battery Charger s two stage design
171. ase use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired octet number then press the SELECT F1 key e To deselect a specific octet follow the same procedure but press UN SEL F3 instead e To select all four octets in the given phase press SEL ALL F2 Ch 8 X 50 8 9 e To deselect all four octets press CLR ALL F4 e Once you have selected the octets press ENTER to return to the X 50 SETUP screen e If you accidentally do not select any octets you will automatically be given the default rate of 2400 and octet of 1 6 IDLE PATRN Options 0000 F1 1111 F2 2e7 1 F3 Determines the idle pattern to be transmitted on those phase s and octet s not selected in the lines above e Press F1 for all zeroes e Press F2 for all ones e Press F3 for a pseudorandom pattern 7 BERT S bit Options 0 or 1 Set the status bit for those phase s and octets s being tested e Activate the SHIFT key and press either 0 or 1 from the keypad to set the BERT status bit e Remember to deactivate the SHIFT key when finished 8 IDLE S bit Options 0 or 1 Set the idle status bit for those phase s and octet s not being tested e Activate the SHIFT key and press either 0 or 1 from the keypad to set the IDLE status bit e Remember to deactivate the SHIFT key when finished 9 A H bits Options for D2 eight bits of either O or 1 For D3 1 bit of either 0 or 1 For Division 2 this item sets the housekeeping bits A B C
172. ata unit Segmentation and reassembly are not available in connectionless services ISUP The ISDN User Part is used in SS 7 to support basic bearer services which involve the setup and release of 64 Kbps network switched circuit exchanges and supplementing services such as call forwarding calling line identification user to user signalling closed user groups and direct dialing Another service supported by ISUP is call switching of basic phone calls for both speech and data calls as specified by its standards for international semiauto matic and automatic telephone and circuit switched traffic TUP The Telephone User Part is used with SS 7 to support interna tional telephone call control signalling TCAP Transaction Capability Application Part refers to the building blocks of the Application layer network services used by SS 7 usersto provide a standard procedure of adding network services The current list of application uses includes e mobile service application operation and maintenance e non circuit control related exchange of signalling information e registration and activation of supplementary services 5 4 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 1 3 SS 7 Messages There are three basic message types e Message Signalling Unit MSU The MSUs are the units used by the ISUP TUP and TCAP messages They provide the structure to house the messages A description of each field is shown in Figure 5 3 Mef
173. available non severely bit errored seconds Errors during bit unavailable or severely bit errored seconds are not counted while the 60 available non severely bit errored seconds are being accumulated DGRM This is the percentage of summary degraded minutes since the beginning of the test EBIT EBIT count shows the number of E bit errors that have occurred EBER This is the average E bit error rate since the beginning of the test 3 34 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 EFS This is a count of number of bit Error Free Seconds since the beginning of the test EFS This is the percentage of Error Free Seconds since the beginning ofthe test A summary Error Free Secondis a second in which the signal is properly synchronized and no errors or defects occur ES This is a count of the number of Errored Seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test An errored second is any second with atleast one BPV bit error FBE or CRC 4 error Anerrored second is not counted during an Unavailable Second ES This is the percentage of errored seconds that have occurred since the beginning of the test FALM Frame ALarM seconds is a count of seconds that have had far end frame alarm FAS Remote Alarm Indication RAI since the beginning of the test FASE This is a count of the Frame Alignment Signal Errors received since the beginning of the test Applies to both PCM 30 and PCM 31 framing FE This is a count of the number of Frame
174. cation b When your settings are correct press ENTER 3 Escape to the Main Menu 4 Enter TEST PATTERN a Selectyourtest pattern 1 8 is a good pattern to use 20ITU may bring down the switch 5 Connect the test set to the switch e Ifyou are using DASS2 protocol you may emulate either a PBX oran ET Refer to Figure 6 18 for PBX mode or to 6 19 for ET mode e If you use DPNSS you may emulate a PBX in a PBX PBX network 6 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking LEDs and Ch 6 ISDN 6 35 6 zz a b O d turn them off ET Figure 6 18 DASS2 Standard PBX Mode ET PBX Figure 6 19 DASS2 Standard ET Mode From the Main Menu enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS ISDN ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION Selectthe Q 931 standard This application refers to DPNSS or DASS2 e Usethe previous application 4 1 if you would like to use the ETSI standard Choose your EMULATE TYPE e For DASS2 you may emulate either PBX or ET e For DPNSS you may only emulate a PBX Configure the other four settings as desired e Refer to section 2 1 of this chapter for details on each item Once your settings are correct press ENTER to return to the 6 36 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 ISDN menu 8 Cursordownto START LINK CALL SETUP andpress ENTER 9 Setup the call by pressing CALL F2 In the following screen you may enter four
175. ce of control information in time slots 00 and 16 for MFAS framing e All other channels time slots should contain actual voice data signals or your transmitted test pattern 2 7 Monitor a Voice Frequency Channel Here is a procedure for monitoring a voice frequency channel within an E1 circuit The setup is illustrated in Figure 4 6 or 4 7 1 This test may be performed while the span is carrying live customer traffic 2 Move to the MAIN MENU by pressing the ENTER key a Enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu by pressing the ENTER key b Use the following configuration TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TxSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit design CRC 4 as specified by the circuit design TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 DSXMON or BRIDGE RxLVL 2 DSXMON or BRIDGE XMT CLOCK INTERN Ch 4 Applications 4 19 c Press the ENTER key when all of the settings are as desired 3 Plug the set into the circuit as shown in Figure 4 6 or 4 7 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking history lights and turn them off b Verify that the PCM 30 or PCM 31 LED is lit 4 Press ESCAPE as necessary until you arrive at the MAIN MENU 5 Move your cursor to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu item and press ENTER 6 Move the cursor to VF MEASUREMENTS and press ENTER a Enter the desired transmit and receive timeslots for Lines 1 and 2 e The channel number will bypass any
176. ced performance monitoring is required Therefore when CRC is enabled in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen these bits depend upon the CRC calculation and should continually change between 0 and 1 When CRC 4 is not enabled these bits are set to 1 In FAS framing the odd frames do not contain the frame alignment signal The bits are defined as follows i When CRC is enabled bit 1 is used for the Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 performance monitoring When CRC is enabled this bit may not be changed here It may be changed when CRC is disabled 1 The second bitis always setto 1 to avoid FAS signal simulations A Bit Ais used for the Remote FAS Distant Alarm Set this bit to 1 toindicate an alarm condition For undisturbed operation this bit is set to 0 a bits 4 8 Spare bits they should be set to 1 for crossing an international border when not in use as defined by ITU T G 704 The first bits of frames 13 and 15 transmit the two E bits which are CRC 4 error indication bits A zero in this bit denotes received errored sub multiframes a one represents received frames free of errors 10 8 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 ONE 2 048 MBPS FRAME TIME SLOT 0 1 os 31 Even Frame Contains Frame Alignment Signal FAS Odd Frame Does Not Contain Frame Alignment Signal NFAS Sa Bit Reserved for National use E Error Indication Bit A Remote Alarm FAS Remote Alarm Indication Frame Alignment Signal 0011011 8 bits per timeslo
177. circuit plugging info circuit Consult User s Manual for operational detail Consult User s Manual for operational detail Figure 1 1 Software Cartridge Installation 7 Plug the AC Battery Charger into an appropriate AC wall outlet 220 VAC 50 60 Hz or 110 VAC 50 60 Hz SS113 8 If you choose to install the instrument stand refer to Figure 1 2 Instrument Stand Installation 19 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 Center Screw gt Bottom screws lt go here gt vA Bottom e e i Screw gt screws go here gt u Figure 1 2 Instrument Stand Installation NOTE If you plan to use the SunSet with its optional Protective Jacket SS123 then do not install the In strument Stand Use the following procedure a Remove the two center screws from the rear ofthe SunSet Save these screws should you decide to remove the stand at a later date b Remove the two bottom screws from the rear ofthe SunSet These screws are slightly longer than the ones removed in step a Save both of these screws for step e below c Fit the Instrument Stand onto the back of the SunSet d Use the two long screws provided with the Instrument Stand to screw the Instrument Stand onto the SunSet at the two bottom positions e Use the screws saved from step b to screw the Instrument Ch 1 Unpacking 1 3 Stand onto the SunSet at the two c
178. ck to the Main Menu a Enter TEST PATTERN b Select a BERT or USER pattern 6 Escape out to the Main Menu a Enter MEASUREMENT RESULTS b Verify that the circuit performs to your company s requirements for the service delivered If necessary refer to Chapter 3 Section 4 for definitions of each of the measurement parameters used in these screens c Use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys to access each of the measurement results pages X50 side A 64Kbps Figure 8 13 E1 MUX Mode Ch 8 X 50 8 17 3 3 Test a Multiplex 64 kbps X 50 frame to 2Mbps frame MUXTEST Mode tests either the 64 kbps X 50 multiplexed through the 2Mbps multiplexer or the 64 kbps 2Mbps timeslot demultiplexed onto the 64 kbps X 50 signal The following procedure tests the multiplexing operation 1 From the Main Menu enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS X 50 SETUP a At the top line X 50 select ENABLE F1 to set up your X 50 frame b Before continuing make sure that the reverse video X50 message is displayed at the top of the screen c Escape to the Main Menu 3 Enter TEST CONFIGURATION Select MUXTEST Mode a Configure the other settings as follows E1 TW INST L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx FRAMING As specified by your span design CRC 4 As specified by your span design RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMTCLK Select the clocking to be transmitted with the test pattern To receive timing f
179. companding characteristic The companding characteristic is a formula which translates the amplitudes of the samples into the 8 bit code words Internationally a companding characteristic known as A law is used The purpose of A law is to provide optimum signal to noise performance over a wide ranger of transmission levels Linear encoding provides a poorer signal to noise ratio at the 20 dB level typical of speech In North America the encoding is done according to the Mu Law Therefore the companding law used for encoding the voice signal must match that for decoding for distortion free transmission 1 5 2 048 Mbps Data Rate The E1 signal bitstream is transmitted at a rate of 2 048 Mbps 2 048 000 bits per second This transmission rate is achieved by combining 32 individual 64 kbps bitstreams 64 kbps Channel x 32 Channels 2048 kbps 2 048 Mbps This 2 048 Mbps signal is the overall E1 transmission rate 1 6 Line Coding Two common types of line coding are defined for use ina E1 network AMI or HDB3 AMI This is the simplest of the two line coding formats AMI stands for Alternate Mark Inversion and is used to represent successive 1 values in a bitstream with alternating positive and negative pulses Figure 10 2 depicts these alternating pulses AMI is not used in most 2 048 Mbps transmission because synchronization loss occurs during long strings of data zeros Ch 10 Technology Overview 10 3 2 37V 7
180. delay operator 3 Press the F1 key to Dial Anew SS 5 Dialing screen should appear This screen shows the Dial Number as well as the transmit and receive signals 4 When you have completed your call press HANGUP F1 5 Press ESCAPE to return to the MFC SS 5 menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 93 6 7 5 SS 5 Tracer This tracer traces SS 5 messages e Use the STOP F1 and RESTART F3 keys Once you have stopped the tracer use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys to scroll through the tracer screens 6 7 6 SS 5 View Print Tracer e Clear print or view the buffer that stores the SS 5 records Upon entering this item an initial View Print Tracer screen should appear e Observe the total number of records stored e Specify which records to view in the FROM No and TO No lines This screen gives you three F key options CLR ALL F1 This key clears all records stored in the MF CAS buffer e You will be asked to press ENTER to continue the clearing process This two step process safeguards against acciden tally erasing important records from the buffer e Press ESCAPE if you decide not to continue erasing PRINT F2 Press PRINT to print the buffer contents VIEW F3 Press VIEW to view all the contents or the specified records of the buffer e Pressing VIEW will bring up the first record 3 94 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 SS 5 TRACER LINE 1 LINE 2 ABCD 1001 INIT ABCD 1001 INIT 2400hz 02 96 2600h
181. ds to begin measurements using the SHIFT and numeric keys 5 CODE CONFIGUR Options HDB3 F1 AMI F2 Select the line coding HDB3 line coding is used almost everywhere throughout the world in 2 048 transmission A detailed explanation of the related technology is located in Chapter 10 Technology Overview 6 MEASURE MODE Options BER F1 LIVE F2 e Select BER to search for the test pattern and make bit error measurements with all other measurements e Choose LIVE to ignore the test pattern and make all measure ments except for bit error measurement e Most people leave the test set in BER mode even when they are monitoring live in service circuits In this case they expect the PAT SYNC light to remain RED because there is no pattern sync The bit error measurements will also show 100 UAS e If the LIVE mode is selected the PAT SYNC LED is turned OFF 3 104 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 and the bit error measurement screen is not displayed in MEASUREMENT RESULTS 7 BLOCK SIZE Options 1000 F1 2e15 1 F2 2e11 1 F3 2e9 1 more F1 2e6 1 more F2 Determines the block size used in the Block Error Ratio measure ment e One block is typically 1000 bits long e BLER Block Error Ratio is the fraction of blocks in error the number of blocks received with one or more bit errors divided by the total number of blocks transmitted 8 PRINT RESULT Options TIMED F1 LAST F2 e Select TIMED to have th
182. e lected above by pressing TYPE F2 e Verify your selection by pressing the GRAPHIC key For datacom you should see a reverse video R located next to the DROP of LINE 1 For datacom you should see a reverse video R located next to the datacom port E1INS Select the source to insert onto a 64 kbps timeslot on the E1 side e For LOOP F1 the received E1 signal from Line 1 Rx will be transmitted back out Line 1 Tx e f TYPE F2 is selected the 64 kbps X 50 signal received from the multiport will be transmitted onto the E1 side e If PATRN F3 is chosen the E10 will internally transmit the test pattern selected in the TEST PATTERN screen onto the E1 side e Verify your selection by pressing the GRAPHIC key If LOOP is chosen You should see a straight line from Line 1 Rx to Line 1 Tx For Datacom you should see a connecting line from the datacom port through the INST to the Line 1 Tx For PATRN you should see a reverse video T connecting through the INST and Line 1 Tx E1T S Select the 64 kbps timeslot to be multiplexed from the X 50 to the E1 side Choose from timeslots 1 31 for PCM 31 framing e Choose from timeslot 1 15 17 31 for PCM 30 3 Connect the E10 according to Figure 8 13 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off 8 16 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 4 Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS VIEW X 50 INFO a Verify the housekeeping bits 5 Escape ba
183. e Ack sent in BTS BSC direction to indicate requested radio channel could not be performed 26 Encryption Command sent in BSC BTS direction to start cyphering mode operation 27 Handover Detection sent in BTS BSC direction when BTS detects a Handover Access message from a MS on the Handover activation channel 28 Measurement Result sent in BTS BSC direction to report to BSC the results of radio channel measurements for a particular MS Figure 7 13 DC Message Types TRX Management Messages Hex Code Message Type 1A SACCH Filling sent in BSC BTS direction to indicate the new broadcast information to be used as filling information on SACCH 1B Overload sent in BTS BSC direction to indicate an overload situation Figure 7 14 TRX Message Types 6 MSG TYPE Options NONE F1 INC X F2 DEC X F3 1 10 50 F4 Select the Message Type if you have chosen a Discriminator in the line above e Use the F keys to enter a value e 1 10 50 F4 sets the increment decrement value of the INC X F2 and INC X F3 keys 7 CHNL NUM Options NONE F1 INC X F2 DEC X F3 1 10 50 F4 e Use the F keys to enter a value from 00 1F in hexadecimal code 7 14 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 e 1 10 50 F4 sets the increment decrement value of the INC X F2 and INC X F3 keys e This filter corresponds to the last 5 bits of the 2nd octet of the channel number information element e This fi
184. e ENTER key when the timeslot settings are as desired This will return you to the TEST CONFIGURATION menu b When the TEST CONFIGURATION menu settings are as desired press the ENTER key 3 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as shown in Figure 4 14 4 Ensure that a loop is in place at the far end of the circuit 5 Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking history lights and turn them off 6 Enter the MEASUREMENT RESULTS menu item and perform your acceptance test a Verify that the fractional E1 service performs to your company s requirements for the service delivered Ch 4 Applications 4 27 Central Office CUSTOMER PREMISES equipmentunder test SERALPORT NH 15 9200385 LINE2 LINE MULTPORT gt LOOPBACK DEVICE SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 Figure 4 14 Fractional E1 Testing 4 28 2 12 Using the Battery and AC Charger Warning Do not use any charger other than the one provided by Sunrise Telecom with the SunSet E10 Using another charger will cause permanent damage and will void the Sunrise Telecom warranty The battery is designed to provide ample power for portable testing applications The SunSet battery is charged by a custom designed charger for optimum performance This charger is power ful enough to run continuously while keeping the battery charged The charger contains a special fast charge feature which rech
185. e N fess ass FIRST BIT RECEIVED Backward Sequence Number Indication of the last message received Backward Indicator Bit Bit inverted for negative acknowledgment of the BSN message Forward Sequence Number Indication of the message sent Forward Indicator Bit Bit is BE inverted to indicate the retransmission of negative acknowledgment messages Length Indicator Signalling Info Octet in oo types of messages i e ISUP SCCP Signalling Info Field Section that contains the message max 272 octets Cyclic Redundancy Check 2 octets Figure 5 3 MSU Message Structure Ch 5 SS 7 5 5 e Link Status Signal Unit LSSU LSSUs are used to indicate the status of a node s level 2 message handling capabilities over a specific link They are used to inform other nodes in the event of congestion outage link reset etc A description of each field is shown in Figure 5 4 na se N H se ass _ FIRST BIT RECEIVED BSN Backward Sequence Number Indication of the last sequence number BIB Backward Indicator Bit Bit inverted for negative acknowledgment of the BSN message Forward Sequence Number Indication of the message sent Forward Indicator Bit Bit is inverted to indicate retransmission of negative acknowledgment messages Length Indicator Status Field Shows the status of the link Cyclic Redundancy Check 2 octets Figure 5 4 LSSU Message Struct
186. e continuing this proce dure 2 Press the ENTER key to move to the MAIN MENU 3 Enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu by pressing the ENTER key Configure the interface as follows TEST MODE El TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TxSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the span design CRC 4 as specified by the span design TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMTCLOCK L1 Rx a Press the ENTER key when all the settings are as desired NOTE It is not possible to perform talk and listen on an unframed signal One of the framing LEDs must light green for this procedure to work 4 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as shown in Figure 4 5 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking history lights and turn them off Ch 4 Applications 4 21 5 Press ESCAPE to get to the MAIN MENU a Move your cursor to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu item and press the ENTER key b Press the ENTER key on the VF MEASUREMENTS menuitem c Select the receive listen and transmit talk channels they are usually the same channel number d Choose TALK for the INSERT TYPE and L1 Rx for the LISTEN SIDE You can now talk and listen on the channel which you have selected e Adjust the volume to the desired level by using the volume keys 2 9 Send a Tone Here is a procedure for sending a tone 1 This is an intrusive test Be sure the E1 line is not carrying traffic or that it will be able to withstand
187. e devices with a rudimentary signalling capability A simple digital telephone is an example of a stimulus Ch 6 ISDN 6 3 terminal 1 4 ISDN Messages and their Functionalities The message structure is shown below in Figure 3 There is an 8 bit flag atthe end of each frame Sixteen bits are used as the frame check sequence 0 CR SAPI 1 TEI 0 C R N S P F N R I 0 ss 0000 P F N R S 1 1 MM PF MMM U ADDRESS CONTROL INFORMATION FCS i 8 16 8 or 16 Variable 16 8 Figure 3 ISDN Frame Structure Address Field The Address field is composed of e TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier identifies the user device e SAPI Service Access Point Identifier identifies a layer 3 user of LAP D and thus corresponds to a layer 3 protocol entity within a user device Four values have been assigned 0 used for call control procedures for managing B channel circuits 16 reserved for packet mode communication on the D channel using X 25 level 3 63 used for the exchange of layer 2 management information 1 used for packet mode communication using 1 451 This could be used for user user signalling The combination of TEI and SAPI is referred to as DLCI Data Link Connection Identifier At any one time LAP D may maintain multiple logical connections each with a unique DLCI 6 4 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 Control Field
188. e difference between the measured frequency and the reference frequency since the beginning of the test The WANDR value increases whenever the measured frequency is larger than the reference frequency WANDR This is the total negative phase difference between the measured frequency and the reference frequency since the beginning of the test The WANDR increases whenever the measured frequency is less than the reference frequency Following is a description of the available results screens SUMMARY Screens Screens 2 and 3 contain the summary results for Lines 1 and 2 respectively Figure 3 21 displays the Summary screen for Line 1 The Summary screens present the most significant measure ment results These screens contain data related to the specific types of impairments like code errors CRC 4 block errors framing and multi framing bit errors They also report overall performance measures such as errored seconds and percent errored seconds Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 37 16 47 42 ET 000 24 37 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 CLK SR INTERN RCV 2e20 XMT 2e20 INPUT TERM TEST R 2 048M LINE 1 SUMMARY RATE 0e 10 RATE 03 08 RATE 0e 08 RATE 0e 07 BER 0 0e 10 EBER 0 03 07 RxLVL 0 4 dB Rx CLK 2048000 Hz PPM 0 0 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 3 21 Line 1 Summary Screen E1 Mode RESULTS FREQUENCY Screen Screen 3 of E1 Mode s Measurement Results is the Frequency screen which shows relevant frequency infor
189. e line 2 LED s don t matter 5 Enter the MEASUREMENT RESULTS section and press the ERR INJ key 3 times a Verify that 3 BPV s were detected b Page down to the LINE 1 FREQUENCY screen and verify that RCV hz is 2048000 d Page down to the LINE 1 G 821 screen and verify that 3 BIT s were detected d Page down to the LINE 1 SIG ALM screen and verify there are no alarms 5 1 FOR BNC 75y CONNECTORS ONLY Verify that LVL and LVL are both between 2 07 and 2 67volts 5 2 FOR BR2 120y CONNECTORS ONLY Verify that LVL and LVL are both between 2 60 and 3 40 volts 6 Enter the OTHER MEASUREMENTS PULSE MASK ANALY SIS screen and select START NEW ANALYSIS a Select G 703 and verify that the pulse shape does not fall outside the template boundaries by more than 2 pixels 7 Return to the MAIN MENU In SEND TEST PATTERN change the pattern to FOX a Verify that the LED s are as they were in step 4 b Return to the MAIN MENU c Enter the OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA screen d Press the PAUSE F3 key and then PAGE DN key several times e Verify that the FOX pattern is displayed correctly in the ASCII column inside the parentheses THE QUICK BROWN FOX JUMPS OVER THE LAZY DOG 1234567890 Note that the message is not displayed in time slots 00 and 16 11 4 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 8 Return to the MAIN MENU a Enter the VF CHANNEL ACCESS VF MEASUREMENTS screen b Change INSERT TYPE to TONE
190. e next digit acknowledge the next digit and so on If the FRWD END digit is received it will not acknowl edge the digit and will not acknowledge following digits In BKWD MANUAL mode the test set will ignore the seizure It will send the entered digits in response to the received digits If dialing backward e Choose signalling AUTO to automatically acknowledge the seizure from the other end OR e Choose SIGNALLING MANUAL to perform the seizure acknowledgment yourself 3 NUMBER Options IDLE F1 SEIZE F2 more F4 INSERT more F1 DELETE more F2 USER more F1 STORE more F2 e Press the IDLE F1 key to send Idle signalling bits 1011 e Press SEIZE F2 to seize the line by sending 0011 A B C D bits e Press INSERT TYPEOVR more F1 Press USER more F1 to enter the User Dial Number menu This menu lists any user numbers already stored which you may view and edit and also gives you the opportunity to create new user numbers To create a new user number directly from the MFC Dialing screen e Press STORE more F2 You will enter the USER DIAL NUMBER screen atthe LABEL item Use the alphabet grid to enter a label as explained in 2 of the following proce dure then press ENTER To view or edit a user number move the cursor to the desired label e Press VIEW F1 or EDIT F2 as needed 3 88 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Use the following procedure to create a new number 1 In the USER DIAL NUM
191. e numbers in the two slots e To test all five phases 48 Kbps press the ALL F4 key This automatically sets the RATE to 48 kbps e The E10 will not allow the same phase number to be entered in both slots e When you choose to enter a pair of phases the rate is automati cally setto 19 2K The X 50 frame is divided into 5 phases Each phase contains 16 octets and a rate of 9 6 kbps Figure 8 7 shows the phase structure for Division 2 This 8 6 Sunset E10 Version 2 37 figure demonstrates how 5 customers with a bandwidth of 9 6 Kbps could easily share one 64Kbps line As another example twenty customers each with a bandwidth of 2 4 Kbps could share this line in this case four customers are placed in each phase Phase Octet Figure 8 7 X 50 Division 2 Phases 4 RATE Options The RATE options available will depend on the TRIBU selected above e For D2 Division 2 the options are Nx600 F1 600 F2 1200 F3 2400 more F1 4800 more F2 9600 more F3 e For D3 Division 3 the options are Nx2400 F1 2400 F2 4800 F3 9600 F4 e If a rate of 9600 kbps for either D2 or D3 is selected the octet number in the line below will be forced to 1 and the cursor will move to the IDLE PATRN line Since the RATE and OCTET values are linked they will be discussed together below 5 OCTET Options NEXT F1 PREVIUS F2 the exact value
192. e record Press CLR ALL F4 to clear the buffer 1 Scroll to select the Measurement Result you want to view 2 Press ENTER a PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 to scroll through the screens b Press PRINT F3 to print the record you are viewing 7 7 Send Frame Words e Manually specify the E and Sa bit states and the MFAS ABCD e Transmit the desired FAS and MFAS framing information e Refer to Figure 3 82 Send Frame Words T93 SEND FRAME WORDS CRC YES NFAS WORD E BIT 1H S S FAS WORD C0011011 MFAS WORD 00001011 MFAS ABCD 1101 PRRRRReReR N PRRPRPRPRPEPR On PRPRPPRPRPEPHR NH PRRRRReReFR Un i C C C C C 1 1 1 ooo0o0o0000 PRRRRReRP SET 0 AUTO DEFAULT Figure 3 82 Send Frame Words e You may not change certain items in this screen e The cursor will land on and highlight only those items which can be changed e Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 115 location You cannot enter the left hand side of the screen by continuously pressing the right arrow key The following information is shown on this screen 1 CRC Options for viewing only This selection displays the CRC option chosen in TEST CON FIGURATION e Change the CRC option in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen from the Main Menu 2 E BIT Options MANUAL AUTO F2 DEFAULT F3 SEND F4 e If MANUAL is selected SET F1 1 or 0
193. e same as that of B Refer to Figure 10 4 to see the types of HDB3 zero substitution codes Ch 10 Technology Overview 10 5 Number of Pulses Polarity of Previous Pulse since last substitution even l l Substitute BOOV 0 0 0 1 Odd Substitute 000V Figure 10 4 HDB3 Encoding The SunSet E10 is configured to detect the two types of HDB3 substitution codes even if they are not matched to the proper number of pulses since the last substitution 1 7 Signal Levels Once a signal has been encoded into a binary format and assembled into a bit stream the pulses in the bit stream are then converted to actual voltage levels suitable for E1 transmission Referring to Figures 10 1 and 10 2 we see thata typical signal level for an E1 pulse with 75 ohm impedance is either 2 37 volts fora binary 1 value or 0 volts for a binary 0 value Real world signal values would typically be 10 Ideally each pulse transmitted would be perfectly symmetrical However in a real world situation each pulse becomes slightly distorted when itis generated and when it travels down the E1 line Refer to Figure 10 5 for the shape of an ideal pulse vs an actual pulse that would be encountered on an E1 line 10 6 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 An E1 pulse may be required to conform to a standardized pulse shape This is often determined by comparing it to a spec
194. e test results printed every 2 to 99 minutes Press the SHIFT key then enter the number of minutes between 2 and 99 minutes e In LAST mode the test results are printed only at the end of a timed test or a continuous test that has ended due to a RESTART 9 PRINT EVENT Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 e Choose ENABLE if you would like the printerto print out a time and date stamped error message every second that one or more errors occur e Choose DISABLE if you do not want the printer to print out a result each time Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 105 7 2 MEAS Configuration 2 This configuration screen relates to ITU standards for 2 048 Mbps transmission G 821 G 826 and M 2100 Refer to Figure 3 77 MEAS 00 58 29 MEAS CONFIGURATION 2 M 2100 OFF M 2100 550 PARAMETERS MEAS PERIOD Ol min HRP MODEL 040 0 Figure 3 77 MEAS Configuration 2 The first three items relate to ITU standards on measurements and performance characteristics for 2 048 Mbps 1 G 821 Options ON F1 OFF F2 e When the G 821 Measurement isturned ON the Bit Error screen is shown in the Measurement Results This G 821 screen presents the measurement parameters speci fied in ITU G 821 Bit Errors and Rate Errored Seconds and Severely Errored Seconds and Error Free Seconds and Available Seconds and Unavailable Seconds and Degraded Minutes and 2 G 826 Options ON F1 OFF F2 e
195. e the beginning of the test BIT This is a count of bit errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test Bit errors are not counted during unavail able time Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 33 BER The Bit Error Rate is the total number of bit errors divided by the total number of bits during available time since the beginning of the test CLKSLIP This is the number of clock slips which occur when the measured frequency deviates from the reference frequency by one unit interval that have occurred since the beginning of the test CODE This is a count of the number of line Code Errors Bipolar Violations that violate the coding rules that have occurred since the beginning of the test In HDB3 coding a Code Error is a bipolar violation that is not part of a valid HDB3 substitution CODE RATE Thisis the average BiPolar Violation error rate since the beginning of the test CRC Thisis acount of the number of CRC 4 block errors that have occurred since the beginning of the test This measurement is reported as N A when the SunSet is not synchronized on a received CRC 4 check sequence CRC RATE Thisis the average CRC 4 block error rate since the beginning of the test This measurement is reported as N A when the SunSet is not synchronized on a received FAS or MFAS signal DGRM This is the count of DeGRaded Minutes since the beginning of the test A Degraded Minute occurs when there is a 10 6 bit error rate during 60
196. each menu item However the menu items for datacom ISDN GSM X 50 and SS 7 are contained in their own chapters later in this manual 3 2 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 Section 2 Test Configuration Before connecting the SunSet E10 to the circuit the TEST CONFIGURATION must be properly configured To access the TEST CONFIGURATION screen press the ESCAPE key until you have reached the Main Menu Move the cursor to the Test Configuration selection and press ENTER The F keys show the available options for each setup parameter in this screen As each F key is pressed the SunSet E10 immediately alters its configuration to reflect these new settings Note the following 1 In order to avoid configuration mistakes use the GRAPHIC key to confirm any changes to your setup 2 Press the AUTO key in E1 or E1 MUX modes to automatically detect incoming framing coding and CRC 4 and test patterns Refer to Figure 3 1 for the Test Configuration menu 23 22 10 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE Eg TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx Tx SOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING PCM 30 CRC 4 YES TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK INTERN E1 E1 MUX MUXTEST DATACOM Figure 3 1 Test Configuration Menu The first selection in the TEST CONFIGURATION Menu is TEST MODE Four choices are available E1 E1 MUX MUX TEST and DATACOM The Test Configuration menu diffe
197. ect the number The ISUP message type are shown in the following table Table 5 14 Ch 5 SS 7 5 17 ISUP M T hex ACM Address Complete Message 06 ANM Answer 09 BLA Blocking Acknowledgment 15 BLO Blocking 13 CCR Continuity Check Request 11 CFN Confusion OF CGB Circuit Group Blocking 18 CGBA Circuit Group Blocking Acknowledgment 1A CGU Circuit Group Unblocking 19 CGUA Circuit Group Unblocking Acknowledgment 1B CMC Call Modification Completed 1D CMR Call Modification Request 1C CMRJ Call Modification Reject 1E CON Connect 07 COT Continuity 05 CPG Call Progress 2C CQM Circuit Query 2A CQR Circuit Query Response 2B CRG Charge Information 31 DRS Delayed Release 27 FAA Facility Accepted 20 FAR Facility Request 1F FOT Forward Transfer 08 FRJ Facility Reject 21 GRA Circuit Group Reset Acknowledgment 29 GRS Circuit Group Reset 17 IAM Initial Address Message 01 INF Information 04 INR Information Request 03 LPA Loop Back Acknowledgment 24 OLM Overload 30 PAM Pass Along 28 REL Release oc RES Resume OE RLC Release Complete 10 RSC Reset Circuit 12 SAM Subsequent Address Message 02 SUS Suspend OD UBA Unblocking Acknowledgment 16 UBL Unblocking Signal 14 USIS Unequipped Circuit Identification Code 2E USR User to User Information 2D Table 5 14 ISUP Message Types 3 ADDR SGNL Options NONE F1 CALLED F2 CALLER F3 Filter messages using address numbers e Select NONE F1 if you want the SunSet to search for all 5 18
198. ed to Rx 2 by setting Rx DROP to L2 Rx in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen 1 Tx 1 T S Options 1 31 Choose the transmit timeslot for E1 Line 1 3 66 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as needed e The Tx 1 T S normally should be the same as the Rx 1 T S but you do have the option to set them for different channels e Upon selecting a timeslot the number will flash five times before actually inserting on the timeslot 2 Rx 1 T S Options 1 31 Choose the receive timeslot for E1 Line 1 e Use the appropriate F keys NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as needed 3 Rx 2 T S Options 1 31 Choose the receive timeslot for E1 Line 2 e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to make the selection e To receive on Line 2 be sure to select either BOTH or L2 Rx in the LISTEN SIDE setting below 4 INSERT TYPE Options TALK F1 TONE F2 QUIET F4 e Press F1 to talk on the transmit signal the SunSet will transmit speech from the microphone located at the bottom of the test set below the POWER button e Press TONE F2 to insert a tone on the transmit signal If you select TONE use the next two settings to set the tone fre quency and level e Press QUIET F4 to place a quiet termination on the transmit signal 5 TONE FREQ Hz Options 50 Hz 3950 Hz If you selected TONE as your INSERT TYPE you may choose the tone frequency here e The frequency may be changed by pressing the SHIFT key and en
199. edited nor changed They apply to the Rx drop line 3 68 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 9 Rx 1 A B C D Rx 1 A B C D shows the Channel Associated Signalling Sys tem CAS bits Note These bits are meaningful only if the PCM 30 LED is lit green Ignore these bits if this LED is not green 10 Rx 1 DATA View the live 8 bit channel data as it is received from the line 11 Rx 1 FRQ LVL View the frequency and level received on Line 1 6 2 View Line 1 amp 2 CAS e View the signalling bits for all of the 30 channels for both Lines 1 and 2 e You must select PCM 30 framing in TEST CONFIGURATION e The PCM 30 LED must be lit green in order for the signalling bits to be displayed e Note that time slots 1 through 5 are shown on the first line 6 through 10 are shown in the second line etc e The idle channels will be displayed in reverse video For instance if IDLE CHNL A B C D is set to 1101 in OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAMETERS the timelsots will be displayed as in Figure 3 46 Ble fel ed oe to Be p H ABCD 0000 E eelelelele Bee le ele ololololo o BIEIHI HIER S le el fe fe fay Be BIR ol neo gt Heje ojojo JE D w Q oO Tas Pas Fa Fo Po Je pA Hjejle je OO fo fo fo fo o fo gt ed ed ed Ld Lael i a el gt Ee el Cf m lel O Ble BIR o Bie Ble el ted oe te olololo Bele a 1 BIR ele je ololololo SS BJelelele e Hjelle je olololololo B
200. ee e e e p H jo 1101971101 Figure 3 46 View Line 1 amp 2 CAS Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 69 6 3 Dial Parameters e Set additional parameter settings to be used for your VF procedures Refer to Figure 3 47 LS 75 93 59 DIAL PARAMETERS DIAL PERIOD 150 SILENT PERIOD TONE LEVEL dbm SUPERVISION IDLE FRWD SEIZE BAK SEIZE ACK DIAL PULSE 10pp BREAK INTERDIGIT PRD B BIT DIALING NEXT PREVIUS Figure 3 47 Dial Parameters The following settings are provided in this screen 1 DIAL PERIOD Options 30 ms to 999 ms Specify the dial period in milliseconds used for DTMF and MF dialing e The factory default value is 100 ms e Press the SHIFT key and enter the desired value from the keypad Select any value between 30 ms and 999 ms 2 SILENT PERIOD Options 30 ms to 999 ms Specify the silent period in milliseconds used for DTMF and MF dialing e Press the SHIFT key and enter the desired value from the keypad Select any value between 30 ms and 999 ms 3 70 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 TONE LEVEL dbm Options 20 to 5 dbm Select the tone level e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as necessary The next three items allow you to program your supervision A B C D bits 4 IDLE e Use the SHIFT key and keypad numbers to enter the four idle supervision bits These bits will be placed on the CAS bits for the timeslot being transmitted when the IDLE F key is chosen All other tr
201. een 2 1 X 50 Setup Enter X 50 SETUP e Enable the X 50 analysis feature e Configure a specific division phase rate octet idle pattern and other information related to the X 50 frame being sent and received e Refer to Figure 8 6 X 50 Setup 22 27 34 ENABLE 1 2400 L PATRN S bit 0 S bit 0 bits 01100110 signal 1111 Figure 8 6 X 50 SETUP Screen Ch 8 X 50 8 5 The following items should be configured in this screen 1 X 50 Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 Enables disables the X 50 analysis feature Press ENABLE F1 to perform any X 50 analysis procedure with the E10 After enabling X 50 a reverse video X50 message appears on the top of the screen 2 TRIBU Options D2 F1 D3 F2 Select a sub rate structure tributary e Press F1 for X 50 Division 2 D2 X 50 division 2 uses an 80 byte frame Press F2 for X 50 Division 3 D3 Division 3 uses a 20 byte frame Please refer to the Technology Overview section within this chapter for a more detailed explanation of each framing type 3 PHASE Options NEXT F1 PREVIUS F2 F3 ALL F4 Select the phase s to be tested e To test only one 9 6 kbps phase use the NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 keys as appropriate to enter the desired number from 1 5 e To test a pair of phases x y 19 2 kbps press F3 This line now shows two phase slots separated by a plus sign Use the F1 and F2 keys as needed to enter the desired phas
202. een setto YES inthe TEST CONFIGURATION 4 2 E1 MUX Mode Measurement Results The Measurement Results for E1 MUX Mode follow the same outline as the E1 Mode results See the Measurement Definitions section as needed Only one screen differs in this mode Page 5 of the E1 MUX results contains Datacom G 821 results as op posed to the Line 1 G 821 results for E1 Mode when BERT has been set to the datacom type See the Measurements Definitions section as necessary Figure 3 30 shows the Datacom G 821 results screen NS 17 20 11 ET 000 56 49 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD AMI RCV 63 XMT 63 DATACOM G 821 BER 0 0e 10 SES 00 000 SSES 00 000 SEFS 100 SAS 100 SUAS 00 000 SDGRM 00 000 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP Figure 3 30 Datacom G 821 Results E1 MUX Mode Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 47 4 3 MUXTEST Mode Measurement Results The Measurement Results for MUXTEST Mode are exactly the same as those of E1 MUX Mode Please refer to Section 4 1 E1 Mode for descriptions of all the screens except for Page 5 Datacom G 821 The Datacom G 821 screen may be found in Section 4 2 4 4 DATACOM Mode Measurement Results The Datacom Measurement Results contain two pages of data See Chapter 9 for further information Section 5 Other Measurements The Other Measurements Menu listis displayed in Figure 3 31 01 25 25 OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA VIEW FAS WORDS VIEW MFAS WORDS PULSE MASK ANALYSIS SS 7 ANALYS
203. efer to Figure 3 73 00 52 08 LABEL MFC No SEND RECEIVE TYPE CODE PERD TYPE CODE TOUT 01 CAS 1100 gt lt CAS 0100 70 02 MFR2 4 o3 E 04 gt lt MFR2 1 70 Figure 3 73 Edit Emulator 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired field The following features appear on this screen SEND Side The Send side refers to the signalling digits which will be sent by the SunSet E10 on whichever line has been selected as Tx INSERT in TEST CONFIGURATION Three items are available for sending 1 TYPE Options NONE F1 CAS F2 DTMF F3 MF F more F1 MF B more F2 DP more F3 Determines the type of signalling used e Press the desired F key Channel Associated Signalling F2 Dual Tone MultiFrequency F3 Multi frequency forward more F1 Multi frequency backward more F2 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 99 Dial Pulse more F3 NONE F1 2 CODE Options any keypad alphanumeric digits four digits maximum for CAS 20 digits maximum for all other types These are the actual bits to be transmitted by the E10 e Press the SHIFT key and enter the desired signalling bits 3 PERD Options up to 9999 ms PERD determines the elapsed time before proceeding to the next step in the emulation RECEIVE Side The receive side refers to the signalling digits which you require to be received by the E10 on the line selected in Rx DROP in TEST CONFIGURATION before progressing to the next step These
204. el decoding Loopback channel GSM A amp Abis ANALYSIS SW258A A bis interface Supports GSM 16 kbps or 64 kbps A bis interface to GSM 08 58 04 08 08 56 A bis traffic statistics include counters for RLM DCM CCM TRXM and total number of messages for both L1 and L2 A bis Layer 2 traffic statistics include counters for supervisory unnumbered information and total number of frames for both L1 and L2 Programmable trace filter layer 2 messages SAPI TEI message discriminator message type channel number time slot number Bi directional message tracing with up to 2100 message storage Trace buffer view print and clear Message decode performance 99 of messages captured at 15 channel utilization A interface Supports GSM A interface Phase 1 to GSM 08 08 08 06 04 08 04 11 04 80 Programmable trace filter LSSU DPC OPC Bi directional message tracing with up to 2100 message storage Trace buffer view print and clear 12 8 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 GSM MAP B G Interface ANALYSIS SW258B Supports GSM 09 02 Phase 2 Programmable trace filter LSSU DPC OPC caller number called number TCAP originating and destination transaction ID in voke ID Bi directional message tracing with up to 2100 message storage Trace buffer view print and clear Message decode performance 100 of messages captured at 15 channel utilization MAP Dialogue information decoded messages MAP Dialogue PDU map open map accept map close
205. eleasing the SHIFT key and pressing the desired keypad number keys Ch 5 SS 7 5 15 TUP Headin hex ACB Access Barred Signal A5 ACC Automatic Congestion Control Info Message 1A ACM Address Complete Message 14 ADI Address Incomplete Signal 45 ANC Answer Signal Charge 16 ANN Answer Signal No charge 26 ANU Answer Signal Unqualified 06 BLA Blocking Acknowledgment Signal 37 BLO Blocking Signal 27 CBK Clear back Signal 36 CCF Continuity Failure Signal 32 CCL Calling Party Clear Signal 76 CCR _ Continuity Check Request Signal 67 CFL Call Failure Signal 55 CGC Circuit Group Congestion Signal 25 CHG Charging Message 24 CLF Clear Forward Signal 46 COT Continuity Signal 32 DPN Digital Path Not Provided Signal B5 EUM Extended Unsuccessful Backward Set up F5 Information Message FOT Forward Transfer Signal 66 GRA Circuit Group Reset Acknowledgment A8 Message GRQ General Request Message 13 GRS Circuit Group Reset Message 98 GSM General Forward Set upInformation Message 12 HGU Hardware Failure Oriented Group Unblocking 78 Message HUA Hardware Failure Oriented Group Unblocking 88 Acknowledgment Message IAI Initial Address Message with Additional Info 21 IAM Initial Address Message 11 LOS Line out of Service Signal 85 MBA Maintenance Oriented Group Blocking 28 Acknowledgment Message MGB Maintenance Oriented Group Blocking Message 18 MGU Maintenance Oriented Group Unblocking Message 38 MPR Misdialled Trunk Prefix C5 MUA Maintenance Oriented Gr
206. em is highly recommended Some func tions such as VF MEASUREMENTS will only work properly if a 9600 baud modem is used Refer to Figures 4 15 and 4 16 for cable pinouts You may needa breakout box appropriate tools andtraining to make sure the test set is appropriately connected to the modem the first time you set it up 4 lf not already connected to an analog phone line plug the modem into the telephone network usually done with an RJ 4 cable 5 Confirm thatthe SunSet s serial port settings correspond to those of your communications software or terminal The SunSet s factory default settings are BAUD RATE 9600 PARITY NONE STOP BIT 1 BIT BITS CHAR 8 BIT CR LF INSRT CR LF If youneed to reconfigure the SunSet s serial port settings use the following procedure 4 36 SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 a From the MAIN MENU select OTHER FEATURES b Select the GENERAL CONFIG item c Use the Down Arrow key to access the BAUD RATE setting Three selections are available 1200 F1 2400 F2 and 9600 F3 These settings determine the rate at which the SunSet transmits data characters to the computer or terminal This setting must match the setting on your computer or terminal otherwise random characters will appear on your remote screen d Access the PARITY setting Three options are available here NONE F1 EVEN F2 and ODD F3 This setting must match with the configuration of your remote control e Access the S
207. enter positions 9 Switch the set on and verify that it passes the SELF TEST Ifthe SunSet does not turn on immediately it may need to charge for up to 5 minutes before it can run 10 Charge the unit for at least one hour before its first use Or leave the AC Battery Charger plugged in while operating the SunSet 11 Put the SunSet and accessories into the soft Carrying Case if it was ordered NOTE Each software cartridge is mated to a single SunSet If your SunSet does not start properly verify that the Serial Number printed on the software cartridge matches the Serial Number on the back of your SunSet When ordering software upgrades be sure to specify the Serial Number of the SunSet into which the new cartridge will be installed 1 4 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 Chapter 2 Test Set Description Section 1 Warnings Section 2 Front View Description 2 1 Keys 2 2 White Labels 2 3 Orange Labels 2 4 LED s 2 5 Connector Panel ONGO i SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 SunSet EO Version 2 37 Section 1 Warnings 1 Insert and remove software cartridges ONLY with the power switched OFF Otherwise software cartridges may become damaged 2 Use the SunSet charger only It is marked with the Sunrise Telecom logo AC Battery Charger name 3 When bringing the SunSet from an extreme cold to warm environment allow the SunSetto warm for at least 4 hours prior to use Condensation may interfere with the opera
208. ents 5 1 View Received Data 5 2 View FAS Words SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 ONo k 14 16 22 24 28 30 33 47 48 48 48 49 50 6 8 1 6 8 2 Section 7 Section 8 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 View MFAS Words Pulse Mask Analysis Start New Analysis View the Last Pulse Shape C bit Analysis Histogram Analysis Current Histogram Propagation Delay VF Channel Access VF Measurements View Line 1 amp 2 CAS Dial Parameters DTMF MFR2 DP Dialing DTMF MF DP CAS Analysis Noise Analysis MFC SS 5 Dial Analysis MFC Dialing MFC Tracer MFCAS View Print Tracer SS 5 Dialing SS 5 Tracer SS 5 View Print Tracer View MFC SS 5 Example Signalling Emulator Edit Emulator Start Emulation Other Features Meas Configuration 1 Meas Configuration 2 Error Injection Other Parameters Alarm Generation View Test Record Send Frame Words Load Samples Memory Allocation System Parameters General Configuration Erase NV RAM Full Self Test Clear Print Buffer Version Option Factory Defaults SunSet 2 Version 2 37 102 103 106 108 111 112 114 115 119 119 121 122 125 126 126 127 127 Section 9 Language Selection Chapter 4 Applications Section 1 Connecting the Cords Section 2 Basic Applications 2 1 Accept a New Circuit 2 2 Monitor an In service Circuit 2 3 Checking for Frequency Sync 2 4 Measure Signal Level 2 5 Run a Timed Test 2 5 1 Manual Start 2 5 2 Auto Start 2 6 Ob
209. er DB37 to CF 3 pin banana TX and RX connectors SS257 SunSet E10 User s Manual English Spanish specify SS257SP SS5257 TM SunSet E10 Service Manual SS261 External Clock Input Cable DB 37 to BNC m 750hm SS262 RS530 DTE SS262T amp DCE SS262C Interface Adapter DB37 to ISO2110 DB25 connectors SS306 HDI 30 Datacom Cable HDI 36 to DB37 Interface Cable 2m SSE10W SunSet E10 Extended 3 Year Warranty 12 16 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 Chapter 13 Abbreviations A AC Alternating Current A continuously variable current usually following a sinusoidal growth and decay curve ACK Acknowledge A control character signalling that the receiver is ready to accept the next block AFBER Average Framing Bit Error Rate AIS Alarm Indication Signal Indicates an all ones signal on the active receive jack AISS Alarm Indication Signal Seconds The count of the number of seconds in which AIS was detected ALM Alarm AMI Alternate Mark Inversion A method of transmitting binary digits in which successive marks are of alternating polarity AS Available Second AVBER Average Bit Error Rate AVCER Average CRC 4 block Error Rate AVG Average B B Channel Bearer Channel A 64 Kbps ISDN user channel which carries digital data PCM encoded digital voice or a mixture of lower speed data traffic BATT Battery BERT Bit Error Rate Testing BIB Backward Indicator Bit Bit inverted for the negative ac
210. eration should always be performed when inserting anew software cartridge e This operation can also be tried as a last resort if the set is not performing properly If this is the case you should initiate Erase NV RAM only after attempting to correct the problem by 1 Making sure that the test set is properly configured for the application being attempted 2 Turning the power switch off and on 3 Performing a self test and turning the power off and on again Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 125 WARNING Performing the NV RAM ERASE operation will erase all the user storable information the user has entered into the test set All user transmit patterns telephone numbers and system profiles will be erased Use the following procedure to perform ERASE NV RAM 1 Fromthe main menu enterthe SYSTEM PARAMETERS menu then enter the ERASE NV RAM menu item 2 Press ENTER again after the warning message is displayed A WORKING message will be displayed 3 When the test set is finished with the operation turn the power off for 5 seconds then turn the power back on 4 Reconfigure the set for the operations you need to perform TEST CONFIGURATION TEST PATTERNS and all other areas of the set will be restored to the factory defaults 8 3 Full Self Test e Use the FULL SELF TEST to perform a hardware test within the SunSet E10 e If an error message is shown after the FULL SELF TEST is completed please contact Sunrise Telecom Customer
211. ered from L2 Rx Figure 3 7 portrays Internal Timing 3 12 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 Slave TxINSERT L1 Tx TxSRC TESTPAT XMT CLK INTERN Slave Loop Back Figure 3 7 Internal Timing L2 Rx F3 Timing is received from the signal received on Line 2 For loop timing you should set Tx INST and XMT CLK for L2 Rx For external timing set XMT CLK for L2 Rx and TxINST as L1 TX MLTIPRT F4 Uses the timing source received on the multiport e This feature may be used in conjunction with a special order Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 13 external clock cable SS261 This cable has aDB37 connector on one end and a 75y 2 048 BNC connector on the other Therefore you may connect the SunSet E10 to any G 703 sinusoidal clock source through the multiport and use this clocking source as a reference to measure the frequency of the Rx DROP signal 2 2 E1 MUX MODE E1 MUX provides multiplexing capabilities between the E1 line and synchronous multiport datacom signals Use this mode to make the E10 emulate a terminal multiplex or an add drop multiplex This mode allows you to send a test pattern in either direction The E1 MUX configuration screen is shown in Figure 3 8 MEAS 2 31 03 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE E1 MUX El DATACOM Tx INST izes TYPE RS232 Rx DROP LI Rx TxSRC EIDRP FRAMING PCM 30 MODE DCE CRC 4 YES MUX RxLVL 1 TERM BERT RS232 RXLVL 2 T
212. erminal or Mobile Equipment ME it becomes a Mobile Station MS Like the SIM the ME can also be identified using the International Mobile Equipment Identity IMEI While a subscriber roams or is stationary the Mobile Station transmits a radio signal to one of the many Base Transceiver Station BTS These rugged compact BTS cells are equipped with radio transceivers to send and receive signals using a radio link protocol via a Um interface The BTSs are in turn managed by a Base Station Controller Ch 7 GSM 7 1 BSC Using the A bis interface the BSC handles radio channel setup frequency hopping for security measures andhandovers In some instances a Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit TRAV is placed at a BTS to perform transcoding between 64 Kbps A law speech and 13 Kbps RPE LTP speech The TRAU may also be located at or in conjunction with the BSC The BSC then connects the Mobile Station to the Mobile Switching Center MSC using the A interface Using four registers the Mobile Switching Center MSC handles subscriber registration authentication location updates handovers andcall roaming The Home Location Register HLR is the central database for all subscribers holding identity of the subscriber services accessible to the subscriber and current location of the Mobile Station Given a Mobile Subscriber ISDN MSISDN num ber a call can be routed by looking up the corresponding IMSI found in the HLR The Visitors Location
213. ero constrained This pattern conforms to the ITU 0 153 technical standard However this pattern is not identical to 2e20 because different feedback mechanisms are used when the patterns are produced by means of shift registers 20ITU suppresses consecutive sequences of more than 18 ZEROS as opposed to 14 ZEROS in 2e20 2047 511 63 These are bit codes also known as 2e11 2e9 and 2e6 respectively They conform to ITU T 0 152 1111 The all 1s pattern is used for stress testing circuits If the pattern is sent unframed it will be interpreted as an AIS Alarm Indication Signal 1010 1010is the alternating ones and zeroes pattern The pattern is frame aligned with fP showing the location of the framing bit The pattern is 0101 0101 0000 0000 is the all zeroes pattern If the circuit is AMI the pattern synch and or signal will be lost 1 3 1 4 1 8 or 3 24 These patterns are used for stress testing circuits The patterns are frame aligned f is the framing bit as shown in its binary form as an example 1 3 f 010 FOX This pattern is used in data communications applications The ASCII translation of the pattern is the Quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog 1234567890 sentence The pattern is frame aligned to ensure proper ASCII translation of the bits It is recommended that the pattern be sent with framed signals otherwise ASCII translation is not possible Here is the pattern 2A 12 A2 04 8A AA
214. error You should see flashing red LEDs for both ERROR and BIT ERROR to indicate that a bit error has taken place You have injected an error from the datacom port through the multiplex to the E1 side Therefore you have verified proper multiplexing operation 7 If desired you may check the de multiplexing operation of the 2M multiplex a In TEST CONFIGURATION set Tx to E1 and set Rx to the datacom type you have selected above b Press the GRAPHIC key to verify that you are transmitting out the E1 port and receiving on the datacom port Ch 8 X 50 8 19 Figure 8 14 Testing a 2M MUX 8 Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green a Inject one bit error by pressing the ERR INJ key You should see flashing red LED for BIT ERROR indicating that one bit error has occurred b Press the HISTORY key to turn the blinking lights off You have injected an error from the E1 side through the multiplex to the datacom port Therefore you have verified the proper de multiplexing operation of the 2M multiplex 10 If more comprehensive testing is required you may wish to change the test patterns or other TEST CONFIGURATION settings such as XMTCLK 8 20 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 4 Test a 64Kbps X 50 Signal from a X 50 MUX Datacom Mode tests a single X 50 signal being received or sent to a X 50 MUX Use the following procedure 1 From the Main Menu enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS X 50 SETUP a At the to
215. ess RESTART F1 and a new measurement cycle will begin Ch 7 GSM 7 35 7 36 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Section 2 2 1 2 2 Section 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 Chapter 8 X 50 X 50 Technology Overview X 50 Byte Structure X 50 Framing Division 2 Framing Division 3 Framing X 50 Analysis X 50 Setup View X 50 Info X 50 Applications Testing a 64K X 50 Frame Multiplexing a 64K X 50 Frame Test a Multiplex Test a 64K X 50 Signal from X50 MUX SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 12 12 15 21 SunSet EO Version 2 37 Section 1 X 50 Technology Overview X 50 is an ITU T standard for sub rate data multiplexing It arose from the need to standardize a multiplexing scheme to be used on interworking data networks on international links In sub rate data multiplexing several low speed signals are combined inasingle 64 kbps circuit Sub rate multiplexing enables a service provider to splitthe bandwidth 64 Kbps into lower rate sections and thus pack several customer s data into one timeslot The Rec X 50 defines different framing structures distin guished by the length used The SunSet E10 supports two framing structures X 50 Division 2 and X 50 Division 3 1 1 X 50 Byte Structure The X 50 Division 2 amp 3 format is based on the 8 bit envelope as shown in Figure 8 1 Information Bits 2 3 4 5 6 7 Framing Bit Status Bit FE Figure 8 1 X 50 Byte St
216. essages are still passing but are updated only in memory not on the display RESUME F2 will update all the messages to their current state 2 1 2 C View Print Tracer View Print Tracer may be accessed through the A bis MONI TOR menu Tracer allows you to view and print specific data captured by the SunSet Upon entering a preliminary View Print screen appears stating the total numbers of records in the SunSet You may now specify which of these records you wish to view a Place the cursor on the FROM No item b Press the SHIFT key and enter in the desired numbers from the keypad c Press the SHIFT key again to deactivate the SHIFT lock and cursor down to TO No Use the same procedure to enter the desired number 7 16 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 d When you are satisfied with the viewing settings press VIEW F3 to begin viewing Figure 7 16 shows a sample VIEW display showing both Layer 2 and Layer 3 messages 04 59 18 RECEIVE MESG NO 1 LINE 1 99 01 04 05 05 55 370 I UI SAPI 00 TEI 2D NS 68 NR 69 MD Reserved MT 7A Reserved L2 C4 C3 F8 6E L3 00 5A DO D3 E5 7A 93 53 72 E 5C Cl 66 AO 1E DB PAGE UP PAGE DN DECODE Figure 7 16 A bis View Display If you have selected more than one record in the previous screen use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keysto view all the pages of records Figure 7 16 displays the message in hexadecimal code You may press DECODE F3 to decode the message contents for analy
217. et Rack Mount Permanent SS138 SunSet AC Adapter 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz input output 15 VDC 2A SS139 6 Cell NimH Battery Pack 7 2 VDC 1 8 Ahr SS210 Conversion Cable BNC m 75 ohm to 3 pin banana m 120 ohm 2m 12 14 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 S211 S212 S214 S217 218 219 SS220 55221 SS223 SS224 SS252 SS253 SS254 SS255 Cable BNC m 75 ohm to BNC m 75 ohm 2m Conversion Cable BNC m 75 ohm_ to Bantam 120 ohm 2m 3 ea Female to Female Adapter Plugs Changes 3 pin banana male to female Cable 1 6 5 6 mm m 75 ohm to 1 6 5 6 mm m 75 ohm 2m Conversion Cable 1 6 5 6 mm m 75 ohm to 3 pin m 120 ohm 2m Conversion Cable BNC m 75 ohm to BR2 120 ohm 2m Cable BNC m 75 ohm to 1 6 5 6 mm m 75 ohm 2m Cable 3 pin banana CF 120 ohm to 3 pin banana CF 120 ohm 2m Cable BR2 120 ohm to 3 pin banana 120 ohm 2m Conversion Cable BNC m 75 ohm to 3 pin banana CF female 120 ohm 35 cm V 35 DTE SS252T and DCE SS252C Interface Adapters DB37 to ISO 2593 34 pin connectors X 21 V 11 DTE SS253T and DCE SS253C Interface Adapters DB37 to ISO 4903 DB15 connectors RS232 V 24 DTE SS254T and DCE SS254C Interface Adapters DB37 to ISO 2110 DB25 connectors RS449 V 36 DTE SS255T and DCE SS255C Interface Adapters DB37 to ISO 4902 DB37 connectors Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 15 SS256 G 703 64 co directional to banana 3 pin Adapt
218. etting up alink with the other end by sending the SABME Sey Asynchronous Balanced Mode Extended command The SABME command initiates the resetting of a data link connectino In response to receiving SABME the data link layer entity sends a VA unnumbered Acknowledgement response UA con firms that the DAta Link Connection has been reset You should not Ch 6 ISDN 6 15 proceed any further until a UA message is sent or received After the connection has been reset the test set is now ready to receive transmit informatino l frames In Figure 6 8 this Receive Ready message is both sent and received by the test set A READY indicator will appear in reverse video at the top of the LCD screen to indicate the unit is ready to receive and place calls Caution Choose a 1010 or 1 8 test pattern before plugging your test set transmitter intot he ISDN line Transmitting any pseudorandom pattern toward an ISDN exchange may put the line out of service The initail Call Setup screen provides two F key options e Press STOP F1 to stop the ISDN messages This will bring you into the Message screen where you may a View other messages by pressing the NEXXT F2 or PREVIUS F3 keys b Press the RESTART F1 key to restart the messages e PressCALL F2 tobringupthesecond Call Setup scree shown in Figure 6 9 READY 11 08 47 RT LINK CALL SETUP CALLED No CALLER No CHANNEL CALL TYPE NSF CODE F
219. extended period of time Follow this procedure 1 In the Main Menu move the cursor to OTHER MEASURE MENTS press ENTER 2 Cursor to PULSE SHAPE ANALYSIS press ENTER 3 Cursor to VIEW LAST PULSE SHAPE press ENTER The last pulse shape will be displayed on the screen along with the same four F keys used in the START NEW ANALYSIS screen See the previous section for screen definitions Note Although datacom SS 7 ISDN GSM and X 50 Analyses are contained in the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu their menu descriptions along with technology overview and applications are covered in separate chapters Please refer to the following Chapters for each Chapter 5 SS 7 Analysis Chapter 6 ISDN Analysis Chapter 7 GSM Analysis Chapter 8 X 50 Chapter 9 Datacom 3 56 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 5 5 C Bit Analysis The C Bit Analysis option allows the user to send and receive C Bit frames To enter C Bit Analysis 1 From the MAIN MENU enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS 2 Select C BIT Analysis You may receive C bits on both Line 1 and Line 2 but you may transmit C bits on only one line This will be the line set for Tx INSERT inthe TEST CONFIGURATION menu Refer to Figure 3 38 C Bit Analysis 23 08 38 C bit SEND RECEIVE L1 Tx T s i TRANSMIT IDLE L1 Rx T S 01 L2 Rx T S 01 SEND bits 123456789012345 S10001000010001 RECEIVED LINE 1 S10001000010001 LINE 2 C BIT NOT FOUND NEXT PREVIUS Figure 3 38 C bit Analysis
220. f customer payment 4 The method of transmission The Direction of Transmission A simplex channel transmits data in only one direction A half duplex channel transmits in either direction however only one direction can be active at a time A full duplex channel can send data in both directions simultaneously The Number of Connected Devices A Point to Point circuit connects two devices For example a line connecting two modems is Point to Point A Point to Multipoint circuit can connect several different devices The Method of Payment In a Switched circuit a customer is charged for the setup duration and termination of the call Anormal telephone call uses a switched circuit A dedicated also called leased line maintains apermanent connection between two points The customer paysa fixed rate for this connection The Method of Transmission In asynchronous transmission data is coded into a series of pulses with a start and stop bit A start bit is sent by the sending modem to say that it is going to send a character It then sends the character and follows with a stop bit which states that the transfer is complete After transmission of the character the line can send the next character with start stop bits or can go into an idle state here it remains in the mark 1 position In synchronous transmission data is sent via a bit stream which sends groups of characters in a single stream Modems gather groups of characters into
221. g Info Field 5 5 Signalling Info Octet 5 5 SILENT PERIOD 3 70 SIM 7 1 SIO 5 5 SLIPS 3 34 SLS CODE 5 19 SNM Filtering 5 20 SNT Filtering 5 21 Heading Codes 5 22 Software 1 1 1 4 Software cartridge 3 125 Software Options 3 127 Software Version 3 127 Specifications 12 1 Speed dialing 3 74 entering a user number 3 74 SPs 5 1 SS 5 3 85 tracer sample 3 92 View Example 3 95 view print tracer 3 94 SS 5 Dialing 3 92 SS 5 Tracer 3 94 SS 7 5 1 Applications 5 30 configuration 5 10 Filter 5 11 ISDN user part 5 4 Layer 2 5 22 Menus 5 9 Message Types 5 5 Signalling Data Link 5 3 Signalling Link 5 3 Signalling Network 5 3 SU analysis 5 27 SU Monitor 5 11 Telephone user part 5 4 tracer 5 23 xvi Transaction capability application part 5 4 View Print Tracer 5 24 View Print tracer 5 24 SS 7 Analysis 5 9 SS 7 Network Architecture 5 1 SS 7 Protocol 5 2 SS 7 Technology Overview 5 1 SS7 GSM 7 6 SSN 7 24 SSP 5 1 Start Link Call Setup ISDN 6 15 Start Tracer ISDN 6 26 STATIST 7 19 Status Field 5 6 Stop Bit 3 125 STP 5 1 SU Analysis 5 27 SU Monitor 5 11 Subscriber Identity Module 7 1 Subsystem Number 7 24 Supervision Bits Programming 3 71 System parameters 3 121 T T S 16 AIS alarm 3 114 Talk Listen 4 21 TCAP 5 4 7 24 TCH 7 3 TCP IP 9 5 TDMA 7 3 Technical Standards 10 1 Technology Overview 10 1 TEI 6 4 6 14 6 20 7 12 TEI values 6 15 TERM 3 8 Terminal Endpoint Identifier 7 12 Terminal M
222. g between 2 PBXs connected in private digital networks DPNSS is specified in BTNR 188 As with DASS2 itis based on the first three layers of the ISO reference model The signalling is carried on timeslot 16 Since DPNSS was derived from DASS certain level three messages are common to both signalling systems However some messages do differ between the two Hence the Filter options will vary Ch 6 ISDN 6 9 2 0 ISDN Analysis Menu Features e Comprehensive analysis of the ISDN protocol with selectable standards ETSI Euro ISDN Aussi Austrailian ISDN DASS2 BTNR 188 and DPNSS BNTR 190 e The ISDN ANALYSIS menu may be accessed via the Other Measurements menu list e PCM 31 framing with or without CRC 4 is required to access the ISDN menus e Figure 6 6 displays the ISDN Analysis menu 06 07 56 ISDN PRIMARY RATE CONFIGURATION START LINK CALL SETUP SETUP FILTER START TRACER VIEW PRINT TRACER Figure 6 6 ISDN Primary Rate Menu 2 1 Configuration e Select several configuation items e Please refer to Figure 6 7 6 10 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 00 11 20 CONFIGURATION Q 931 STD Eee EMULATE TYPE TE Line 1 Tx T S 16 Line 2 Tx T S 16 B CHNL MODE i 1 30 TEST PATTERN 63 USER PATTERN 00001111 LAYER 2 SAPI 0 LAYER 2 TEI 0 DASS2 DPNSS AUSSIE Figure 6 7 ISDN Configuration 1 Q 931 STD Options ETSI F1 DPNSS F2 DASS2 F3 AUSSIE F4 The Q 931 specificati
223. gnalling link for reliable transfer of signalling messages between two points The Layer 2 filtering options are 1 BSN BIB Options BSN NONE F1 00 to 7F BIB NONE F1 0 F2 1 F3 Each message to be transmitted is numbered in sequence from Oto 127 For backward signal units this number takes the form of the BSN Backward Sequence Number When a backward mes sage has been received correctly the receiving terminal sends back the Backward Sequence Number and the Backward Indicator Bit BIB retains its present value If there is an error in this backward message the receiving terminal rejects this message sending back the BSN of the last correctly received signal as well as an inverted BIB e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number 2 FSN FIB Options FSN NONE F1 00 to 7F FIB NONE F1 0 F2 1 F3 Each number to be transmitted is numbered in sequence from Oto 127 For forward signal units this number takes the form of the 5 22 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 FSN Forward Sequence Number When a forward message has been received correctly the receiving terminal sends back the Forward Sequence Number and the Forward Indicator Bit FIB retains its present value Ifthereis an error in this forward message the receiving terminal rejects this message sending back the FSN of the last correctly received signal as well as an
224. h a total of 80 x 600 bps octets are displayed from 00 79 Therefore 80x6000 bps 48 kbps for a full X 50 frame Notice that four octets are chosen highlighted for the phase selected Phase 1 for Figure 8 8 The reason is that at Division 2 the default rate is set for 2400 bps 4 x 600 bps 2400 bps For Division 2 Nx600 F1 SEL appears in the OCTET slot and SEL F1 is shown below 8 8 SunSet E10 e Version 2 37 e Press the SEL F1 key to select specific octets within each phase e For Division 3 Nx2400 F1 SEL appears in the OCTET slot and SEL F1 is shown below e Press the SEL F1 key to select specific octets within each phase e A X 50 Division 3 screen will be displayed Figure 8 9 shows this screen As shown in Figure 8 9 there are five phases labelled P1 P5 Four octets are assigned to each phase Each octet or subrate channel has a bandwidth of 2400 bps Since there are five phases with four octets a total of twenty 2400 bps octets are displayed from 00 to 19 Therefore 20x2400 bps 48 kbps a full X 50 frame Notice that one octet should be highlighted upon entering this screen 16 36 33 X 50 DIVISION 3 PHASE RJ os PHASE 2 01061 PHASE 3 02 07 1 PHASE 4 03 08 PHASE 5 04 09 SELECT SEL ALL UN SEI Figure 8 9 X 50 Division 3 Select Screen e At Division 3 the default rate is set for 2400 bps for octet number one in the selected phase e To selecta specific octet in the ph
225. he PCM 30 or PCM 31 LED is lit green 6 Note that inthe VF MEASUREMENTS screen you may observe the received DATA FReQuency and LeVeL e Adjust the volume to the desired level by using the VOL UP and VOL DN keys note the indicator bar at the top right of the screen 7 Escape back to the VF CHANNE ACCESS menu a Enter the line item for the type of dialing you want to use We will use MFC as an example Enter the MFC SS 5 DIAL ANALY SIS item 4 24 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 8 Enter MFC DIALING MFC DIALING METHOD MF FRWRD SIGNALING AUTO NUMBER RX A B C D 1000 TX A B C D 10 0 12 14 SEIZE Figure 4 13 MFC Dial Screen a Configure as follows METHOD MF FRWD SIGNALLING AUTO NUMBER Enter the number you want to dial 9 Press enter to place the call a You will be able to talk and listen on the selected channel Note If you select MANUAL as your SIGNALLING you will first need to SEIZE F2 the line before placing the call When the call is completed be sure to press IDLE F1 to release the line 10 Press HANGUP F1 when you want to terminate the call Ch 4 Applications 4 25 2 11 Fractional E1 Testing Fractional E1 circuits are circuits of data rate Nx64 Kbps where N can be anywhere from 1 to 31 channels N channels of the E1 line are dedicated to the fractional E1 circuit and the remaining channels of the E1 line are either filled with an idle code other revenue traffic or fr
226. he SunSet E10 Serial Port Settings Configuring for Printing Using the Remote Control Advanced Applications In service Dual Drop and Insert Thru Testing a Terminal Multiplex Emulating a Terminal Multiplex Emulating an Add Drop Multiplex SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 41 41 44 49 SunSet E10 h Version 2 37 Section 1 Connecting the Cords WARNING Plugging into a live E1 circuit may cause a loss of service for multiple customers Be sure you are properly trained before proceeding WARNING To perform a BRIDGE access do not plug into the circuit until you have pre selected the BRIDGE Rx LVL The SunSet will not place isolation resistors on the line unless this Rx LVL is specified Figures 4 1 through 4 4 show the various ways in which to connect the SunSet to the circuit Ch 4 Applications 4 1 LNIWAINOAI LNIWAINOA Figure 4 1 Plugging In Monitor Mode SunSet E10 Version 2 37 4 2 Ce O O ANAINdI Figure 4 2 Plugging In Bridge Mode Ch 4 Applications 4 3 O 3 C Figure 4 3 Plugging in TERM Mode 4 4 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 1 RxLVL 1 2 TERM 2 Plug in the cords in the order shown RX RX EQUIPMENT EQUIPMENT
227. he upper left corner of the screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 75 12 Enter the phone number Press the keys to enter the following number 12345ABCD When you are finished press the SHIFT lock key to remove the SHIFT indicator 13 Press the ENTER key to accept the new USER DIAL NUM BER You will now see it displayed on the list of USER DIAL NUMBERs 14 If you wish to edit the number move the cursor down until the number is highlighted Choose EDIT F2 15 The cursor will now be on the first character of the LABEL a Choose INSERT F1 if you need to start inserting more digits at that position b Choose DELETE F2 if you need to remove one or more digits at that position c You can move your cursor to the right before using INSERT or DELETE d You may also toggle into the alphabet grid as described in steps 5 through 9 16 When you are done with the LABEL as described in step 15 be sure the SHIFT indicator is off and the letter on the alphabet grid has stopped blinking Then you can move the cursor down to the number a Choose INSERT F1 to start inserting more digits at that position b Choose DELETE F2 to remove one or more digits at that position c You can move your cursor to the right before using INSERT or DELETE d Press SHIFT lock to display the SHIFT indicator if you would like to enter different numbers 17 If you made a mistake while editing an existing user number press the ESCAPE key to
228. hichever item is highlighted by the cursor In Figure 5 20 this is Response CD e Figure 5 21 shows a bit by bit decode for a specific example 5 26 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 22 04 04 PONMLKJ THGFEDCBA 0000000011011000 no indication connect when free ordinary subscriber pass along amp SCCP avail no interworking encunt no end to end info ISUP not all teh way holding not requested terminating non ISDN w o income echo control no indication Return Figure 5 21 Layer 4 Decode The Layer 4 decode screen defines each bit After viewing press Return F4 to return to the message screen 2 3 SU Analysis You will find the SU Analysis selection in the main SS 7 menu e The SU Signalling unit Analysis screen shows the type number and statistics of SS7 messages e The SunSet captures all types of signaling units based on the specified filtering setup e The analysis breaks the messages into three basic types FISUs LSSUs and MSUs e MSU messages are divided into five types SNM SNT TUP ISUP and SCCP elin the Statistics screen retransmission FIB Forward Indicator Bit and BIB Backward Indicator Bit counts are also available e See Figures 5 22 5 23 and 5 24 Ch 5 SS 7 5 27 SS 7 ANALYSIS CONFIGURATION SU_MONITOR SU ANALYSIS Figure 5 22 SS7 Menu SU Analysis 23 02 22 SU ANALYSIS LINE 1 LINE 2 FISU 3771 FISU 0 LSSU 28 LSSU 0 MSU 18 MSU 0 TOTAL 3817 TOTAL 0 MSU MESSAGES
229. his fact and allow you to press the ENTER key to continue the process If you no longer wish to continue simply press the EXIT key 7 9 Memory Allocation This screen allows you to divide your buffer memory among certain options A sample screen is provided in Figure 3 84 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 119 O98 21356 MEMORY ALLOCATION SS 7 MEM SIZE 600 ISDN MEM SIZE 600 GSM Abis MEM SIZE 600 GSM A MEM SIZE BMJ Figure 3 84 MEMORY ALLOCATION e There are a total of 2400 blocks of memory space allocated for storing the SS 7 ISDN and GSM messages e Use the INCRS F1 to allocate more memory to one type of message buffer e Use the DECRS F2 to reduce the amount of buffer space e When you change one allotment the allotment for the next protocol in the list will correspondingly change for example increase ISDN by 100 and GSM Abis will decrease by 100 You may change each option individually as well e The minimum required buffer space is 100 The maximum possible buffer space for one type is 2100 Notice that after the memory allocation all the existing messages will be erased 3 120 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 8 System Parameters 19 37 03 SunSet E10 MAIN MENU TEST CONFIGURATION TEST PATTERN MEASUREMENT RESULTS OTHER MEASUREMENTS VF CHANNEL ACCESS OTHER FEATURES LANGUAGE SELECTION Figure 3 85 Main Menu System Parameters Figure 3 86 displays the System Parameters menu 05 28
230. ices to the STPs e B link Bridge links that connect one mated pair of STPs to the second mated pair eC link Cross links that connect a mated pair of STPs to each other e D link Down links that connect the RSTPs to the LSTPs e E link Extended links that connect the switching offices to the STP pairs other than its home pair e F link Links that connect one SP to another but neither SP is an STP Local STP Regional STP Figure 5 1 SS 7 Network 1 2 SS 7 Protocol The first three levels of the SS 7 protocol follow the OSI Open System Interconnect definition quite closely However due to the dedicated link nature of SS 7 many of the upper OSI layer functionalities were deemed redundant Figure 5 2 illustrates the correlation 5 2 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Application j 6 Presentation TCAP Session ad 4 Transport SCCP 3 Network 2 Data Link MTP 1 Physical Legend TUP Telephone User Part ISUP ISDN User Part MTP Message Transfer Part SCCP Signalling Connection Control Part TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part Figure 5 2 SS 7 and OSI Protocol Architecture MTP The MTP Message Transfer Part performs functions such as transmitting bits detecting and correcting errors and end to end routing The MTP layer is divided into three levels each of which provides a unique functionality e Level 1 Physical Level provides the physic
231. ified mask A common pulse mask is given by the ITU T G 703 recommendation Note Foran E1 pulse with 120 ohm impedance the signal level is either 3 volts for a binary 1 value or O volts for a binary 0 value with real world values typically be 10 Ideal Pulse Actual Pulse Figure 10 5 Pulse Shape 1 8 2 048 Mbps Framing E1 transmission utilizes two main types of framing Frame Alignment Signal FAS and MultiFrame Alignment Signal MFAS Framing is necessary so thatthe equipment receiving the E1 signal is able to identify and extract the individual channels PCM 31 uses FAS framing and PCM 30 uses MFAS framing with FAS framing Frame Alignment Signal FAS The 2 048 Mbps frame consists of 32 individual time slots numbered 0 31 As described previously each time slot consists of an individual 64 kbps channel of data PCM 31 uses FAS In the FAS format time slot 0 of every other frame is reserved for the frame alignment signal FAS pattern Alternate frames contain the FAS Distant Alarm indication bit and other bits reserved for National and International use Hence there are 31 time slots into which we can place data Refer to Figure 10 6 FAS Framing Format The FAS format does not accommodate voice channel signal Ch 10 Technology Overview 10 7 ling The first bit c or Si of these frames is reserved for international use It can be used for the CRC 4 Cyclic Redundancy Check 4 when enhan
232. igure 6 0 Start Link Call Setup Screen 2 6 16 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 Figure 6 9 shows a sample screen for the ETSI and AUSSIE standards The screen for DASS2 and DPNSS varies slightly DIAL METHOD replaces NSF CODE as the fourth item displayed The following items should be configured in the Call Setup screen 1 CALLED NO Options 22 digits Select the number you intend to dial to setup your call e Press the SHIFT key and enter the numbers directly from the keypad You may also use the F keys without the SHIFT key for and 2 CALLER NO Options 14 digits Select the number which the ISDN switch uses to identify you on the network e Press the SHIFT key and enter the numbers directly from the keypad You may also use the F keys without the SHIFT key for and e Specifiying a CALLER NO is optional 3 BCHANNEL Options 1 30 if you are in 1 30 B channel Mode ETSI DASS2 DPNSS or 1 15 17 31 B channel Mode AUSSIE Specify the B channel onto whihc you wish to place the call e Press the NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 keys to make the selection 4 CALL TYPE Options VOICE F1 DATA F2 Select the type of call to place e Choose VOICE to place and receive voice calls e Choose DATA calls to place anad receive data calls and to run a BERT 5 NSF CODE ETSI AUSSIE Optiosn 0 31 or NONE F3 Choose the Network Specific Facilities code Ch 6 ISDN 6 17 e Press the NEXT F1 PREVIUS F2 or
233. igured for DTE The Propagation Delay screen shown in Figure 9 10 displays the propagation delay on alooped back signal The circuit must be looped back at the far end in order for the test set to perform this measurement 9 16 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 PROPAGATION D DELAY 44 21 Figure 9 10 Propagation Delay The test set measures the number of unit intervals required for the signal to travel down the line and then return This number is translated into an exact number of microSeconds of round trip delay A UI Unit Interval equals the amount of time it takes to transmit one bit 488 uS for an E1 signal Use this procedure 1 From the MAIN MENU move the cursor to OTHER MEASURE MENTS press ENTER 2 Move the cursor to PROPAGATION DELAY press ENTER 3 The propagation delay measurement will automatically be performed then displayed e Use the RESTART F1 key to perform another propagation delay measurement if necessary Ch 9 Datacom 9 17 Section 3 Datacom Interface Pin outs The following figures on the next pages depict all the datacom interface pin outs The available interfaces are e V 35 ISO 2593 e G 703 Kbps co directional e RS 449 ISO 4902 e X 21 ISO 4903 e RS 232 ISO 2110 e RS 530 ISO 2110 CONNECTOR HDI 30 Pins 2 and 30 of HDI 30 are connected to pins 2 and 30 of DB 37 L 4 2 ll rn el CONNECTOR DB 37
234. ill also store the previous 60 days of histogram data with a resolution PERIOD of one hour 5 7 Propagation Delay e Measures the propagation delay of a looped back signal See Figure 3 43 e The set measures the number of unit intervals it takes for the signal to return A unit interval is the amount of time it takes to transmit one bit 488 nS for a E1 signal This number is translated into an exact number of microseconds of round trip delay MEAS 01 44 02 PROPAGATION DELAY Prop DELAY 44 UI 21 us Figure 3 43 Propagation Delay 3 64 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Section 6 VF Channel Access The VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu performs a variety of talk listen functions Do notattemptto enter the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu ifthe PCM 31 LED or the PCM 30 LED is not lit green Green LEDs indicate that the framing found on the received signal matches the framing selected in the TEST CONFIGURATION menu It is impossible to talk listen or perform other channelized functions in the absence of frame synchronization since channels can be identified only within a framed signal Refer to Figure 3 44 for the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu list 08 22 56 VE CHANNEL ACCESS VE MEASUREMENTS VIEW LINE 1 amp 2 CAS DIAL PARAMETERS DTMF MFR2 DP DIALING DTMF MF DP CAS ANALYSIS NOISE ANALYSIS MFC SS 5 DIAL ANALYSIS SIGNALLING EMULATOR Figure 3 44 VFCHANNEL ACCESS Menu Note
235. ill be Tx 2 T S if Line 2 has been selected as Tx INSERT in TEST CONFIGURATION Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 101 3 Rx 1 T S Options 1 15 17 31 from PCM 30 framing 1 31 for PCM 31 framing e Press NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2 to select the timeslot on which you will receive the signalling bits during emulation e Upon selecting the transmit timeslot the receive timeslot will automatically change to the same number e The Tx and Rx timeslots do not need to be the same e Note that this item will be Rx 2 T S if line 2 has been selected as Rx DROP in TEST CONFIGURATION Press ENTER to send your first transmit signalling bits and begin the emulation process Section 7 OTHER FEATURES Refer to Figure 3 75 for the OTHER FEATURES Menu OTHER FEATURES MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 MEAS CONFIGURATION 2 ERROR INJECTION OTHER PARAMETERS ALARM GENERATION VIEW TEST RECORD SEND FRAME WORDS LOAD SAMPLES MEMORY ALLOCATION Figure 3 75 OTHER FEATURES Menu 3 102 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 7 1 MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 As shownin Figure 3 76 the user may adjust several Measure ment Configuration items in this screen MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 MEAS DURATION OMmG START MANUAL PROG DATE YMD PROG TIME HMS CODE CONFIGUR MEASURE MODE BLOCK SIZE PRINT RESULT PRINT EVENT DISABLE TIMED CONTINU Figure 3 76 MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 Screen The following items are available Press the respective F key to cho
236. ine 1 Rx to the MON jack of Equipment 2 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off 14 Escape to the Main Menu a Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA b Verify that the Datacom s pattern is on the selected timeslots and that Equipment 1 s pattern is on the other timeslots 15 You have just verified the proper insert operation of the SunSet E10 Ch 4 Applications 4 53 4 54 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 Section 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 Section 3 3 1 Chapter 5 SS 7 SS 7 Technology Overview SS 7 Network Architecture SS 7 Protocol SS 7 Messages ISUP Message Example SS 7 Analysis Menus Configuration SU Monitor Setup Filter Start Tracer View Print Tracer SU Analysis SS 7 Applications Monitoring the Tx Rx Links of a Network SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 11 11 23 24 27 30 30 SunSet 4 Version 2 37 Section 1 SS 7 Technology Overview SS 7 CCS7 Signalling System Number 7 is acommon chan nel signalling system conceived to provide services such as inter processor transaction for call remote control maintenance net work management signalling as well as a reliable means for information transfer in the correct sequence without loss or duplication Anumber of applications are supported by SS 7 PSTN Public Switching Telephone Network ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network SCP Service C
237. ing 11 5 b Inject 3 errors from each set c Verify that both sets report 3 BIT errors 16 Remove all cables from the test sets a Configure the TEST CONFIGURATION for DATACOM G 703 CO DIR 64K INTERN b Connect an HDI 30 to DB 37 female interface cable to the set being tested c To this cable connect a DB37 male to 3 pin banana connector d Use two 3 pin Female to Female Adapter Plugs SS214 to short the IN and OUT banana plugs e The PAT SYNC LED should be green all other LED s should be off press the HISTORY key if necessary 17 Enter the MEASUREMENT RESULTS screen a Press the RESTART key b Inject 3 errors c Verify that 3 BIT errors are detected 18 Check each key to make sure it works 19 Return to the MAIN MENU a If you purchased a printer with the test set plug the printer into the test set press the SHIFT key to display the SHIFT indicator in the window then press the PRN SCRN key and observe the main menu being printed on the printer 20 The procedure is now complete Please contact Customer Service if you need additional assis tance 11 6 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 Section 3 Customer Service Sunrise Telecom Customer Service is available from 7 30 AM to 5 00 PM Pacific Standard Time California Customer Service performs the following functions Answers customer questions over the phone on such topics as product operation and repair Repairs malfunctioning SunSets pro
238. ing timeslots Auto ormanual To manually select the timeslots use the following procedure 1 Place cursor on desired timeslot by pressing the respective arrow keys then press the SELECT F2 key Repeat until you have selected all the necessary timeslots Selected timeslots remain highlighted as shown in Figure 3 3 a Press UN SEL F3 key to deselect a timeslot Pressing the CLR ALL F4 key erases all selections Press F4 if you wantto start the selection process over again To automatically select the timeslots use the following procedure 1 If you are receiving a signal which is already formatted in the N or M x64Kbps fractional E1 format the quickest method for selecting time slots is to press the AUTO F1 key a Press ENTER toset your choices and return to the MAIN MENU e In AUTO the SunSet will automatically configure the timeslots by looking for active data It will configure the transmit side to be the same as the active timeslots on the receive side The set determines which timeslots are active by first determining which timeslots are idle Any timeslot that is not idle is assumed to be active The set determines that a timeslot is idle when it finds the line s idle code specified in Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 7 the MAIN MENU OTHER FEATURES OTHER PARAM ETERS IDLE CHNL CODE If the SunSet does notfind this idle code it will also look for the 01111111 11111111 or 11010101 idle channel codes Note In
239. intended for use between the customer s equipment and an ISDN local exchange Therefore the two choices available iwth DASS2 are PBX F1 and ET F2 e Select PBX F1 to emaulate customer s equipment and plug into an ISDN exchange e Select ET to emulate an exchange to plug into a piece of customer equpement DPNSS was conceived to provide signaling between PBXs connected to a private digital network The two chioces available her are e PBXB F1 e PBX A F2 3 Line 1 Rx T s Optiosn 1 31 Select the desired Line 1 E1 timeslot on which to receive the ISDN signal The D channel is usually channel 16 6 12 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 e Use the F keys NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to make the selectinon 3 Line 2 RxT s Optiosn 1 31 Select the desired Line 2 E1 timeslot on which to receive the ISDN signal The D channel is usually channel 16 e Use the F keys NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to make the selectinon 5 BCHNL MODE No options ETSI DASS2 and DPNSS are set at 1 15 17 31 AUSSIE is set at 1 30 e In 1 30 B channel 16 is placed in timeslot 17 and B channel 30 is placed in timeslot 31 e In1 15 17 31 the 16 B channelis omitted in order to realign the channesl with timeslots Therefore B channel 17 is placed in timeslot 17 and B channel 31 is placed in teimslot 31 These two settings refer to two different concepts in B channel placement The D channel is usually placed in 7es or16 there fo
240. ion on a faulty regenerator 4 14 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 xL xd ao T ANANdINOA ANAINIdINOA INFNAINOF WNIAYAL TA Figure 4 10 Measuring Signal Level Ch 4 Applications 4 15 2 5 Run a Timed Test Many network tests require the use of an exacttime period such as 15 minutes 1 hour or 24 hours over which to conduct a test In this section you will configure the timer for one of these tests Use one of the following procedures 2 5 1 Manual Start 1 Use the desired procedure from Application 2 1 or 2 2 as the basis for your test 2 Inthe MAIN MENU move the cursor to the OTHER FEATURES menu item and press ENTER 3 Move the cursor to the MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 and press ENTER 4 Move the cursor to the MEAS DURATION menu item and press TIMED F1 5 Press the SHIFT lock key to display the SHIFT indicator in the upper left hand portion of the screen 6 Enter in the number of hours and minutes that you want the test to run a When you are satisfied that the entry is correct press ENTER Press the ESCAPE key until you have returned to the MAIN MENU 7 Proceed with the test procedure outlined in Application 2 1 or2 2 e When you perform the MEASUREMENT RESULTS the test will now be timed e You can see how much time is remaining by viewing the RT Remaining Time indicator in the uppe
241. ircuit 4 8 Monitoring the Transmit Receive Links of a SS 7 N 5 30 Multiplexing a 64K X 50 Frame onto one T S of a 2M 8 15 Observe Network Codes or Channel Data 4 17 Placing a Data Call ETSI amp Running a BERT 6 39 Placing a Voice Call 4 23 Point to Point Datacom Testing 9 23 Point to Point Datacom Testing 9 23 Printing from the SunSet E10 4 30 Send a Tone 4 22 Simple Talk Listen 4 21 SS 7 5 30 Test a 64Kbps X 50 Signal from a X 50 MUX 8 21 Test a Multiplex 8 18 Testing a 64K X 50 Frame Within a2 Mbps Signal 8 12 Testing a Terminal Multiplex 4 44 Testing the Datacom Port of a 2M Multiplex 9 26 Using the Battery and AC Charger 4 29 Using the Remote Control 4 35 ARQ 6 5 Arrow Keys 2 6 AS 3 33 ii ASCII 3 50 AUC 7 2 7 24 AUSSIE 6 11 AUTO key 3 3 3 5 Automatic Repeat Request 6 5 availability 3 31 B channel 6 17 B CHNL MODE 6 13 B link 5 2 B bit dialing 3 72 10 14 B channel 6 13 Backlight 2 4 3 123 Backward Indicator Bit 5 5 5 22 backward seizure 3 71 Backward Sequence Number 5 5 5 22 BAK SEIZE ACK 3 71 Bandwidth voice channel 10 2 bar graph 3 38 Base Station Controller 7 2 Base Transceiver Station 7 1 Basic Rate 6 1 Basic Rate Interface 6 1 BAttery 2 8 Battery 4 29 LOW BATT LED 2 9 Battery Charger 1 2 Baud 3 124 BBE 3 46 BER 3 34 BERT 3 15 BIB 5 5 5 6 5 7 BINARY 3 50 Binary Data 10 1 Bipolar Violation 10 4 Bipolar violations Code errors 3 34 BIT 3
242. irm that you have a READY indication atthe top right of the screen This indicates that Layer 2 handshaking has been established and the set is ready to handle calls Press CALL F2 Set up this screen as required eg CALLED NO Enter the number you want to call CALLER NO Enter the number of the line you are calling from optional B CHANNEL This is the B channel you plan to use to place your call Use the F1 and F2 keys to scroll through the B channels CALL TYPE DATA NSF CODE NONE d Press CALL F4 to place the call 10 To perform a BER teston the data call press BER F4 You will enter the RESULTS screen COINNE 00 16 31 RT CONTINU RATE 64K Rx BH 1 RESULTS Figure 6 22 BERT Results Ch 6 ISDN 6 41 Press STOP F1 tostop the test Press RESTART F1 tobegin anew BERT View any received bit errors Observe the B channel at the Tx B and Rx B items The test pattern is reported at the PATT line If you have a loopback in place you may want to inject errors with the ERR INJ key and verify that they return back to you Refer to Chapter 3 section 4 1 for definitions and descriptions of the measurement items seen in this screen Press SHIFT and PRN SCRN to send the results to the serial port for printing 6 42 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 Section 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Section 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 Section 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 Chapter 7
243. is UIC in a sequence of UIC frames The UIC frame conforms to the top framing format of Figure 5 FCS I C A It contains an Information Field up to 45 octets long that may carry higher level signalling information The UIR conveys an acknowl edgment that a particular UIC frame has been received correctly The control field contains a Receive Sequence Number which corresponds to the Send Sequence Number of the acknowledged UIC The UIR frame conforms to the bottom framing format of Figure 5 FCS C A It is lacking the Information Field A SABMR message may only be sent as a command frame Upon receiving a SABMR message the remote ET PBX resets its variables a variable is an operational value against which the sequence number or received UI frames are checked to determine the appropriate action and sends a UA as response Upon receiving the UA response the initial PBX ET resets its variables as well Figure 6 provides an illustration 6 8 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 step 1 ET PBX resets its variables step 2 UA er AN pex resets its variables Figure 6 SABMR UA Frames The UA message is transmitted only as a response frame It constitutes a reset acknowledgment signal and confirms that a reset signal SABMR has been received and acted upon 1 6 DPNSS Technology Digital Private Network Signalling System DPNSS was de rived from DASS to provide signallin
244. is is a count of the number of occurrences of PATtern 9 14 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Loss PATLS PATtern Loss Seconds indicates the number of seconds during which pattern was lost SLIPS This is a count of the number of seconds which have had bit slips MEAS 06 45 12 ET 0007 04 55 RT CONTINU TYPE V 35 MODE DCE TxHz 48k RxHz 48001 RCV SIL XMT 511 DL DLS 0 BIT RATE 0 0e 06 ES SES 00 000 SES SSES 00 000 EFS SEFS 100 AS SAS 100 UAS SUAS 00 000 DGRM SLIPS 0 PATL PATLS 0 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 9 8 Datacom Measurement Results pg 1 Ch 9 Datacom 9 15 ET 000 02 35 RT CONTINU TYPE RS232 MODE DCE SYN TxHz EXTERN RxHz 64k RCV PAT LOSS XMT 511 BLOCK ERRROR MEASUREMENT BLOCK SIZE 1000 of BLOCKS 68688 BLOCK ERRORS 0 BLK ERR RATE 0 0e 05 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP Figure 9 9 Datacom Measurement Results pg 2 Definitions specific to this screen are of BLOCKS This shows the total number of blocks received BLOCK ERROR Block error shows the number of blocks which contain any number of bit errors BLK ERR RATE The block error rate refers to the fraction of blocks in error the number of blocks received with 1 or more bit errors BLOCK ERROR divided by the total number of blocks received of BLOCKS 2 4 Other Measurements 2 4 1 Propagation Delay Propagation Delay is available for measuring when V 35 is the selected type The test set must be conf
245. ises of 26 TDMA frames as shown in Figure 7 2 GSM Framing Frames 0 11 TCH Frame 12 SACCH Frames 13 141 TCH Frame 25 Unused 26 frame multiframe Duration 120 ms TDMA Frame Duration 60 13 ms 3 3 8 25 TAIL DATABITS STEALING TRAINING STEALING DATABITS TAIL GUARD BITS BIT SEQUENCE BIT BITS BIT Normal Burst Duration 15 26 ms Figure 7 2 GSM Framing Traffic CHannels TCH used to carry speech and data repre sent frames 0 11 and 13 24 Frame 12 is occupied by the Slow Associated Control CHannel SACCH used for radio signal mea surement Frame 25 is set to idle Each TDMA frame consists of eight Burst Periods BP lasting approximately 0 577 ms A normal burst consists of two 57 bits of information 26 bits Training Sequence for equalization 1 stealing bit for each information block used for the Fast Associated Control CHannel FACCH for handover purposes 3 tail bits at each end and a 8 25 bit guard sequence In addition to TCHs there are Control Channels CCH framed ina51 TDMA format The following table lists the different types of CCH or common control channels and their functions Broadcast Control CHannel Downlinks info e g base BCCH station id frequency allo Ch 7 GSM 7 3 cation amp frequency hop ping sequences Fre quency Correction CHannel Synchronizes TS structure SCH RACH to GSM network Paging CHannel Downlinks alert signal to MS PCH for
246. ister starts sending the first forward signal e When the incoming register recognizes this signal it sends a backward signal which serves as acknowledgment e When the outgoing register recognizes this acknowledgment it stops sending the forward signal When the incoming register recognizes that this forward signal has stopped it stops sending its backward signal Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 85 When the outgoing register sees that this acknowledging signal has ceased it may begin sending the next forward signal Figure 3 60 shows the basic cycle of compelled signalling Outgoing register Incoming register Forward signal Acknowledging backward signal z Next forward signal Acknowledging backward signal are a Sending Receiving Figure 3 60 MFC Cycle Figure 3 61 shows the MFC Dialing screen 17312346 MFC DIALING METHOD MF FRWRD SIGNALING AUTO NUMBER RX A B C D 1000 TX A B C D 0011 A 10 0 11011 12 13 14 15 IDLE SEIZE Figure 3 61 MFC Dialing 3 86 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 MFC Dialing screen provides the following options 1 METHOD Options MF FRWD F1 MF BKWD F2 This item determines the mode direction of your calling e Press F1 to send forward signals e Press F2 to send backward signals 2 SIGNALLING Options AUTO F1 MANUAL F2 Forward dialing AUTO F1 mode e The test set automatically seizes the line by transmitting the FRWD SEI
247. ital Analog Digital West DTE West DCE East DCE East DTE RTS On HK Activate L CAR_DET __4 Carrier On CTS On Eastbound RTS On Carrier Present Both CAR_DET Carriers On Present Tx Data On Modulate Demodulatel Rx Data On Carrier Carrier Demodulat Modulate Rx Data On Cather Carrier Tx Data On Tx Data Off 4 Rx Data Off RTS Off _4 CTS On CAR_DET _ Off Figure 9 2 Full Duplex Call Procedure 1 6 Physical Layer Protocol As discussed in the ISDN Overview the data communication process involves protocol The OSI standard is commonly used Atthe upper layer protocol some frequently used standards are TCP IP HDLC and X 25 etc The physical level also has an extensive suite of standards available For the physical layer functions V 35 is the more dominant standard used internationally For discussion we will use a V 35 DB 34 pin connector to illustrate the physical layer functions Also for the purpose of Ch 9 Datacom 9 5 discussion DCE and DTE are represented by a modem and a computer respectively Figure 9 3 shows the pin assignment of a V 35 interface Here is a brief description of each pin function e Pin B Provides for grounding e Pins P S and R T The DTE transmits data on pins P S and receives data on pins R T This is reversed for the DCE Pins C and D The DTE can use RTS Request to Send on pin C and receives CTS Clear to Send on pin D from the DCE e
248. item b Select the GENERAL CONFIG item c Use the Down Arrow key to access the BAUD RATE setting Three selections are available 1200 F1 2400 F2 and 9600 F3 Ch 4 Applications e These settings determine the rate at which the SunSet transmits data characters to the printer e This setting must match the setting on your printer otherwise random characters will appear on your printout d Access the PARITY setting Three options are available here NONE F1 EVEN F2 and ODD F3 This setting must match with the configuration of your printer e Access the STOP BIT setting Two options are available 1 BIT F1 and 2 BIT F2 This setting must match with the configu ration of your printer Normally this is configured as 1 BIT f Access the BITS CHAR setting Two options are available 7 BIT F1 and 8 BIT F2 This setting must match with the configu ration of your printer Normally this is configured as 8 BIT g Access the CR LF INSRT setting Two options are available CR LF fora carriage return and a line feed or CR for a carriage return only This setting must be opposite the configuration of your printer 4 Set up printer s printing instructions inthe OTHER FEATURES MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 PRINT RESULT TIMED Choose TIMED F1 if you would like to have the printer print out results at a regular interval during a MEASURE MENT RESULTS e The default time is 1 minute e You may enter any interval bet
249. ithheld Reserved C Complete Incomplete Incoming Call Indication C Incoming Call In dication l Reserved Reserved Channel Seized Call Connected Network Indication Call Arrival Clear Indication Number Acknowledge Recall Rejection Subsequent Call Indication Subsequent Call C Indication Send Service Request Withhold Service Request Reserved 2 Message Types for Group 0010 End to End DPNSS and User to User DASS2 Ch 6 ISDN 6 23 2 a 0010 End to End Message DPNSS Type Message Type End to End Message C End to End Message I Single Channel Clear Request Message Single Channel Clear Indication Message End to End Recall Message C End to End Recall Message I NOOR WP 2 b 0010 User to User Message DASS2 Type Message Type PBX gt ET ET gt PBX 0 Swap Swap 1 Reserved Reserved 2 User to User Data C User to User Data C 3 User to User Data I User to User Data I 4 7 Reserved Reserved 3 Message Group 0100 3 a 0100 Link by link Group DPNSS Type Message Type Link by link Message C Link by link Message I Link by link Reject Message Swap Message Link Maintenance Message Link Maintenance RejectMessage 9 oV0PPD O 3 6 0100 Maintenance Message Group Type Message Type PBX gt ET ET gt PBX 0 2 Reserved Reserved 3 Maintenance Info Msg C MIM C 4 6 Reserved Reserved 6 24 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 6 SIC TYPE Options 0 7 NONE
250. k Downlink Directions 7 TIME ALGMNT e The default is no delay to the voice signal e You may change the delay time by pressing the F keys a Press INC 1 F2 to increment the delay by steps of 500us b Press DEC 1 F3 to decrement the delay by steps of 500us c Press INC 10 F4 to increment the delay by steps of 10 x 500us 8 RCV CBITS Observe the received C bits C bits are received on the same timeslot subchannel as se lected for transmit See Figure 7 28 7 32 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 9 PAUSE F1 At any time you may press the PAUSE key to freeze the display Press RESUME F1 to resume measurements 3 3 GSM 16k BERT This item allows you to observe the quality of transmission of aselected timeslot subchannel You will transmit atest pattern and observe the results See Figure 7 30 Configure the following items 02 12 59 GSM 16K BERT LINE NUMBER PHNH TIME SLOT 7 SUB CHANNEL 2 PATTERN 2047 ELAPSED TIME 000 08 37 RATE 0 0e 05 EFS 0 UAS 0 LINE 2 Figure 7 30 GSM 16K BERT 1 From the GSM VOICE TRAU BERT menu select GSM 16K BERT 2 LINE NUMBER Options LINE 1 LINE 2 e Press F2 to change the selected transmit line 3 TIME SLOT Select the transmit timeslot from 1 31 Ch 7 GSM 7 33 e The default is Timeslot 1 You may change the timeslot by pressing the F keys a Press INC 1 F2 to increase the timeslot number by one b Press DEC 1 F3 to decrease the timesl
251. k layer connection in multi frame mode o7 Release Request sent in BSC BTS direction to request the release 7 of a radio link layer connection in multi frame mode 08 Release Confirm sent in BTS BSC direction to confirm the release of radio link connection in multi frame mode 99 Release indication sentin BTS BSC direction to indicate the release of a radio link layer connection in multi frame mode 0A Unit Data Request sent in BSCE S direction to request the sending of a message in unacknowledged mode on a radio link layer connection in o indicate the reception of a message in unacknowldeged mode on a radio link layer connection Figure 7 11 RLL Message Types Common Channel Management Messages Hex Code Message Type 13 Channel Required sent in BTS BSC direction to indicate the reception of a Channel Request message from a MS 15 Paging Command sent in BSC BTS direction to request the paging of a MS 16 Immediate Assign Command sent in BSC BTS direction to request the transmission of an immediate assign message to the MS Figure 7 12 CC Message Types Ch 7 GSM 7 13 Dedicated Channel Management Messages Hex Code Message Type 21 Channel Activation sent in BSC BTS direction to activate a radio channel 22 Channel Activation Acknowledge sent in BTS BSC direction to indicate requested radio channel activation has been completed successfully 23 Channel Activation Negativ
252. l Indication is the transmit signal for DCE and the receive signal for DTE Note When the Test Mode is E1 MUX the test set always emulates Data Circuit Equipment DCE Thus CTS DSR and DCD will always be the transmit signals for E1 MUX Mode When the Test Mode is MUXTEST the test set always emulates Data Terminal Equipment DTE Thus RTS DTR RL and LL will always be the transmit signals for MUXTEST Mode When G 703 Type is chosen in the Test Configuration screen the Datacom Interface screen changes quite drastically The screen appears as in Figure 9 6 Figure 9 6 Datacom Interface G 703 Only the test rate may be changed All other items are for viewing only 9 12 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 1 TEST RATE Options 01x64K to 08x64K e Press the Nx64K F1 key to select the Test Rate of your G 703 co directional interface 01x64K 64K to 08x64K 512K 2 2 1 Datacom Timing The timing in Datacom Analysis is often a critical issue This feature allows the user to change the status the control leads and observe the response time of the system The user may also observe how long each datacom lead was active and in which state Refer to Figure 9 5 a Observe each lead and its On Off state indicated by the height of the graph line The arrowhead on the graph line indicates when the SunSet is capturing traces e The leads available to observe depend on your TYPE and
253. l 35 RCR Signalling Route Set Test Cluster Restricted Signal 45 RCT Signalling Route Set Congestion Test Signal 13 RSP Signalling Route Set Test Prohibited Signal 15 RSR Signalling Route Set Test Restricted Signal 25 TFA Transfer Allowed Signal 54 TFC Transfer Controlled Signal 23 TFP Transfer Prohibited Signal 14 TFR Transfer Restricted Signal 34 TRA Traffic RestartAllowedSignal 17 UPU User Part Unavailable Signal 1A Table 5 16 SNM Heading Codes The filtering options available for SNT are 1 SLS CODE Options NONE F1 0 to F e The Signalling Link Selection Code is a 4 bit long code Itis used where appropriate in load sharing e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 will increment decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number 2 HEAD CODE Options 00 to FF e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 will increment decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the Ch 5 SS 7 5 21 number e The Heading Codes for SNT are shown in Table 5 17 SLTA Signalling Link Test Acknowledgment SLTM Signalling Link Test Message Table 5 17 SNT Heading Codes e The layer 2 filtering options are shown atthe bottom of the screen e These options remain the same for each SI FIELD Layer 2 the Signalling Link Control Layer defines the functions and procedures for transmitting signalling information over one individual data link Layer 2 long with Layer 1 provides a si
254. lar condition for that LED is detected For example a continuous green light for PCM 30 indicates that the test set has detected PCM 30 framing receiving the MFAS 16 frame pattern as well as the basic FAS pattern A continuous red light denotes an alarm condition for the item For example the ERROR LED lights red if an error CRC or framing has been observed Blinking lights provide historical information for the circuit condition This is quite helpful if the user happened to be away from the set when the error or alarm condition occurred Pressing the HISTORY key stops the blinking Common LEDS POWER The POWER LED lights green when the SunSetis switched on and has an adequate power source LOW BATT The LOW BATT LED lights when the SunSet s power supply voltage has dropped to a low level Approximately 5 minutes after the LOW BATT LED lights the SunSet will automatically shut 2 8 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 down Plugging in the AC Battery Charger will allow you to use the SunSet indefinitely However if you plan to use the SunSet for an extended period of time it is best to plug the AC Battery Charger in first If the charger is plugged in while a measurement is in process and while the battery is not fully charged the SunSet may automatically reset itself In this case the current measurement results would be lost PAT SYNC The PATtern SYNChronization LED lights green if the unit has synchronized on a the same pattern
255. layers 2 amp 3 Protocol analysis User programmable trace filter C R bit time slot message group type code SIC type DA number View bi directional message flow Messages are translated into cleartext up to layer 3 orare displayed in hex format Trace storage holds up to 2100 messages Trace buffer view print and clear Call Setup Call Receiving Emulates PBX A or PBX B for DPNSS and PBX or ET for DASS2 Generates and receives voice calls Talk listen X 50 64 kbps TESTING SW255 Conforms to ITU T X 50 Division 2 and 3 Bit error rate testing with ITU T G 821 analysis Test rate Nx600bps N 1 to 8 within 64 kbps signal Hitless bi directional E1 64 kbps channel drop insert to multiport Standard or random selection of octets View and transmit housekeeping bits A to H and status S bit Programmable idle pattern BERT and IDLE S bit X 50 signall ABCD bits Bit or Frame Error Injection Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 7 Histogram analysis Modes Datacom 64 kbps X 50 Formatted signal Muxtest Test 2 048 Mbps 64 kbps multiplex MUX Emulate 2 048 Mbps 64 kbps multiplexed within X 50 format E1 Send Receive X 50 formatted channels inside 2 048 Mbps signal C bit FRAME TESTING SW257 Send and receive C bits 2 through 15 ESCAPE 2 MB loops loop 2 or loop 3 loop 2 instruction loop 3 instruction HDB3 command loop acknowledge not defined local fault remote line fault C frame loss spare spare spare Bit lev
256. lic Redundancy Check 5 5 Cyclic Redundancy Check Code 10 10 D Dlink 5 2 iii DA 6 25 DASS2 6 11 framing 6 8 Setup Filter 6 21 SIC 6 25 signalling 6 6 technology 6 5 DASS2 amp DPNSS call setup 6 35 DASS2 Frame Types 6 8 DASS2 Layer 2 6 6 Data Carrier Detect 9 6 Data Link Connection Identi fier 6 5 Data Networks 9 3 Data Rate 10 3 Data Set Ready 9 6 Data Terminal Ready 9 6 DATACOM 3 15 Equipment 9 1 G 703 Pin outs 9 21 Interface pins 9 6 9 18 Measurement Results 3 48 9 14 Other Measurements 9 16 Physical Layer Protocol 9 5 Point to Point Testing 9 23 RS 449 Pin outs 9 22 Technology 9 1 test configuration 9 7 Timing 9 13 V 35 Pin outs 9 18 X 21 Pin outs 9 20 Datacom Interface 9 10 Datacom testing 2 11 Date 3 122 DC jack 2 11 DC Message Types 7 14 DCD 9 6 DCM 7 19 dedicated channel 7 12 Defaults 3 127 Definitions Basic 10 1 Degraded Minutes 3 34 Destination Address 6 26 iv Destination Point Code 5 13 7 23 Destination Transaction ID 7 25 DGRM 3 34 Dial Parameters 3 70 DIAL PERIOD 3 70 DIAL PULSE 3 71 10 13 Dialing Technology 10 13 Division 2 8 6 8 8 Division 3 8 9 DL Datacom 9 14 DLCI 6 5 DLS Datacom 9 14 Down Arrow 2 6 DP 10 13 DPC 5 11 5 13 5 33 7 23 DPNSS 6 11 Setup Filter 6 21 SIC 6 25 technology 6 9 DSR 9 6 DTMF 10 13 DTMF MF DP CAS Analysis 3 80 DTMF MFR2 DP Dialing 3 72 DTR 9 6 Dual Drop amp Insert THRU mode 4 41 E E link 5 2 E BIT 3 116 Performance Monito
257. lling a loopback device is quicker and less labor intensive This may also be a self call Verify the span is not in service this ISDN call will disrupt service From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION Configure the settings as follows TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 TX RX DROP L1 RX TXSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING PCM 31 CRC 4 as needed TEST RATE 2 048M TXLVL 1 TERM RXLVL 2 TERM XMTCLOCK INTERN Note You must select PCM 31 framing for any ISDN application b When your settings are correct press ENTER Ch 6 ISDN 6 39 3 Escape to the Main Menu 4 Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS ISDN ANALYSIS 5 Enter CONFIGURATION a Configure the screen settings as follows Q 931 STD ETSI EMULATE TYPE TE Line 1 Rx T S 16 Line 2 Rx T S 16 BCHNL MODE 1 15 16 31 no choice TEST PATTERN 2047 is typically used to qualify ISDN lines you may also enter a USER pattern LAYER 2 SAPI 0 LAYER 2 TEI 0 6 zz Press ENTER when you are done 7 Connect the test set to the circuit in one of the ways shown in the next figure Case 1 Self Call Case 2 Looped Equipment gt Case 3 Point to Point amp mt Figure 6 21 Place a Data Call 6 40 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 8 Verify that you have green LEDs for L1 SIGNAL and PCM 31 Flashing red lights indicate a history condition Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking LEDs and turn them off 9 Enter START LINK CALL SETUP a Conf
258. lter allows the user to capture messages with a specific physical channel subchannel number 8 TM SLOT Options NONE F1 INC X F2 DEC X F3 1 10 50 F4 e Use the F keys to enter a value from 0 to 7 e 1 10 50 F4 sets the increment decrement value of the INC X F2 and INC X F3 keys e This filter enables you to capture messages using a specific time slot number e This filter corresponds to the first three bits of the second octet of the channel number information element 9 IMSI Options YES F1 NO F2 Choose whether to filter for messages containing the Interna tional Mobile Subscriber Identity information 2 1 2 B Start Tracer Start Tracer may be accessed through the A bis MONITOR menu It begins the trace process using the filter values specified in the SETUP FILTER screen The tracer display updates twice a second and can capture 50 messages per second Figure 7 15 depicts a sample Start Tracer screen Ch 7 GSM 7 15 04 53 25 TOTAL No 176 DISPLAY No 133 LINE 1 99 01 04 04 52 42 894 I UI SAPI 00 TEI 32 NS 42 NR 5 MD Reserved MT 78 Reserved 02 65 85 BE DE 78 87 2A 61 05 ED 4A E2 9F 91 OF OF EC 9A 8D 1E 30 DO 28 A8 AA IF 20 EE RESTART RESUME Figure 7 15 A bis Start Tracer You may choose between two function keys in this screen RESTART F1 Restart causes the SunSet to restart the trace process PAUSE RESUME F2 Pause freezes the display so that mes sages can be easily observed M
259. lume Ch 4 Applications 4 43 keys on the keypad To send and receive a tone a Press ESCAPE until you reach the MAIN MENU b Move the cursor down to the VF CHANNEL ACCESS menu item and press ENTER c Press ENTER on the VF MEASUREMENTS menu item d Use the NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to setup the receive and transmit channels correctly e Select the rest of the menu items as follows INSERT TYPE TONE TONE FREQ Hz pick desired tone frequency TONE LVL dbm pick desired tone level Tx 1 A B C D pick desired supervision bits LISTEN SIDE BOTH f You are now transmitting a tone on Line 2 You can also view the received Level and Frequency To test NX64 Kbps fractional E1 a First make sure the TEST RATE is set for NX64K in the TEST CONFIGURATION b Press ESCAPE to get to the MAIN MENU c Enter the MEASUREMENT RESULTS menu item and perform your acceptance test d Verify thatthe fractional E1 service performs to your company s requirements for the service delivered 3 2 Testing a Terminal Multiplex The SunSet E10 can perform an out of service through multi plex test Here is the procedure 1 Connect the SunSet E10 according to the Figure 4 21 MUXTEST Setup 4 44 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 Datacom Mux Test Mode MASTER Transmit out El port Receive from DATACOM El Side Timing 2 048 Mbps 64 Kbps Figure 4 21 MUXTEST Setup 2 Turn on the SunSet E10 Enter the
260. m 2 Press the SHIFT key and enter in the desired numbers from the 7 26 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 keypad 3 Press the SHIFT key again to deactivate the SHIFT lock and cursor down to TO No 4 Use the same procedure to enter the desired number 5 When you are satisfied with the viewing settings press VIEW F3 to begin viewing Figure 7 25 shows a sample VIEW display 07 04 23 A MAP INTERFACE CONFIGURATION SETUP FILTER START TRACER VIEW PRINT TRACER Figure 7 24 A Interface View Print Tracer Screen Ch 7 GSM 7 27 07 18 48 RECEIVE MESG NO 1 LINE 2 96 01 04 07 14 50 382 SCCP DPC 5B 82 0C 03 0C 82 42 79 4E AC 86 A2 02 46 F4 PAGE DN DECODE Figure 7 25 A Interface VIEW Display e If you have selected more than one record in the previous screen use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys to view all the pages of records e Figure 7 25 displays the message in hexadecimal code e You may press DECODE F3 to decode the message contents for analysis Section 3 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT To enter the GSM VOICE TRAU BERT menus 1 From the MAIN MENU enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS 2 Cursor to GSM VOICE TRAU BERT press enter You will be presented with the GSM VOICE TRAU BERT screen after the E10 takes afew seconds to configure See Figure 7 26 7 28 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 04 53 25 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT GSM MONITOR VOICE TRAU XMT GSM 16K BERT Figure 7 26 GSM VOICE TRAU BERT menu 3
261. map refuse map userAbort map providerAbort MAP operation decoded and error messages MAP Mobile Service Operations UpdateLocation CancelLocation PurgeMS Sendldentification PerformHandover PrepareHandover SendEndSignal ProcessAccessSignalling ForwardAccessSignalling PerformSubsequentHandover PrepareSubsequentHandover SendAuthentication Info CheckIMEI SendParameters InsertSubscriberData DeleteSubscriberData Reset ForwardCheckSS Indication RestoreData MAP Operation and Maintenance Operations ActivateTraceMode DeactivateTraceMode TraceSubscriberActivity NotelnternalHandover SendIMSI MAP Call Handling Operations SendRoutingInfo ProvideRoamingNumber MAP Supplementary Service Operations RegisterSS EraseSS ActivateSS DeactivateSS InterrogateSS ProcessUnstructuredSS Data ProcessUnstructuredSS Request UnstructuredSS Request UnstructuredSS Notify RegisterPassword GetPassword BeginSubscriberActivity MAP Short Message Service Operations SendRoutingInfoForSM ForwardSM ReportSM DeliveryStatus NoteSubscriberPresent Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 9 AlertServiceCentreWithoutResult AlertServiceCentre InformServiceCentre ReadyForSM MAP Errors SystemFailure DataMissing UnexpectedDataValue FacilityNotSupported UnknownSubscriber NumberChanged UnknownBaseStation UnknownMSC UnidentifiedSubscriber UnknownEquipment RoamingNotAllowed IllegalSubscriber IllegalEquipment BearerServiceNotProvisioned TeleserviceNotProvisioned InvalidTargetBasesta
262. mation e The bar graph indicates how fast the signal is slipping in relation tothe reference clock Inthe TEST CONFIGURATION RxDROP determines which line measurements are taken on The other not selected line is the reference clock For example if RxDROP is L1 Rx L1 willbe measured andthe reference clock will be derived from the L2 Rx signal e The reference clock may also be taken from the multiport e To change the source of the reference clock to the multiport a Enter the OTHER FEATURES menu b Enter OTHER PARAMETERS c Cursor to REFERENCE CLOCK d Press NORMAL F1 to use a line source press MLTIPRT F2 to use timing off of the multiport elt is important to know the source of the reference clock to meaningfully interpret your graph results e Note that the bar graph slips most rapidly atthe center position and then gradually slows down as the length of the bar increases e A count of the number of clock slips is kept at the end of the bar e At 256 clock slips the graph resets itself e One clock slip occurs when the measured frequency deviates from the reference frequency by one unitinterval A unitinterval 3 38 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 is equal to 488 nano seconds e The bar graphis only valid when both L1 Rx and L2 Rx have valid signals under NORMAL conditions If forexample L2 Rx has no signal it will show a NO LINE 2 REF SIGNAL and no graph will be shown If you are have chosen the multiport as the
263. me cases RR messages are mapped directly to the BTS Management BTSM protocol which handles major BTS functions such as paging At the Abis interface the Link Access Protocol D channel is used for transferring signalling through the data link The BSC uses the BTSM protocol and RRto control signals RR then gets mapped to the BSS Management Application Part BSSMAP Again at Layer 3 CM and MM pass transparently through the BSC with the BSC using the Direct Transfer Application Part DTAP to transfer both the CM and MM via the A interface Sending information through the A interface the BSC uses the Message Transfer Part MTP and the Signaling Connection Con trol Part SCCP of Signaling System 7 SS7 On top of the SCCP are the BSSMAP MM and CM Between MSCs the MTP of SS7 sends both ISUP and TUP messages dealing with circuit related information Also the MTP SCCP Transaction Capability Application Part TCAP are used by the SS7 Mobile Application Part MAP which transfer information such as authentication location security and handover proce dures for a MSC 7 6 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 1 4 TRAU Frames PCM frame TS O TS 1 TS 2 EEE TS 31 2 048 Mbps Control Bits User Data Control Bits Synchronization User Data 0000000000000000 C1 D Bits D C T Bits Bit 0 16 32 304 320 Control Bits C12 15 Frame indicators C1 C4 Frame type C16 Spare
264. ments 3 65 View FAS Words 3 50 xvii View MFAS words 3 52 SETUP Screen 8 5 View Received Data 3 49 Technology Overview 8 1 VIEW TEST RECORD 3 114 user test pattern 3 29 View X 50 Info 8 11 View X 50 Info 8 11 VIEW PRINT TRACER X 50 Test Patterns 3 28 GSM A MAP 7 26 X 50 Technology Overview View Print Tracer 8 1 ISDN 6 26 X 50 Analysis 8 4 VLR 7 2 7 24 XMT CLOCK 3 9 3 14 Voice bandwidth 10 2 INTERN 3 12 Voice frequency channel 4 MLTIPRT 3 13 19 VOICE TRAU XMT 7 30 VOL DN key 2 6 VOL UP key 2 6 Volume Vol Keys 2 6 Volume adjustment 2 6 WwW Warnings 2 1 3 8 3 119 4 1 4 41 4 42 6 16 warranty 4 29 warranty registration card 1 1 White Labels keys 2 3 X x 21 Datacom Interface 9 12 X 21 Pin outs 9 20 X 25 6 3 X 50 A H bits 8 10 Applications 8 12 BERT Pattern 3 29 Byte Structure 8 1 Configuration 8 5 Division 2 Framing 8 2 Division 3 Framing 8 2 Framing 8 2 IDLE PATRN 8 10 OCTET 8 7 PHASE 8 6 RATE 8 7 xviii SunSet E10 Version 2 37
265. menu e Move the cursor to the pattern and press ENTER Your new pattern is now being transmitted Editing a User Test Pattern Use this procedure to edit the label of a test pattern that you have 3 26 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 created 1 From the SEND TEST PATTERN menu press F1 USER to move into the USER TEST PATTERN screen 2 Move your cursor to the code that you want to edit and select EDIT F2 You will enter the LABEL screen as in Figure 3 18 3 When the cursor is placed on the Label code press TOGGLE F3 Aletter within the alphabet grid should be flashing on and off 4 Choose TOGGLE F3 to move out of the alphabet grid and back to the LABEL item Press the Left Arrow key until the cursor is over the letter you want to remove 5 Press DELETE F2 to remove the desired letter or number Repeat this as necessary 6 When all of the incorrect characters have been removed move the cursor to the right of the last character If the LABEL is now correct press ENTER and you are done e If you need to add letters to the label choose TOGGLE F3 to return to the alphabet grid with the flashing letter Cursor over to the desired letter and press SELECT F4 Repeat this until the LABEL is complete You can now press ENTER to record the new LABEL and return to the USER TEST PATTERN screen Or if you prefer you can press TOGGLE F3 to return to the LABEL line and continue entering or editing the pattern Correcting
266. mit e These alarms allow you to test the response of various network equipment to alarms and thus ensure that the network is performing as expected To invoke the desired alarm Move the cursor down to the respective item and choose ENABLE F1 e Note that some alarms conflict with the transmission of other alarms or selected framing e The test set will transmit the enabled alarm after you exit the ALARM GENERATION menu e You can continue to transmit alarms while making measurements viewing data performing talk listen etc e If you do not intend to transmit alarms when you exit this screen be sure to disable all the alarms first These are the choices 1 FAS DISTANT Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 e The test set transmits a 1 in every third bit of each timeslot 0 frame that does not contain frame alignment signal e FAS DISTANT alarm may be transmitted only with PCM 30 or PCM 31 framing 2 MFAS DISTANT Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 e The test set transmits a 1 in the sixth bit of each time slot 16 in the zero frame e The MFAS distant alarm may be transmitted only with PCM framing 3 AIS Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 e The test set transmits all ones in an unframed signal e This alarm overrides the framing choice in the TEST CONFIGU RATION menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 113 For instance even though you have selected MFAS framing generating an AIS alarm will cause the set to transmi
267. mit port of the noted line 1 or 2 Rx the receive port of the noted line HDB3 or AMI reports the transmitted coding type The test pattern is shown above the coding P15 2e15 in the sample figure TEST RATE is provided at the bottom of the screen if the unit is in a fractional setup reporting the fractional test rate BRiDGe TERM or MONitor is noted by each line Ch 2 Test Set Description 2 5 ERRINJ The ERRor INJect key is used to inject errors into the SunSet s transmitted signal Errors are injected according to the current settings in the OTHER FEATURES ERROR INJECTION menu If the error injection mode is set to rate an error inject indicator will appear on the top of the screen when you press this button AUTO AUTO lets the test set auto sync on the received line code frame and pattern and adjusts the set s transmit settings accordingly It may not be always possible to determine the line code of a circuit For instance an all 1s signal will mask the presence of HDB3 coding The test set reports HDB3 coding if it actually sees the code otherwise it reports AMI coding VOL UP The VOL UP key turns the speaker volume higher when the user is in the VF CHANNEL ACCESS ISDN PRI or GSM TRAU menus A small bar indicator will appear at the top right of the screen visually indicating changes VOL DN The VOL DN key turns the speaker volume lower when the user is in the VF CHANNEL ACCESS ISDN PRI or GSM TRAU menus
268. mming a burst of 10 CODE errors 1 From the MAIN MENU use the cursor keys to move the cursor to OTHER FEATURES and press ENTER 2 Inthe OTHER FEATURES menu cursor to ERROR INJECTION and press ENTER 3 Choose CODE F1 to select the error type 4 The cursor automatically moves downto MODE selection Press BURST F2 key 5 The cursor automatically moves down to COUNT Press the SHIFT lock key once to display the SHIFT indicator 6 Press the 1 key followed by 0 key The COUNT should show 10 7 Press ENTER you have just programmed the set to inject 10 CODE errors each time you press the ERR INJ key Programming a 10 Bit Error Rate Use this procedure to program a 10 error rate 1 From the MAIN MENU cursor to OTHER FEATURES and press ENTER 2 In the OTHER FEATURES menu move the cursor to ERROR INJECTION and press ENTER Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 109 3 Choose BIT F2 to select the error type 4 The cursor automatically moves down to MODE selection Choose RATE F1 5 The cursor automatically moves down to RATE Press the SHIFT lock key once Verify that the SHIFT indicator is shown onthe upper left corner of the screen Your key pad now allows you to enter the numeric number 6 Press the 1 key once The multiplier position is showing 1 The cursor moves to the exponent position 7 Press the 6 key once A 6 is entered a Press SHIFT key to remove the SHIFT lock indicator 8 Press
269. mmonly used interface but RS232 RS449 X 21 and G 703 may also be selected in the Test Configuration setup The DATACOM INTERFACE screen displays the Mode and Type selected in Test Configuration as well as the received signals Italso allows you to turn on off the transmit signals Refer 9 10 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 to Figure 9 5 MEAS DATACOM INTERFACE TYPE RS232 22 36 15 DTE DTR ON LL ON FREEZE TABLE Figure 9 5 Datacom Interface Screen Graph Signals available inthisscreen depend on the selectedMODE and TYPE For example when the Mode is setto DTE as in Figure 9 5 the test set emulates Data Terminal Equipment e For DCE in V 35 RS449 and RS232 the available transmit signals to set are CTS Clear To Send DSR Data Set Ready DCD Data Carrier Detect For DCE in V 35 RS449 and RS232 the received signals available to monitor are RTS Ready To Send DTR Data Terminal Ready RL Remote Loopback LL Local Loopback e For V 35 RS449 and RS232 when the Mode is set to DTE the test set emulates Data Terminal Equipment The receive and transmit signals are reversed CTS DSR and DCD are now the receive signals to monitor Ch 9 Datacom 9 11 RTS DTR RL and LL may be set for transmitting For X 21 the transmit and receive signals change e Signal C Control is used as the receive signal for DCE Mode and as the transmit signal for DTE Mode e Signa
270. modes e An all ones pattern in RxLVL TERM and BRIDGE provides the most accurate results e MONITOR may be the most convenient mode e TERM will also disrupt service e A BRIDGE measurement result may be degraded by a low quality termination at the network element terminating the E1 line e A MONITOR measurement should generally show a result of about 20 dB or 30 dB The rest of this procedure will use the TERM mode for illustrative purposes Verify that the span is not in service Using the TERM method described here will disrupt service 2 Switch on the SunSet Press the ENTER key to move to the main menu Enter the TEST CONFIGURATION menu and set the parameters as follows TEST MODE E1 TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TxSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the circuit design CRC 4 as specified by the circuit design TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMT CLOCK INTERN a Press ENTER to return to the main menu Ch 4 Applications 4 13 3 Plug the set into the circuit as shown in Figure 4 10 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking history lights and turn them off 4 Move the cursor to the MEASUREMENT RESULTS menu item and press ENTER 5 Press the PAGE DN F2 key until you move to the LINE 1 SIG ALM screen a Read the signal level Note that separate readings are given for the positive and negative signals so that you can get more accurate informat
271. mptly Provides information about product upgrades The warranty period covering the SunSet E10is 1 yearfrom the date of shipment Please see the Warranty at the end of this manual A Return Merchandise Authorization RMA number is required before any product may be shipped to Sunrise Telecom for warranty repair All SunSets are burn in tested for 24 hours after repair All repairs are warranted for 90 days Out of warranty repairs require both an RMA and a Purchase Order before the unit is returned Please contact Customer Service if you need additional assis tance Customer Service Sunrise Telecom Incorporated 22 Great Oaks Blvd San Jose CA 95119 U S A Tel 408 363 8000 or 1 800 701 5208 Fax 408 363 8313 Email support sunrisetelecom com web http www sunrisetelecom com Ch 11 Troubleshooting 11 7 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 Chapter 12 Specs amp Configs Section1 Specifications 1 Section 2 Configurations 12 SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 SunSet E10 h Version 2 37 Section 1 Specifications CONNECTORS PORTS 2 048 Mbps Bi directional E1 interfaces Line 1 Tx Line 1 Rx Line 2 Tx Line 2 Rx 75 ohm unbalanced BNC f 75 ohm optional Replaces BNC with 1 6 5 6 mm f 120 ohm optional Replaces BNC with BR2 f balanced Serial port 8 DIN RS232C V 24 DTE Datacom interface 30 pin HDI High Density Interface connector optional DC input for charging internal battery STATUS ALARM INDICATORS
272. n 2 Move your cursor down to a blank position on the user pattern list 3 Choose CREATE F1 Youwillenterthe USERTEST PATTERN Label screen with the cursor atthe LABEL position See Figure 3 18 4 Choose TOGGLE F3 The letter A will begin to flash on and off in the alphabet grid 5 Use the arrow keys to move the flashing indicator to the desired letter a Choose SELECT F4 The letter appears next to the label 6 Choose TOGGLE F3 to move out of the alphabet grid and back to the LABEL item Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 25 17 03 38 USER TEST PATTERN LABEL AF FORMAT BINARY No 001 INSERT DELETE TOGGLE SELECT Figure 3 18 User Test Pattern Label Screen 7 Press the Down Arrow key to move to the FORMAT item a Choose BINARY F1 or HEX F2 e The binary input is often simpler for entering short patterns e Valid entries are 1 and 0 for binary For HEX mode valid entries are 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 8 Press the Down Arrow key to move to the pattern entry area a Press the SHIFT lock key You may enter up to 2048 binary characters or 512 hexadeci mal characters to make up the desired pattern b Press the SHIFT lock key once e Verify that the SHIFT indicator no longer appears in the upper left corner of the screen 9 Press the ENTER key to store the pattern and to return to the USER TEST PATTERN screen e Your new code will now be displayed for you in the
273. n the line e When the messages indicate that the test set is communicating with the switch correctly messages stop flashing press the CALL F2 key to begin dialing the CALLED number e Ifyou are satisfied with your call after it has connected with the switch you will see a reverse video CONNI message at the top of the screen you may press DISC 1 or DISC 2 F key as appropriate to disconnect hang up and release the line 6 18 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 e While you are connected you may talk listed on the line to ensure that it is working properly e Press STOP F1 to stop sending and receiving ISDN mes sages a When this has been selected NEXT F2 and PREVIUS F3 as wellas RESTART F1 options will appear b Use these to scroll through the various messages which you have just captured on the D channel 2 3 Setup Filter e Select parameters for filtering ISDN messages e These parameters will be used during ISDN trace procedures e This screen varies depending on the Q 931 standard chosen in CONFIGURATION 2 3 1 Setup Filter for ETSI The Setup Filter screen appears in Figure 6 10 Select ON F1 to use filters Select OFF F2 to not filter messages 00222825 D CHANNEL FILTER FILTER ON Layer 2 SAPI 0 Layer 2 TEI BONES FILTER TYPE CALLER NUMBER 4083638000 NEXT PREVIUS NONE Figure 6 10 D channel Filter ETSI You should select the following filter items once FILTER is set to ON 1
274. n detected at the local end 1 2 2 Division 3 Framing The X 50 division 3 frame consists of 20 8 bit envelopes Each of the 20 frame positions carries 2 4 kbps of user data The framing position of the first 8 bit envelope is used to convey distant alarm indications indicating an absence of incoming pulses or a loss of 8 2 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 frame alignment detected at the local end oo N DW A UNE ODO e e A OU N e Nn 9 o wn O position of a9 6 Kbps call Figure 8 3 X 50 Division 3 Frame Sub rate calls are multiplexed within the 64 kbps bearer by Ch 8 X 50 8 3 specifying the frame position they will occupy in the envelope A9 6 kbps call could occupy four positions in the frame As with Division 2 a 9 6 data rate call repeats every 5th 8 bit envelope Figure 8 3 shows the positions occupied by a 9 6 kbps call in the D3 frame Section 2 X 50 Analysis To enter the X 50 menu 1 From the MAIN MENU enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS 2 Enter X 50 Analysis 01525425 OTHER MEASUREMENTS VIEW RECEIVED DATA VIEW FAS WORDS VIEW MFAS WORDS PULSE MASK ANALYSIS SS 7 ANALYSIS ISDN ANALYSIS GSM ANALYSIS GSM VOICE TRAU BERT C BIT ANALYSIS HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS PROPAGATION DELAY Figure 8 4 Other Measurements X 50 Analysis 8 4 Sunset E10 Version 2 37 X 50 ANALYSIS X 50 SETUP VIEW X 50 INFO Figure 8 5 X 50 Analysis scr
275. n terms and your everyday equipment Analog Facilities MSB bce Z oce _ gt Terminal Telephone Modem Modem Figure 9 1 Data Communication Facilities 1 3 Transmission Basics The communications medium is composed of a primary channel and a secondary channel A secondary channel is not always present in modems A channel has the capacity to transfer data in either direction each channel actually has two signals one foreach direction When both directions can be active simultaneously then the channel is called full duplex When only one direction can be active at atime the channel is half duplex The channel s capacity is equal to the number of bits per second it cancarry The secondary channel s capacity is always less than that of the primary channel Another associated concept is that of carrier A carrier is a continuous sine wave signal that passes over the medium This is the actual pipeline that allows the data to travel from DCE to DCE The presence of carrier does not necessarily mean that there is data transfer In order to send data from DCE to DCE the data must be modulated 9 2 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 1 4 Data Networks Here is a brief introduction to the various options available in data networks Circuits can differ in the following ways 1 The direction of transmission 2 The number of devices that are connected to the network 3 The method o
276. nal from X 50 M 8 22 8 14 Testing a2M MUX 8 20 9 01 Data Communication Facilities 9 2 9 02 Full Duplex Call Procedure 9 5 9 03 V 35 DB 34 Interface 9 6 9 04 DATACOM Mode 9 7 9 05 Datacom Interface Screen Graph 9 11 9 06 Datacom Interface G 703 9 12 9 07 Datacom Interface Table 9 14 9 08 Datacom Measure ment Results pg 1 9 15 9 09 Datacom Measure ment Results pg 2 9 16 9 10 Propagation Delay 9 17 9 11 V 35 Pin out Diagram 9 18 9 12 RS 232 Pin outs 9 19 9 13 X 21 Pin outs 9 20 X 9 14 G 703 Pin outs 9 21 9 15 RS 449 Pin outs 9 22 9 16 RS530 Pin outs Diagram 9 23 9 17 V 35 Datacom Test 9 25 9 18 Testing the Datacom Port of a2M Mu 9 27 10 01 Converting a Voice Signal 10 2 10 02 AMI Line Coding 10 4 10 3 HDB3 Line Coding 10 5 10 04 HDB3 Encoding 10 6 10 05 Pulse Shape 10 7 10 06 FAS Framing Format 10 9 10 07 MFAS Framing Format 10 10 10 08 CRC 4 Multiframe Format 10 11 10 09 E bit Performance Monitoring In ser 10 12 10 10 Local Loop and Interoffice Signalling 10 13 10 11 DTMF Frequency Key Pad 10 13 Fill in Signal Unit 5 6 Filter A interface 7 22 ISDN 6 19 SS 7 5 11 FISU 5 23 Forward Indicator Bit 5 5 5 23 forward seizure 3 71 Forward Sequence Number 5 5 5 23 FOX 3 23 Fractional E1 4 26 Testing 4 26 Frame Alignment Signal 3 SunSet E10 o Version 2 37 51 10 7 Frame Alignment Signal Errors 3 35 Frame Error 3 35 Frame Words Send frame words 3 115 FRAMING 3 5 10 7
277. nd adapter package Includes 1 each of SS306 SS252 SS253 SS254 SS255 amp SS256 Software Options SW100 Remote Control Includes printer cable SS115B and null modem adapter SS122A VT 100 102 terminal emulation required SW251 MFR2 DTMF DP Dialing amp Analysis SW252 VF Noise Measurements SW253 SS7 Analysis SW254 ISDN PRI Analysis amp Call Setup SW255 X 50 64Kbps Testing SW257 C bit Frame Testing SW258A GSM A amp Abis Analysis SW258B GSM MAP B G Interface Analysis SW258A required SW258C GSM Voice and TRAU Access SW259 MFC SS 5 Analysis amp Call Set Up SW260 DPNSS DASS2 Analysis amp Call Set Up SW254 required SW261 Signalling Emulation SW2502 2 Mb Software Replacement Cartridge Ch 12 Specs amp Configs 12 13 ACCESSORIES SS101 Carrying Case SS104B Cigarette Lighter Battery Charger SS107 Cable Dual Bantam to Dual Bantam 2m SS108 Cable Single Bantam to Single 310 2m SS109 Cable Single Bantam to Probe Clip 8 2m SS112 Cable Dual Bantam to RJ 48 m 2m SS115B DIN 8 to DB 9 Printer Cable SS116 Instrument Stand S1117A Printer Paper 5 rolls for SS118B C SS118B High Capacity Thermal Printer Includes cable SS115B and 110 VAC charger SS118C High Capacity Thermal Printer Includes cable SS115B and 220 VAC charger SS122A Null Modem Adapter DCE to DCE DB9 conversion Included with SW100 SS123 SunSet Jacket SS130A 19 23 SunSet Rack Mount Removable SS130B 19 23 SunS
278. not warrant or represent that all software defects will be corrected In any case where COMPANY has licensed a software product AS IS COMPANY S obligation will be limited to replacing an inaccurate copy of the original material This warranty does not cover upgrade or enhancements to product software and firmware C Period The warranty period for Hardware Software and Firmware will be One 1 Year from date of shipment to CUSTOMER The COMPANY may also sell warranty exten sions or provide a warranty term of three years with the original sale which provide a longer coverage period for the test set chassis software and firmware in which case the terms of the express limited warranty will apply to said specified warranty term Warranty w i D Onlyfor CUSTOMER COMPANY makes this warranty only for the benefit of CUSTOMER and not for the benefit of any subsequent purchaser or licensee of any merchandise E LIMITATION ON WARRANTY THIS CONSTITUTES THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY MADE BY COMPANY WITH RESPECT TO HARDWARE SOFTWARE AND FIRM WARE THERE ARE NOOTHERWARRANTIES EXPRESSOR IMPLIED COMPANY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IM PLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE COMPANY S LIABILITY UNDERTHIS AGREEMENT WITH RESPECT TOAPRODUCT INCLUDING COMPANY S LIABILITY FOR FAILURE AFTER REPEATED EFFORTS TO INSTALL EQUIPMENT IN GOOD WORKING ORDER OR TO REPAIR OR REPLACE EQUIP MENT SHALL IN N
279. nsmitting out of the datacom port and receiving on the E1 side 7 Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is green a Inject one bit error by pressing the ERR INJ key once You should now see the flashing red LEDs for both ERROR and BIT ERROR indicating one bit error has occurred b Press the HISTORY key to stop the blinking 8 If more comprehensive tests are required you may wish to change the test patterns and other settings in TEST CONFIGU RATION such as XMT CLK 3 3 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex In the E1 MUX Mode the SunSet E10 emulates a 64Kbps to 2Mbps multiplexer Use the following procedure to multiplex one 64Kbps signal onto a 2Mbps signal 1 From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION a Select E1 MUX for Test Mode b Configure the rest as follows E1 Tx INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 RX FRAMING As specified by the span design 4 46 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 CRC 4 As specified by the span design RxLVL 1 TERM RxLVL 2 TERM XMTCLK L1 RX DATACOM TYPE Select the datacom interface type that will provide the 64Kbps frame TxSRC EIDRP MODE this is set as DCE MUX BERT EIDRP E1INS The datacom TYPE selected above i e RS232 E1T S Select the 64Kbps timeslot to be multiplexed from the datacom to the E1 side See step 3 2 The last setup item in the TEST CONFIGURATION screen is E1T S In this line you select the 64Kbps timeslot to be multiplexed a Press Nx64K F1 to enter the SELECT
280. nue erasing PRINT F2 Press PRINT to print the buffer contents VIEW F3 Press VIEW to view all the contents or the specified records of the buffer Pressing VIEW will bring up the first record An example is given in Figure 3 64 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 91 16 01 23 96 01 08 56 46 CD 1001 INIT N 96 01 08 56 46 CD 0000 INIT N 96 01 08 56 4 CD 1010 00 00 INE 1 96 01 08 BCD 1000 00 28 PAGE UP PAGE DN Figure 3 64 MF CAS View Tracer Use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys to view all the pages of data 6 7 4 SS 5 Dialing e Perform SS 5 dialing in the forward direction e Reverse direction signalling is not provided Refer to Figure 3 65 To see a description of how SS 5 signalling works enter the VIEW MFC SS5 EXAMPLE and press F2 Note the tracer decodes the actual signalling signal in a more simplified fashion 3 92 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 SS 5 DIALING DIAL NUMBER A KP1 B KP2 C ST D CODE 11 E CODE 12 Figure 3 65 SS 5 Dialing To enter the number for dialing 1 Press release the SHIFT key 2 Enter numbers 0 9 and letters A E from the keypad As shown in Figure 3 65 each letter represents a SS 5 signal defined in ITU Q 140 These signals are defined as KP1 A terminal start of pulsing signal KP2 B transit start of pulsing signal ST C end of pulsing signal Code 11 D code 11 Access to incoming operator Code 12 E code 12 Access to
281. o the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu and enter ISDN ANALYSIS Enter CONFIGURATIONS and select your settings according to the circuit e Refer to section 2 1 of this chapter for a description of each of the choices 6 Escape back to the ISDN menu and enter SETUP FILTER a Set up the D channel filter as desired b lt e Refer to section 2 3 of this chapter for further details Once you have finished setting up the filters press the ENTER key to return to the ISDN menu 7 Cursor down to START TRACER and press ENTER a View both Line 1 and Line 2 ISDN messages sent and received if a call is placed on the other end 6 38 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 8 a b c Press the PAUSE F2 key to view a message Escape out and enter VIEW PRINT TRACER View all ofthe messages or select a limited number in the FROM and TO lines Press VIEW F3 to begin viewing the messages Press PRINT F2 to print the messages When viewing the messages use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys to view allthe pages 4 4 Placing a Data Call ETSI amp Running a BERT This outlines the procedure for placing an ISDN datacallata64k rate You can perform a data call two ways 1 lt 2 a Point to Point call another piece of test equipment which is also TE Make sure both test sets are transmitting the same pattern Loopback call a loopback device which will loop your transmit ted test pattern back to you Ca
282. observe the changes which have occurred over time Use this procedure 1 This test may be performed while the span is carrying live customer traffic if either a BRIDGE or MONITOR access mode is used The test can also be performed out of service if the TERM mode is used 2 Move to the MAIN MENU by pressing the ENTER key Enterthe TEST CONFIGURATION menu and specify MONITOR or BRIDGE mode if the circuit is carrying live traffic Specify the other settings as desired The SunSet must detect valid framing on the received signal 3 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as shown in Figure 4 6 or 4 7 a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge the blinking history lights and turn them off 4 Press ESCAPE to arrive at the MAIN MENU 5 Move your cursor to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu item and press the ENTER key 4 18 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 6 Enter the VIEW RECEIVED DATA menu item and press the ENTER key You will now receive a live display of the E1 data Note that valid framing is required in order to enter the VIEW RECEIVED DATA menu item 7 Review the live data as it is displayed a When the codes that you are interested in appear press the PAUSE key F3 to trap 64 pages of data b Press PAGE DN F2 to scroll through the data The data is presented as it appears in the E1 bit stream The data is broken out into timeslots for you e Note the presence of control information in time slot 00 for FAS framing andthe presen
283. om transmission They appear in the menu if RS232 Type DCE ASY DTE ASY Mode is selected 5 BIT CHAR Options 6 F1 7 F2 8 F3 Determines how many bits will be transmitted for each character of information Ch 9 Datacom 9 9 6 STOP BITS Options 1 F1 2 F2 Determines how many stop bits will be transmitted for each character of information A stop bit signifies the end of a byte 7 PARITY Options EVEN F1 ODD F2 NONE F3 Determines how many parity bits are transmitted for each character of information e Parity is a method of checking the accuracy of transmitted or stored data An extra bit known as a parity bit is added to the data as an accuracy check e In Odd Parity F2 the total number of ones including the added parity bit is odd e In Even Parity F1 the total number of ones including the added parity bit is even e None F3 signifies no parity checking The receiving element checks the parity bit and indicates an error if the total number of ones does not add up to the correct total 2 2 Datacom Interface When you have selected E1 MUX MUXTEST or DATACOM Mode in TEST CONFIGURATION the DATACOM INTERFACE menu item appears in the Main Menu e Datacom testing allows the SunSet E10 to send and receive signals with another datacom communication equipment ele ment e Datacom uses a standard interface in order for two equipment elements to communicate with each other V 35 is aco
284. on indicates whihc type of ISDN switch you intend to use for testing DPNSS F2 and DASS2 F3 are defined in BTNR volumes 188 and 190 respectively ETSI F1 refers to the European Telecommunicatino Standard AUSSIE F4 is tAustrailian nainal standard If you are not certain as to which type of switch you are testing you may need to try all four types 2 EMULATE TYPE Options TE F1 NT F2 for ETSI and AUSSIE PBX B F1 PBX A F2 for DPNSS PBX F1 ET F2 for DASS2 Configures the emulation mode for the test set The choices available vary depedning onthe Q 931 STD chosen in the line above Ch 6 ISDN 6 11 For ETSI and AUSSIE Terminating Equipment F1 e TE is used when the test set is emulating a piece of customer s equipment as in a PBX e Use TE Type when you are plugging into a Central Office switch Network Terminal F2 e NT is used when emulating an ISDN switch or exchange e Use NT to plug into Customer Premises The choise of emulation type temporarily changest he transmit clock source e NT uses the internal clock e TE uses the received signal e Theset stransmitclock reverts tothe TEST CONFIGURATION XMT CLK setting when you escape out of the ISDN PRIMARY RATE menu e When you enter the ISDN PRIMAREY RATE menu the clock changes to internal NT ore received TE e There may be no clock at all if the test set is plugged into an ISDN PRI netowrk i e PBX and is set to TE DASS2 is
285. ons are listed under the Status Panel heading e The letter presented in bold is the key you push to initiate the command The cursor commands are Up doWn lefT and Right In addition you may find that the arrow keys on your computer terminal will work RefreSh repaints the screen Press Quit functions as the ESCAPE key Other key functions are Inj err History and resYnch Pressing the Return key on your computer terminal is the same as pressing the ENTER key on your test set A 38 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 F key functions are provided by the F1 F2 F3 and F4 keys When you wish to enter letters or numbers in a setup screen instead of using the SHIFT key and the orange test set key labels just type in the numbers or letters directly from your computer terminal keyboard 10 When you are finished with the SunSet E10 type in logoff 11 Then terminate the phone connection by hanging up your near end modem In remote control you have access to most of the test set s capability However you will notice a few differences such as the following e You will not have access to the GRAPHIC screen or the AUTO key e The MEASUREMENT RESULTS screen will be updated about once every 5 seconds instead of once each second e Local usage of print commands is not recommended during a remote control session because both the printer andthe remote control use the same port For instance pressing the PRNTR key
286. ontrol Point services PLMN Public Land Mobile Network and Operations administration and Mainte nance of networks 1 1 SS 7 Network Architecture The SS 7 network is comprised of signalling points SPs connected together by dedicated circuits identified as signalling links There are three types of SPs Service Switching Point SSP Signalling Transfer Point STP and Service Control Point SCP A typical SS 7 network is depicted in Figure 5 1 The primary purpose of the SSP is to originate and process requests for trunks Also it originates requests for network ser vices Every SSP is connected to a pair of STPs for load sharing and backup purposes The primary purpose of a STP is to route signalling messages between different SSPs in the network Usually there are two levels of hierarchy in arranging STPs local level and regional level The local level STP pair routes signalling traffic within a specified local area While regional level STPs route traffic between the specified local areas SCP s primary function is to process database query messages for advanced network services such as 800 numbers and alterna tive billing SCPs are paired to protect the SS 7 againstloss of data in case of SCP failure Each SCP is connected to the regional STP thus providing regional service In reference to Figure 5 1 the following list identifies the link nomenclature Ch 5 SS 7 5 1 e A link Access links that connect switching off
287. operation amp maintenance 3F Layer2 management A value of 0 is normally used 3 TEI Options NONE F1 INC X F2 DEC X F3 1 10 50 F4 e Use the F keys to enter in a hex code from 00 to 7F The 1 10 50 F4 key sets the increment decrement value used in options F2 and F3 e The TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier identifies the TRX e TEI values 0 63 00 to 3F hex are reserved for fixed addresses e Values 64 126 40 to 7E hex are used for additional addresses to TRXs needing more than one signalling link 4 MSG DISC Options NONE F1 RLL MGT F2 DC MGT F3 CC MGT more F1 TRX MGT more F2 RESERVED more F3 The Message Discriminator allows you to discriminate between radio link RLL dedicated channel DC common channel CC and TRX management 5 MSG TYPE Options Hex code from 00 to 7F This filter allows you to capture a specific message The following tables 7 11 to 7 14 outline the different message types implemented on the SunSet E10 7 12 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Hex Code Message Type Data Request esent in BCS BTS direction to request sending of a message in multi frame mode Data Indication sent in BTS BSC direction to indicate the reception of a message in multi frame mode Sl the establishment of a radio link layer connection in multi frame mode establishment of a radio link layer connection in multi frame mode 06 ish Indi establishment tof 4 adie Tin
288. ormed This auto calibration should take care of all the adjust mentthat the set will need during normal circumstances However once per year the set may also be given this calibration test procedure If the test set fails any part of this procedure then you should contact Sunrise Telecom Customer Service or your national distributor for further advice about possible repairs 1 Connect a cable from LINE 1 Tx to LINE 1 Rx a Turn onthe set and go to SYSTEM PARAMETERS FULL SELF TEST b Check that all LED s except POWER and LOW BATT function correctly They should turn green first and then red during the self test c Verify that no error codes are displayed on the SELF TEST COMPLETE screen d Verify that no error codes are displayed in the upper left hand corner of the screen during power up e Perform ERASE NV RAM Turn the power off for 5 seconds and then turn the power back on as directed on the test set screen 2 Verify that the backlight and contrast control both work 3 Configure the TEST CONFIGURATION for E1 L1 Tx L1 Rx TESTPAT PCM 30 ENABLE 2 048M TERM TERM IN TERN Ch 11 Troubleshooting 11 3 a Escape back to the SunSet E10 MAIN MENU Then configure SEND TEST PATTERN for 2e23 4 Verify that line 1 LED s are correct press the HISTORY key if necessary SIGNAL PCM 30 and CRC DET are green all other line 1 LED s should be off Also verify thatthe PAT SYNC LED is green and the BIT ERROR LED is off Th
289. ose the desired option 1 MEAS DURATION Options TIMED F1 CONTINU F2 Set the MEASurement Duration A timed measurement will stop automatically when the specified amount of time has elapsed This option is useful for making measurements of a specified length 15 minute and 1 hour tests are commonly used in the industry elf you choose TIMED press the SHIFT lock key to display the SHIFT indicator Then enter a number between 1 min to 999 hr 59 min When atimed testis in progress the Remaining Time RT counter shows how much time is left before the end of the test e A CONTINUous test will run indefinitely until you press the STOP key in MEASUREMENT RESULTS or until you change some other setting on the test set that restarts the test Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 103 2 START Options PROGRAM F1 MANUAL F2 Select the method by which you begin your test measurements e PROGRAM F1 allows you to program a specified time in the future to begin taking measurements Once you have selected PROGRAM you must enter the desired time in the next two items e In MANUAL F2 you must manually begin the test measure ments at the desired time 3 PROG DATE YMD Applies if you have selected PROGRAM for START above Enter the Year Month and Day to begin measurements by pressing the SHIFT key and the desired number keys 4 PROG TIME HMS Applies if you have selected PROGRAM for START e Specify the Hour Minute and Secon
290. ot number by one c Press INC 10 F4 to increase the timeslot number by ten 4 SUB CHANNEL Select the transmit subchannel from 1 4 The default is subchannel 1 You may change the selection by pressing the F keys a Press INC 1 F2 to increment the subchannel number by one b Press DEC 1 F3 to decrement the subchannel number by one 5 PATTERN Options 2047 F2 1111 F3 1010 more F2 0000 more F3 Select the test pattern to transmit pressing the appropriate F key 6 Observe the measurements a ELAPSED TIME measurement begins when you enter the screen the time elapsed since measurements began is re ported here b Here is a listing of the measurements ERROR A count of all errors RATE The rate at which errors are being received ES A count of Errored Seconds seconds with at least one BPV bit error FBE or CRC 4 error EFS A count of Errored Free Seconds SES Acount of Severely Errored Seconds seconds with an error rate of 10 3 or higher UAS A count of UnAvailable Seconds unavailable time begins at the onset of 10 consecutive SESs or at loss of signal or loss of frame LOSS A count of Loss of Signal Seconds seconds during which signal was lost See the Measurement Definitions section in Chapter 3 as necessary 7 34 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Note LOSS here refers to the loss of the entire 64 kbps signal Press the STOP F1 key when you wish to begin new measure ments Pr
291. oup Unblocking 48 Acknowledgment Message RLG Release Guard Signal 17 RSC Reset Circuit Signal 77 SAM Subsequent Address Message 31 SAO Subsequent Address Message with One Signal 41 SBA Software Generated Group Blocking Acknowledgment C8 Message SEC Switching Equipment Congestion Signal 15 SGB Software Generated Group Blocking Message B8 SGU Software Generated Group Unblocking Message D8 SSB Subscriber Busy Signal 65 SST Send Special Information Tone Signal 95 SUA Software Generated Group Unblocking Acknowledgment E8 UBA Unblocking Acknowledgment Signal 57 UBL Unblocking Signal 47 UNN Unallocated Number Signal 75 Figure 5 13 TUP Head Codes 5 16 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 The following filter options are available for ISUP messages 1 CIC CODE Options NONE F1 000 to FFF The Circuit Identification Code is used as a label for circuit related messages e Identifies the telephone circuit among those interconnecting the Destination Point and the Originating Point e The least five significant bits of the ISUP CIC code are a binary representation of the actual number of the timeslot which is assigned to the speech circuit e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 will increment decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number 2 MESG TYPE Options NONE F1 00 to FF e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 will increment decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to sel
292. p Filter for DPNSS and DASS2 The Setup Filter used for DPNSS and DASS2 is shown in the next figure 00 05 21 D CHANNEL FILTER L2 MONITR C R BIT TIME SLOT MSG GROUP TYPE CODE SIC TYPE DA NUMBER 2 CMD RESPNSE NONE Figure 6 11 D channel Filter DNPSS DASS2 The following filter items are available 1 L2 MONITR Options YES F1 NO F2 Display or do not display the layer 2 information fields in the captured messages e This item refers to the Layer 2 Monitor Flag 2 C R BIT Options CoMmanD F1 RESpoNSe F2 NONE F3 Determine which C R bit s to capture e Press CMD F1 to trance only command frames e Press RESPNSE F2 to trace only response frames e Selecting NONE F3 allows the set to trace both commands and responses Aframe may be transmitted as either a command ora response as indicated by the command response bit located in the first octet bit 2 of the address field Acommand frame carries information or Ch 6 ISDN 6 21 controls the link A response frame acknowledges the receipt of acommand frame 3 TIME SLOT Options 1 31 NONE F3 Select the timeslot to capture related B channel messages for e Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 to select a timeslot e Select NONE F3 to trace messages for all timeslots 4 MSG GROUP Options O 9 A F NONE F3 Determine if a specific Message Group s messages will be captured e Use the NEXT F1 and PREVIUS F2
293. p line X 50 select ENABLE F1 to set up your X 50 frame b Before continuing make sure that the reverse video X50 message is displayed at the top of the screen c Escape to the Main Menu 2 From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION a Select DATACOM Test Mode b Configure the other settings as shown in Figure 8 15 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE DATACOM TYPE RS232 MODE DCE SYN TEST RATE 64K TXDATA CLK BIHepa43 INTERN RECEIVE Figure 8 15 Datacom Configuration 3 Connect the set to the circuit as shown in Figure 8 16 a Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green b Press the HISTORY key to turn off any blinking lights Ch 8 X 50 8 21 Datacom X50 side 64Kbps Figure 8 16 Testing 64K X 50 Signal from X 50 MUX 4 Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS VIEW X 50 INFO a Verify the housekeeping bits 5 Escape out to the Main Menu a Enter the TEST PATTERN menu item b Select a BERT or USER pattern 6 Escape out to the Main Menu Enter MEASUREMENT RE SULTS a Verify that the circuit performs to your company s requirements for the service delivered b If necessary refer to Chapter 3 Section 4 1 1 for definitions of each of the measurement terms used in these screens 7 Using the ERR INJ key inject a bit error to the other end and verify a Insert a bit error from the equipment to the E10 b Verify that your BIT ERROR and ERROR LED s light up c
294. pattern to use 20ITU may bring down the switch 6 30 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 5 Connectto the test set as shown in either of the next two figures a Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off If you plan to emulate Terminal Equipment TE refer to Figure 6 16 Refer to Figure 6 17 is you plan to emulate a Network Terminal b lt O Ch 6 ISDN 6 31 or PBX Switch Central Office Central Office or PBX Figure 6 16 ISDN Call Setup TE 6 32 SunSet E19 Version 2 37 Customer Premise Figure 6 17 ISDN Call Setup NT Ch 6 ISDN 6 33 6 a b a b c d e Escape to OTHER MEASUREMENTS Enter VIEW RECEIVED DATA You should see six consecutive ones with two zeroes on your D channel hex 9F FC 7E 3F etc This verifies that your D channel is set up if you do not see this then your D channel may not be set up to handle ISDN messages Escape out to the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu Select ISDN ANALYSIS Enter CONFIGURATION Set the configuration settings according to your circuit e Refer to section 2 1 for additional details e Toemulate a Network Terminal as in Figure 6 17 select NT for the EMULATE TYPE e To emulate Terminal Equipment as in Figure 6 16 select
295. placed Many other serial printers are available to the user however not all of these printers will operate correctly with the SunSet You are free to use this information to attempt to set up the test set with another printer However Sunrise Telecom does not warrant the operation of the test set with any printer other than the one supplied by Sunrise Telecom If you wish to connect to a mode or other brand of printer you may find the SS122A Null Modem Adaptor useful Refer to Figure 4 30 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 4 15 NU 8 5 5 4 3 13 2 2 Fr NZ 2 7 PIN TO PIN CONNECTIONS DB 9 FEMALE DB 9 FEMALE PIN DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION 5 SG 777 5 SG 8 CTS 070 4 DTR 3 R _ 2 TD 2 TD 3B RD Figure 4 15 SS122A Null Modem Pin Assignments To begin printing follow this procedure 1 Connect the Sunrise Telecom DIN 8 to DB 9 Printer Cable SS115B tothe SunSet E10 Figure 4 16 displays the cable pin assignments of the DIN to EIA 232 C Printer Cable Ch 4 Applications 4 31 DIN 8 PIN PIN TO PIN CONNECTIONS IN EIA 232 C D SUB DESCRIPTION PIN DESCRIPTION DSR IT 6 DSR TX Figure 4 16 SS115B Printer Cable Pin Assignments 2 If you are using a Sunrise Telecom printer skip this step a Otherwise you may need to connect the Sunrise Telecom Null Modem Adapter SS122A to the free end of the Printer Cable 3 Confirm thatthe
296. programmable trace filter OPC DPC SI CIC HO H1 address signal called number Layer 2 FISU LSSU filter BSN BIB FSN FIB Real time view of bi directional messages Messages are trans lated into clear text up to layer 4 down to bit level or are displayed in hex format Trace storage holds up to 2100 messages View trace buffer with or without display filter Print clear buffer LSSU analysis Captures and display of LSSUs FISUs BSN BIB FSN FIB Status cause display in hex format and decode to bit level Message decode performance 99 of messages captured at 15 channel utilization 91 bytes per message 12 6 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 ISDN PRI ANALYSIS amp CALL SET UP SW254 Bi directional Primary rate interface analysis and call set ups layers 2 amp 3 Protocol analysis Supports ITU T Q 921 Q 931 ETSI User programmable trace filter Call reference number Called number Caller number SAPI TEI C R bit time slot message group type code SIC type View bi directional message flow Messages are translated into clear text up to layer 3 or are displayed in hex format Trace storage holds up to 2100 messages Trace buffer view print and clear Emulates both TE amp NT mode Generates and receives voice data calls Capable of 2 calls Supports self call Talk listen send receive tones DPNSS DASS2 ANALYSIS amp CALL SETUP SW260 Supports BTNR 188 amp BTNR 190 standards Bi directional Primary rate interface analysis
297. ps as outlined above for the West The RTS is received by the East DCE The East DCE now activates its Westbound carrier and thus both carriers are present Italso sends CTS back to East DTE The West DCE recognizing the incoming Westbound carrier turns onthe CAR_DET tothe West DTE Atthis stage both carriers are active but no modulation or data transfer has taken place When the West and East DTE recognize that the CTS signal is on they can begin to transmit data on the Transmit Data wire When the West DTE places data on its Tx wire the West DCE begins to modulate its carrier The data is sent to the East DTE where it is demodulated and sent on the Receive data wire The East DTE receives exactly what was sent by the West DTE A similar procedure takes place when the East DTE places data on its Tx wire The East DCE begins modulation and sends the analog information to the West DCE The West DCE demodulates this data and sends it to the West DTE on the Rx wire When the West or East DTE has sent all its data it turns off its TX wire and the East DTE turns off its Rx wire The West DTE turns off RTS The West DCE turns off CTS and deactivates its 9 4 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 carrier The East DCE senses the loss of carrier and turns off CAR_DET When the East DTE has finished transmitting its data the same steps are followed RS232 Cable N Phone Line N RS232 Cable Dig
298. r it will respond by transmitting an E bit error toward the other terminal Test set 2 shown in Figure 10 9 will be able to see the E bit errors by plugging into a protected monitoring point Note that the test set can notsee the actual code errors framing bit errors and CRC errors introduced atthe trouble point The test set can see only the E bit errors transmitted by Terminal B Thus E bit error transmission allows a 2 048 Mbps in service circuit to be reliably monitored for transmission performance from any point on the circuit Without E bit error transmission only a complete circuit failure can be reliably determined at any point on the circuit With a complete circuit failure the test set will see either loss of signal alarm indication signal or remote alarm indication 10 12 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 1 9 MFR2 DTMF DP Technology There are a number of signalling methods used by public telephone networks The methods are divided between the local loop and interoffice signalling Referring to Figure 10 10 the signalling applied for each environment is as follows LOCALLOOP e Pulse e DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency e ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network INTEROFFICE e MFR2 Multi Frequency e MFC Multi Frequency Compelled e SS 7 Signalling System 7 Figure 10 10 Local Loop and Interoffice Signalling Methods LocalLoop In the local loop environment a common signalling method is DTMF Ituses two
299. r as selected here Thus the filtering applies to all SS 7 messages being sent Line 1 OPC and received Line 2 DPC from the selected signalling point 3 SI FIELD Options NONE F1 TUP F2 ISUP F3 SCCP more F1 SNM more F2 SNT more F3 The Service Indicator Field is used by signalling handling functions to perform message distribution e The Sl field indicates the user part to which the message belongs e This field further specifies the type of messages to filter The choices are e NONE F1 to search for messages belonging to all SI Fields e TUP F2 to search for those belonging to the Telephone User Part e ISUP F3 to search for ISDN User Part messages e SCCP more F1 to search for Signalling Connection Control Part messages Ch 5 SS 7 5 13 SNM more F2 to look for Signalling Network Management messages SNT more F3 to look for Signalling Network Testing messages More filtering options will appear once a specific not NONE SI Field has been chosen The options available depend upon the specific SI Field chosen above Figure 5 12 displays the options with their respective SI fields SI FIELD NONE TUP ISUP SCCP SNM CIC CODE SLS CODE MESG TYPE Figure 5 12 SI Field Filtering Options The filtering items available for TUP are 1 CIC CODE Options NONE F1 000 to FFF The Circuit Identification Code is used as a label for circuit related mes
300. r right hand portion ofthe screen 4 16 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 2 5 2 Auto Start To have the test set begin measuring at a future date and time use the following procedure 1 In MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 and press TIMED F1 2 Press the SHIFT key 3 Use the numeric keys to enter the length of the test Press the SHIFT key again to release it 4 Cursor to START and press PROGRAM F1 5 Cursor down to PROG DATE YMD and enter the Year Month and Day you wish the timed test to begin using the SHIFT and number keys 6 At PROG TIME HMS enter the Hour Minute and Second you wish the test to begin Press SHIFT again e The test set will begin measuring at your programmed time 2 6 Observe Network Codes or Channel Data The SunSet E10 provides a large screen display which is useful for analyzing live circuit data In addition to the binary data hexadecimal and ASCII translations are also provided for youin this display This display can be used to decode E1 network control codes that are in use and can also be used to verify the content of individual channels Refer to Figure 4 11 Ch 4 Applications 4 17 MEAS 01 30 09 VIEW RECEIVED DATA 00 BINARY HEX ASCII 00011011 1B 10001110 8E 01000100 44 11011010 DA 01100101 65 00100010 22 10100001 Al 00110000 30 PAGE DN RESUME Figure 4 11 View Received Data 64 pages of data are stored at once so that you can scroll down through the information and
301. ransmit CAS bits to the seizure condition When dialing the set pulses the B bit according to the timing selected in BREAK and INTERDIGIT period When the dialing is complete the set remains in the seizure condition 6 4 DTMF MFR2 DP Dialing The DTMF MFR2 dialing menu lets you perform a number of dialing functions dial a DTMF MF Forward MF Backward and DP number speed dial a stored number record a number with a label for future dialing edit or delete speed dial numbers For MFR2 Compelled Dialing also see the MFC SS 5 DIAL ANALYSIS menu Refer to Figure 3 48 3 72 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 17 06 58 DIMF MFR2 DP DIALING METHOD wa ME FRWD NUMBER 98765432F TX 1 T S 01 RX 1 T S 01 RX A B C D 1011 TX A B C D 1011 A 10 0 B 11 C 12 D 13 E 14 F 15 MF FRWD MF BKWD DTMF DP Figure 3 48 DTMF MFR2 DP Dialing This screen consists of the following elements 1 METHOD Options MF FRWD F1 MF BKWD F2 DTMF F3 DP F4 This item determines the dialing method e Multifrequency forward F1 e Multifrequency backward F2 e Dual tone Multifrequency F3 e Dial Pulse F4 2 NUMBER e The last phone number dialed if any will be shown on the screen e To dial this number simply press the ENTER key e Delete the previous number by pressing the DELETE F2 key as needed until the existing number is completely deleted To enter a New Number a Press and release the SH
302. rcuit and each company is allocated a percentage of the total allowable end to end error rate Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 107 7 3 Error Injection Figure 3 78 displays the ERROR INJECTION screen ERROR INJECTION TYPE BIT CODE MODE BURST COUNT od BIT BIT CODE Figure 3 78 ERROR INJECTION Screen To start error injection press the ERR INJ key The test set will insert errors as you specify below If the error injection is set to RATE mode an ERR INJ indicator will be displayed on the screen 1 TYPE Options CODE F1 BIT F2 BIT CODE F3 CRC 4 more F1 FRAME more F2 EBIT more F3 This item specifies the type of errors to be inserted 2 MODE Options RATE F1 BURST F2 This item specifies the mode of error injection RATE mode applies only to BPV and LOGIC errors e Other types of errors may be inserted one ata time under BURST mode 3 COUNT Options 1 to 9999 For BURST MODE choose the COUNT oferrors to be inserted e Press the SHIFT key then type in any number between 1 and 3 108 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 9999 The errors will be inserted in approximately 1 second or less and will cause from 1 to 3 errored seconds 4 RATE Options 2x10 to 1x10 For RATE MODE choose the error RATE number and expo nent e The errors will then be inserted at a continuous rate as specified in this entry Programming a Burst of 10 Errors Here is a sample procedure for progra
303. re is no error control or flow control Acknowleaged operation Layer 3 information is transferred in frames that include sequence numbers and that are ac knowledged Error control and flow control procedures are included in the protocol This type is also referred to in the standard as multiple frame operation These two types of operation may coexist ona single D channel With the acknowledged operation it is possible to simultaneously support multiple logical LAP D connections This is analogous to the ability in X 25 level 3 to support multiple virtual circuits Layer 3 For call control signalling the D channel layer 3 interface is defined in Recommendations 1 450 and 1 451 It specifies the procedures for establishing connections on the B channels that share the same interface to ISDN asthe D channel Italso provides user to user control signalling over the D channel As mentioned before packet switching signalling is also avail able using X 25 layer 3 protocol This is the same for using B channel packet switching service Layer 3 provides higher layer information for supporting various ISDN functions Two basic types of user terminals are supported by ISDN functional and stimulus Functional terminals are consid ered to be intelligent devices and can employ the full range of 1 451 messages and parameters for call control All signalling informa tion is sent in a single control message en bloc sending Stimulus terminals ar
304. re timeslot 16 does not contain a B chanel which would have been B channel 16 Instead B channel 16 is placed in timeslot 17 and B channel 17 in timeslot 18 etc 6 TEST PATTERN Options 63 F1 127 F2 511 F3 2047 more F1 1111 More F2 0000 more F3 10101 more F1 USER More F2 Select the test pattern to send on a data call e Ifyou select USER cursor down to the next line and enter the pattern you want to send 7 USER PATTERN Use the 0 F1 and 1 F2 keys to enter the eight bit pattern if you have selected USER as your TEST PATTERN Ch 6 ISDN 6 13 The next two items refer to the ETSI AUSSIE protocol These two parameters will not appear if DPNSS or DASS2 were selected 8 Layer 2 SAPI Optiosn 0 63 Selected the desired SAPI value e Press the appropriate F keys to reach the desired value F1 increments by tens F2 increments by one F3 decrements by tens F3 decrements by one The Service Access Poitn Identifier e Comprises bits 3 8 in the fist octet of Layer 2 s Address Field e The SAPI value identifies a point at which data link layer services are provided by a data link layer entity to a layer 3 or managemententitiy e Identifies a data Inik layer entity which processes a data link layer frame e Identiifcies a layer 3 3ntity to recie the information carried by the data link layer frame As defined in CCITT Q 921 there are four valid SAPI values e 0 Callcontrol procedures norm
305. reference clock it must have a valid signal or you will geta NO REFERENCE CLOCK message Figures 3 22 and 23 show the Line Frequency screen used for E1 Mode 17 13 40 ET 000 50 21 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD HDB3 E 1 FREQUE NE 051 RCV Hz 2047999 CKSLIP 51 MAX Hz 2047999 WANDR MIN Hz 2047999 WANDR 51 PAGE UP PAGE DN STOP more Figure 3 22 Line Frequency Screen E1 Mode Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 39 20 50 45 ET 000 14 19 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 C TxCK INTERN PATT 1 4 RATE 2 048M LINE 1 FREQUENCY NO LINE 2 REF SIGNAL RCV Hz 2048003 CKSLIP N A MAX Hz 2048003 WANDR N A MIN Hz 2048002 WANDR N A Figure 3 23 Line Frequency No Ref Signal Note When no reference clock signal is present the test set will default to its internal clock for the measurement of MAXimum MINimum and current ReCeiVed bit rates of the selected signal Refer to the Measurement Definitions section as needed LINE 1 G 821 Screen The G 821 screen presents the measurement parameters specified in ITU G 821 It includes ES SES EFS AS UAS DGRM and their related percent values Figure 3 24 provides a sample screen 3 40 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 MEAS 17420711 ET 000 56 49 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD HDB3 RCV 63 XMT 63 LINE 1 G 821 BER 0 0e 10 SES 00 000 SSES 00 000 SEFS 100 SAS 100 SUAS 00 000 SDGRM
306. respond to the last time you entered MEASUREMENT RESULTS a Select VIEW F1 to view the current histogram Figure 3 41 shows a sample histogram screen b Pressing STORE F2 will erase any previously stored data e Your CURRENT histogram data is also being stored but it will be erased the next time you enter MEASUREMENT RESULTS e If you do not want to save the current file and erase the one already saved simply press ESCAPE instead of ENTER at the warning message screen CURRENT HISTOGRAM STARTING TIME STAMP 96 01 16 08 39 26 ENDING TIME STAMP 96 01 16 09 29 32 VIEW STORE Figure 3 40 Current Histogram Menu Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 61 17 50 45 CURRENT HISTOGRAM BIT LINE 1 96 04 12 00 00 Cursor Figure 3 41 Current Histogram Screen The following function keys are available for the histogram analysis TYPE F1 Use this key to select the measurement parameter type e The history of each error type is displayed individually e The error type is specified in the upper portion of the screen e Pressing TYPE automatically changes the type options dis played In Figure 3 41 bit error was selected as the error type In this manner you may examine the history of certain errors or param eters depending on the test mode The following table Figure 3 42 provides the parameters errors available with their respective modes 3 62 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 SIDE INFO LINE 1 or BIT CODE CRC FE
307. ring 10 12 E bit error transmission 10 11 E BIT screens 3 42 E bits 3 42 E1 Measurment Results 3 33 E1 Mode CRC 4 3 6 Framing 3 5 RxLVL 3 8 Test Rate 3 6 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Tx SOURCE 3 5 TX INSERT 3 4 XMT CLOCK 3 9 E1 mode block error screen 3 45 E bit screen 3 43 Rx DROP 3 5 Summary screens 3 38 E1 pulse quality 3 53 E1 Test Mode 3 4 E1 MUX Mode 4 46 E1 MUX mode measurement results 3 47 E1 Mux mode Datacom side 3 15 MUX side 3 15 E1 MUX Test Mode 3 14 E1INS 3 15 E1T S 3 16 3 18 EB 3 47 EBER 3 34 EBIT errors 3 34 Edit Emulator Send side 3 99 Edit emulator receive side 3 100 EIC 7 24 EIR 7 2 emulation ISDN 6 11 EN BLOC 6 18 ENTER key 2 7 Equipment Identity Register 7 2 ERASE NVRAM 3 125 ERR INJ key 2 5 Error ERROR LED 2 10 Error Injection configuration 3 108 ERR INJ Key 2 6 Programming Bit Error Rate 3 109 Programming Burst of 10 Errors 3 109 Index error injection ERR INJ LED 2 5 ES 3 35 ESCAPE key 2 7 ET 3 32 ETSI 6 11 European Telecommunicaiton Standard 6 11 EXPRESS LIMITED WAR RANTY w i external timing 3 11 F F link 5 2 F keys 2 3 Factory Defaults 3 127 FALM 3 35 FAS 10 7 FAS DISTANT Alarm 3 113 FAS WORD 3 117 FASE 3 35 FDMA 7 2 FE 3 35 FIB 5 5 5 6 5 7 Figure 1 1 Cartridge Installation 1 2 1 2 Stand Installation 1 3 2 01 SunSet E10 Front View 2 2 2 02 F Keys 2 3 2 03 Graphic Screen Example 2 5 2 04 Connector Panel 2 11 3 01 Test Configuration Menu 3
308. rom the multiplex choose L1 Rx F1 Set the clock to INTERN F2 if the 2 Mbps multiplex receives timing from the E10 s Line 1 Tx DATACOM TYPE Select the datacom interface that will provide the 64 kbps X 50 frame Choose from either V 35 F1 RS449 F2 X 21 F3 G 703 more F1 or RS232 more F2 MODE This is set to DCE MUX E1 T S Select the 64 kbps timeslot to be multiplexed from the X 50 to the E1 side Select 1 31 for PCM 31 framing or timeslots 1 15 17 31 for PCM 30 framing Rx Select the side for receiving and BER testing Since we are 8 18 SunSet E10 8 Version 2 37 testing the multiplexing operation of the multiplex press E1 F1 Tx Select which side transmits the test pattern Since we are testing the multiplexing operation of the multiplex select the datacom type F2 NOTE Upon selecting either the Tx or Rx setting the other setting will automatically be changed to the other choice For example if you select E1 for Tx the test set automati cally sets Rx to the datacom type 3 Connect the test set to the circuit according to Figure 8 14 a Press the HISTORY to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off 4 Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS VIEW X 50 INFO a Verify the housekeeping bits 5 Escape out to the Main Menu a Enter TEST PATTERN b Select a BERT or USER pattern 6 Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green a Press the ERR INJ key to insert a bit
309. rs for each mode selected Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 3 2 1 E1 TEST MODE e E1 is the standard test rate of 2 048 Mbps e Use for voice frequency SS 7 ISDN SS 5 GSM and 2 048 Mbps BERT Bit Error Rate Test applications Figure 3 1 provides the E1 Mode Test Configuration Menu and Figure 3 2 shows the graphic associated with the settings in Figure 3 1 Note that the reverse video MEAS indicates measurements are being taken P15 2e15 indicates the pattern being received and HDB3 is the line coding The following items must be configured in the E1 Mode Press the corresponding F key to select the desired setting MEAS P15 Line 1 HDB3 TERM Line 2 TERM Figure 3 2 E1 Mode Graphic 1 Tx INSERT Options L1 TX F1 L2 TX F2 Selects the 2 048 Mbps test line onto which you insert the test signal e Select either L1 Tx F1 selects Line 1 or L2 Tx F2 selects Line 2 e This determines where the 2 048 Mbps test pattern Nx64 kbps test pattern Nx64 kbps multiplexed signal or voice frequency channel will be inserted For example if Tx INSERT is L2 Tx and you are talking on the test set then your voice will be inserted on line 2 3 4 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 2 Rx DROP Options L1 RX F1 L2 RX F2 Selects the received test signal from either L1 Rx or L2 Rx This selection configures bit error rate 2 048 Mbps line frequency E bit error measurements M 2100 550 measurements voice channel frequency
310. ructure In this 8 bit envelope bit 1 F is reserved for framing pur poses bit 8 S carries the status bit Bits 2 through 7 contain the user information bits Therefore the multiplexing overhead uses 25 of the available bandwidth The maximum user payload carried by a timeslot which has been multiplexed in accordance with Rec X 50 is 48 kbps The actual user payload rate is 75 of the subchannel rate required to carry it Figure 8 2 shows the Ch 8 X 50 8 1 equivalent subchannel and user payload rates Sub Channel Rate User s Payload of Sub channels in 64Kbps 12 8 Kops 9 6 Kbps 5 6 4 Kbps 4 8 Kops 10 3 2 Kbps 2 4 Kbps 20 Figure 8 2 Channel Rates 1 2 X 50 Framing The SunSet E10 supports Division 2 and Division 3 framing e X 50 Division 2 uses an 80 byte frame e Division 3 uses a 20 byte frame 1 2 1 Division 2 Framing Division 2 uses 80 8 bit envelopes and has a gross bit rate of 64 kbps This structure will allow the multiplexing of channels atthe following bearer rates 12 8 kbps channels every 5th 8 bit envelope 6 4 kbps channels every 10th 8 bit envelope 3 2 kbps channels every 20th 8 bit envelope 800 bps channels every 80th 8 bit envelope The list above also shows where the interleaved 8 bit enve lopes appear on the 64 kbps bearer The first F bit is used to carry the distant end alarm indication when an absence of incoming pulses or the loss of frame alignment has bee
311. s NONE F1 EVEN F2 ODD F3 Parity is a method of checking the accuracy of transmitted or stored data An extra bit known as a parity bit is added to the data as an accuracy check e In Odd Parity F3 the total number of ones including the added parity bit is odd e In even parity the total number of ones including the added parity bit is even e The receiving element checks the parity bit and indicates an error if the total number of ones does not add up to the correct total 3 124 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 e None F1 the factory default setting signifies no parity checking 6 STOP BIT Options 1 BIT F1 2 BIT F2 In asynchronous transmission the stop bit is the last transmit ted character which permits the receiver to come into an idle condition before accepting another character e Select 1 BIT F1 or 2 BIT F2 e The factory default setting is 1 BIT 7 BITS CHAR Options 7 BIT F1 8 BIT F2 BITS CHAR determines the number of bits per character e Press F1 to select 7 bits per character e Press F2 to select 8 bits per character 8 CR LF INSRT Options CR F1 CR LF F2 Press CR F1 to select carriage return e Press CR LF F2 for carriage return and line feed In carriage return and line feed an extra line space is inserted after every line 8 2 ERASE NV RAM e Erase NV Non Volatile RAM erases all the user storable information entered into the test set e This op
312. s been transmitted over real cable and is at a level between approxi mately 6 and 43 dB Usually you should use TERM whenever you disrupt the circuit for testing BRIDGE F2 In the BRIDGE mode the SunSet applies high impedance isolation resistors to the circuit under test This isolation circuit will protect the signal from any possible disruption These 3 8 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 bridging resistors are the only protection available to the signal The signal being tested has been transmitted over regular cable and is at a level of approximately 6 to 43 dB Note that if a connection is made from the protected MONITOR jack of a network elementto the SunSet and ifthe BRIDGE RxLVL is being used there are too many isolation circuits on the signal In this case the SunSet might show a loss of signal and be unable to perform any measurements MONITOR F3 The MONITOR access mode is used when a monitor measurement willbe made The signal is provided from the protected MONITOR jack of a network equipment at a level between 15 dB and 30 dB The equipment has isolated the MONITOR signal from the live signal with a high impedance circuit This mode is useful because the monitor jack protects the live signal from any possible disruptions caused by the testing process It allows the technician to test the line while it is in service Note that if MONITOR mode is selected when a 0 GB signal is received then the red CODE LED will be lit
313. s available depend upon the RATE selected above e For a specified rate there are NxOCTETs selectable where N 9600 RATE For example if a rate of 2400 is selected then there are four octets from which to choose since 9600 24000 4 After selecting RATE 2400 use the NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 keys to select an octet 1 4 Ch 8 X 50 8 7 For Division 2 Nx600 F1 e SEL appears in the OCTET slot e SEL appears as Fi Press F1 to enter the Division 2 screen shown in Figure 8 8 e Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired octet number then press SELECT F1 To deselect an octet follow the same procedure but press UN SEL F3 instead e To select all sixteen octets in the phase press SEL ALL F2 e To deselect all sixteen octets in the phase press CLR ALL F4 e Once you have selected the octets press ENTER to return to the X 50 SETUP screen e If you accidentally do not select any octets you will automatically be set to the default rate of 2400 for octet of one MEAS X 50 DIVISION 2 0 25 0 65 1 26 1 66 2 27 2 67 3 3 4 4 28 68 29 69 RFOROFRORORO WOOWDWDYINAHNUNUW UiA U HU MH oP oP L SELECT SEI 2 E 1 Figure 8 8 X 50 Division 2 Select Screen As shown in Figure 8 8 there are five phases labelled P1 P5 Sixteen octets are assigned to each phase Each octet or subrate channel has a bandwidth of 600 kbps Since there are five phases with 16 octets eac
314. s requirements for the service delivered If necessary refer to the Measurement Definitions section for an explanation of the MEASUREMENT RESULTS parameters a Use the PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 to access each of the individual measurement screens 6 When your MEASUREMENT RESULTS have been completed press the ESCAPE key to return to the MAIN MENU 7 Remove the loop at the far end of the circuit 2 2 Monitor an In Service Circuit Here is a procedure for monitoring a span thatis in service The setup is illustrated in Figures 4 6 4 7 and 4 8 1 This test may be performed while the span is carrying live customer traffic 2 Press the ESCAPE key until you arrive at the MAIN MENU Move your cursor to the TEST CONFIGURATION menu item and press ENTER a Use the following configuration TEST MODE El TX INSERT L1 Tx Rx DROP L1 Rx TxSOURCE TESTPAT FRAMING as specified by the span design CRC 4 as specified by the span design TEST RATE 2 048M RxLVL 1 MONITOR or BRIDGE RxLVL 2 MONITOR or BRIDGE XMT CLOCK INTERN NOTE If you are not sure what RxLVL to use then use BRIDGE This will protect the circuit from disruption MONITOR may cause a disruption if the test set is not plugged in to a protected MONITOR point 4 8 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 a Press the ENTER key when all of the settings are correct 3 Connect the SunSet to the circuit as shown in Figure 4 6 4 7 or 4 8 a
315. sages e Identifies the telephone circuit among those interconnecting the Destination Point and the Originating Point each phone call shares the same CIC code e For TUP the least significant 4 bits of the CIC field are the SLS Signalling Link Selection e SLS is used to perform loadsharing when needed e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number 5 14 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 2 HEAD CODE Options NONE F1 00 to FF The TUP Heading Code indicates the group to which the message belongs as well as the name of the message e Use the 1 10 50 F4 key to select the rate at which the F2 and F3 willincrement decrement use the F2 and F3 keys to select the number Table 5 13 lists the TUP Head codes 3 ADDR SGNL Options NONE F1 CALLED F2 CALLER F3 Filter messages using address numbers e Select NONE F1 if you want the SunSet to search for all numbers Press CALLED F2 to look for a specific called number the destination of the call a After pressing the F2 key a new line ADDR NUMB will appear below b Enter the specific number by pressing releasing the SHIFT key and pressing the desired keypad number keys Press CALLER F3 to look for a specific caller number the origin of the call a After pressing the F3 key a new line ADDR NUMB will appear below b Enter the specific number by pressing r
316. serve Network Codes or Channel Data 2 7 Monitor a Voice Frequency Channel 2 8 Simple Talk Listen 2 9 Send a Tone 2 10 Place a Voice Call 2 11 Fractional E1 Testing 2 12 Using the Battery and AC Charger 2 13 Printing from the SunSet E10 2 13 1 Serial Port Settings 2 13 2 Configuring for Printing 2 14 Using the Remote Control Section 3 Advanced Applications 3 1 In service Dual Drop and Insert Thru 3 2 Testing a Terminal Multiplex 3 3 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex 3 4 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplex Chapter 5 SS 7 Section 1 SS 7 Technology Overview 1 1 SS 7 Network Architecture 1 2 SS 7 Protocol 1 3 SS 7 Messages 1 4 ISUP Message Example Section 2 SS 7 Analysis Menus 2 1 Configuration 2 2 SU Monitor SunSet E10 Version 2 37 128 41 41 44 46 49 NON o 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 Section 3 3 1 Chapter 6 Setup Filter Start Tracer View Print Tracer SU Analysis SS 7 Applications Monitoring the Tx Rx Links of a Network ISDN Section 1 1 1 Section 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 4 2 5 Section 3 Section 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 Chapter 7 ISDN Technology Overview Introduction ISDN Network Architecture ISDN Protocol ISDN Messages DASS2 Technology DASS2 Layer 2 DASS2 Frame Types DPNSS Technology ISDN Analysis Menus Configuration Start Link Call Setup Setup Filter Setup Filter for ETSI Setup Filter for DPNSS and DASS2 Start Tracer View Print Tracer RJ 48 Pin outs IS
317. severely errored seconds for the first 9 seconds Then at the tenth second all the counts will suddenly decrease back to the values they had before the error injection was started and the unavailable counter will suddenly increase by 10 Once acircuitis unavailable it becomes available only after 10 consecutive seconds without severe errors To continue the previ ous example if you turn the severe error injection off and then insert 1 or 2 errors during the next 5 seconds you will observe that the unavailable second counter continues to increase for the first 9 seconds while the error counter does not change Then at the tenth second the unavailable second counter suddenly decreases by 10 and the error counter increases by the 1 or 2 errors that you inserted You may wish to practice this for yourself so that you will not be confused while taking actual measurements The following F key options are shared by all Measurement Results screens PAGE UP F1 PAGE DN F2 These keys allows you to view each of the pages of available measurement results STOP START F3 Pressing STOP causes the SunSetto stop the test Pressing START restarts the measurement process from within this menu This function is useful if some undesired occurrence has rendered the current test invalid HOLDSCR CONTINU more F1 HOLDSCREEN freezes all of the measurement displays so they may be easily observed The Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 31 measurement co
318. silent time between digits pulses 6 6 Noise Analysis Measure noise using various parameters as follows e Signal to Noise e Noise Psophometric filter e Noise 3K Flat filter e Noise 1010 Hz filter Refer to Figure 3 58 for the Noise Analysis menu 22 09 44 NOISE MEASUREMENT MEASURE RX 1 T S 01 RESULTS Signal to Noise Noise Psophometric Noise 3K Flat Noise 1010 Hz S N PSOPHO 3K FLAT 1010Hz Figure 3 58 Noise Analysis Press a function key to begin one of the four measurements Signal to Noise F1 Noise Psophometric F2 Noise 3 K Flat F3 Noise 1010 Hz F4 e You may change the noise measurement at any time by choosing a different F key e Measurement results previously made will not be erased 3 84 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 e Only the measurement result for the current measurement type will be updated regularly 6 7 MFC SS 5 Dial Analysis The MFC SS 5 menu is shown in Figure 3 59 15 54 46 MFC SS 5 DIAL ANALYSIS MFC DIALING MFC TRACER MF CAS VIEW PRINT TRACER SS 5 DIALING SS 5 TRACER SS 5 VIEW PRINT TRACER VIEW MFC SS5 EXAMPLE Figure 3 59 MFC SS 5 Menu 6 7 1 MFC Dialing MFC MultiFrequency Compelled dialing allowstwo exchanges to send digits to each other in both the forward and backward direction Each exchange or register must receive a signal before it begins sending the next signal Compelled signalling operates as follows e Upon seizure the outgoing reg
319. sis In some decoded screens you will be offered a further BlTdeco de F4 After viewing the BITdeco screen press ENTER to return to the message See figure 7 17 Ch 7 GSM 7 17 04 59 18 RECEIVE MESG NO 1 LINE 1 99 05 02 05 45 55 370 I UI SAPI 00 TEI 07 NS 03 NR 68 MD Reserved MT 23 CHAN ACTV N CH 19 SDCCH 8 ACCH S 1 TS 5 CAUSE PAGE UP _PAGE DN bits HGFEDCBA 10000010 bits G E class Normal Event bits D A value handover access failure Figure 7 17 BlTdeco screens 2 1 3 A bis Traffic The A bis Traffic screen may be accessed through the A bis INTERFACE menu Figure 7 18showsthe A bis TRAFFIC Screen 7 18 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 A bis TRAFFIC LINE 1 LINE 2 RLM 2 RLM 14 DCM 1 DCM 12 CCM 1 CCM 16 TRXM 6 TRXM 14 TOTAL 10 TOTAL 56 RESUME RESTART Figure 7 18 A bis Traffic Screen This screen shows the A bis Interface traffic on both lines 1 amp 2 It separates this traffic into four management types Radio Link RLM Dedicated Channel DCM Common Channel CCM TRX TRXM This information is provided in a count or percentage format Pressing STATIST F4 in the screen above would convert all counts into percentages of the total Abis traffic 2 1 4 Layer 2 Traffic This screen provides records regarding the layer 2 traffic Layer 2 refers to the Logical Layer of the A bis protocol layers It controls the logical signalling links between the BSC and its BTSs Figure
320. ss the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking history lights and turn them off b Verify that the PAT SYNC LED is lit green 4 Enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS VIEW X 50 INFO a Verify the housekeeping bits Ch 8 X 50 8 13 Figure 8 12 Testing 64K X50 Frame from a 2M Multiplex 5 Escape out to the Main Menu a Enter TEST PATTERN b Select a BERT or USER pattern 6 Escape out to the Main Menu a Enter the MEASUREMENT RESULTS menu item b Verify that the circuit performs to your company s requirements for the service delivered e If necessary refer to the Measurement Results section Section 4 in Chapter 3 for definitions of the measurement parameters c Use PAGE UP F1 and PAGE DN F2 keys to view each of the measurement screens 7 When you have finished viewing the measurement results press the ESCAPE key to return to the Main Menu 8 14 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 2 Multiplexing a 64K X 50 Frame onto one T S of a 2Mbps Signal In E1 MUX Mode the SunSet E10 emulates a 64K X 50 to 2 Mbps multiplexer Use the following procedure to multiplex a single 64 kbps X 50 frame onto one timeslot of a 2 Mbps frame 1 From the Main Menu enter OTHER MEASUREMENTS X 50 ANALYSIS X 50 SETUP a At the top line X 50 select ENABLE F1 b Before continuing make sure that the reverse video X50 message is displayed at the top of the screen c Escape to the Main Menu 2
321. synchronous signals This network element must be configured to be a master timing source in relation to your signal lest you have slave to slave timing 3 10 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Master xchange or other timing source TXINSERT L1 Tx TxSOURCE TESTPAT XMT CLK LI Rx Figure 3 5 Loop Slave Timing Figure 3 6 depicts external timing External timing uses an external clock source to time the Tx INSERT signal The external clock source should be configured for the opposite line from the Rx DROP selection In this case Rx DROP and Tx INSERT are set for Line 2 Therefore XMT CLK is set for Line 1 L1 Rx Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 11 Master Exchange or other timing source TxINSERT L2 Tx TxSOURCE TESTPAT XMT CLK L1 Rx Figure 3 6 External Timing Notes 1 inthe past three graphics TXSOURCE has always been set for TESTPAT The XMT CLK setting is ignored if TX SOURCE is set for THRU In THRU both Lines 1 and 2 pass timing from Rx to Tx 2 For DROP INSERT testing XMT CLOCK must be set for the same line as Rx DROP INTERN F2 INTERN uses the internal timing of the test set This timing is not synchronized to the network You should use internal timing in loopback testing where synchronization is not required e If you set TX INSERT as L1 Tx and choose INTERN the L1 Tx signal will use the internal timing of the test set The L2 Tx signal will use the timing recov
322. t 7 HDB3 command 0 Active 1 Non active bit 8 Loop acknowledge 0 Acknowledge 1 No acknowledgment bit 9 Not defined bit 10 Local Fault 0 Active 1 Non active bit 11 Remote Line fault O Active 1 Non active bit 12 C Frame loss 0 Active 1 Non active bits 13 15 Spare 3 L1 Rx Options 1 15 17 31 Select the desired Line receive timeslot on which to receive C bits Press NEXT F1 or PREVIUS F2 as needed Because PCM 30 MFAS framing is required you may not select Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 59 timeslot 16 This screen also shows the received C bits for both Lines 1 amp 2 If C bits are not found on aline aC BIT NOT FOUND message will be displayed for that line 5 6 Histogram Analysis e View print either the current file or a previously saved one Figure 3 39 shows the Histogram Analysis menu which appears upon entering this item Note Interrupting your timed measurement to view results will result in a new histogram analysis beginning when you return to measuring HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS CURRENT HISTOGRAM SAVED HISTOGRAM Figure 3 39 Histogram Analysis Menu 5 6 1 Current Histogram Use this procedure 1 From the MAIN MENU enter the OTHER MEASUREMENTS menu 2 Select HISTOGRAM ANALYSIS 3 60 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 3 Select CURRENT HISTOGRAM e The Current Histogram menu will be displayed as depicted in Figure 3 40 4 The CURRENT date and time cor
323. t E1 port Receive from DATACOM BERT Tx E1 Figure 3 12 MUXTEST Configuration Tx E1 Figure 3 13 displays the configuration associated with the above graphic BERT Txis setto E1 and BERT Rxis setto RS232 Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 19 which is the DATACOM TYPE selected The DATACOM will transmit ALL ONES while the unused E1 channels will receive IDLE codes MEAS 2 31 03 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE E1 MUX El DATACOM Tx INST L1 Tx TYPE RS232 Rx DROP L1 Rx MODE DTE FRAMING PCM 30 CRC 4 YES BERT RxLVL 1 TERM EIT S Nx64K RxLVL 2 TERM Rx RS232 XMTCLK Tx El L1 Rx INTERN L2 Tx Figure 3 13 MUXTEST Configuration BERT TX E1 Figure 3 15 is analogous to Figure 3 13 However now the DATACOM will transmit out a test pattern and the E1 will receive it The unused E1 channels will receive IDLE codes BERT Rx is set to E1 and BERT Tx is set to RS232 the DATACOM TYPE selected 3 20 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 MULTIPORT Datacom Side 64 Kbps L1 Tx E1 Side 2 048Mbps ec Transmit out E1 port Receive from DATACOM BERT Tx RS232 Figure 3 14 MUXTEST Mode BERT TX RS232 Figure 3 15 displays the Configuration associated with the above graphic MEAS 2 31 03 TEST CONFIGURATION TEST MODE MUXTEST El DATACOM Tx INST L1 Tx TYPE RS232 Rx DROP L1 Rx MODE DTE FRAMING PCM 30 CRC 4 YES BERT RXLVL 1 TERM EI
324. t an unframed signal all ones 4 T S 16 AIS Options ENABLE F1 DISABLE F2 e The test set transmits all ones in timeslot 16 of all frames e T S 16 AIS overwrites the MFAS MultiFrame Alignment Signal e A test set or network equipment that receives this alarm will lose PCM 30 framing e This alarm should be transmitted only when the test set is configured for FAS framing e Itis not possible to transmit voice frequency signalling bits while sending this alarm because the T S 16 AIS signal overwrites all the channel associated signalling CAS information 7 6 VIEW TEST RECORD The SunSet E10 can store up to 26 Records and up to 2000 events Figure 3 81 displays the VIEW TEST RECORD screen MEAS 03 31 27 VIEW TEST RECORD RESULT RECORD UNLOCK START 98 11 23 11 48 31 STOP 98 11 23 12 10 14 NONE RECORD LOCK START 98 11 23 17 50 45 STOP 98 11 23 17 55 44 Press ENTER to View PAGE UP PAGE DN UN LOCK CLR ALL Figure 3 81 View Test Record The Measurement Results numbers are shown in accordance with the events and results that are in memory which are stored in accordance with the PRINT RESULT and PRINT EVENT 3 114 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 ENABLE to store events items in MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 Events are errors and alarms In addition to PAGE UP F2 and PAGE DN F3 the following additional F keys are available Press UN LOCK F3 to lock the record so it can not be deleted Press again to open th
325. t x 8000 frames per second 2 048 Mbps transmission rate Figure 10 6 FAS Framing Format MultiFrame Alignment Signal MFAS MFAS framing provides Channel Associated Signalling CAS to transmit A B C D bit supervision information for each channel This method uses the 32 timeslot frame format including timeslot O forthe FAS This method also uses timeslot 16 forthe MultiFrame Alignment signal and the Channel Associated Signalling It takes 16 frames to make up a MultiFrame When wetransmitthe MFAS frame we leave all of our individual FAS frames and framing information intact We merely assemble 16 FAS frames together dedicate timeslot 16 of the first frame to our MFAS framing information then dedicate timeslot 16 of the remaining 15 frames to our A B C D bits Refer to Figure 10 7 Frame 0 timeslot 16 8 bit MFAS signal Frames 1 15 timeslot 16 4 signalling bits channel x 30 channels 8 signalling bits frame timeslot 16 15 frames of timeslot 16 signalling Ch 10 Technology Overview 10 9 FRAME 0 FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME3 FRAME 15 ee ASN T eee gt TS 0 Ts 16 TA TSo Ts 6 sat TSo TS16 TS3 BITS BITS BITS fff at s f 7 8 123 445 67 8 123 4 5 67 8 ABC D A BC D ABC DIA BC D ojojoj o x x Channel 1 Channel 16 Channel 15 Channel 30 TS 1 TS 17 TS 15 TS 31
326. te Line Coding Signal Levels 2 048 Mbps Framing MFR2 DTMF DP 4 4 5 OONDARWN ONODWWNHH ot SunSet E10 0 Version 2 37 SunSet EO Version 2 37 Section 1 E1 Technology Overview 1 1 Introduction E1 Technology Overview covers the fundamental concepts in 2 048 Mbps technology sampling a signal converting this informa tion into a bitstream and dividing the bitstream into segments channels This section also touches upon the basics of signalling technologies like MFR2 and CAS 1 2 Technical Standards E1 transmission technology is defined by a number of technol ogy standards Such standards allow equipment designers and service providers to ensure that various pieces of equipment are compatible and that networks operate in a predictable reliable manner The following standards cover many of the important aspects of E1 transmission technology ITU G 703 Physical electrical characteristics of interfaces ITU G 704 Synchronous frame structures ITU G 706 Frame alignment and CRC ITU G 821 Error performance of an international connection ITU G 826 ITU M 550 M 2100 Bringing an international connection into service Q 140 Q 400 Consultthese standards when you need detailed information on particular aspects of E1 transmission technology 1 3 Basic Definitions Binary Data A signal which has been converted into a format of Os and 1s BitStream Binary Data which has been
327. tering the desired value from the keypad You may select any value from 50 to 3950 Hz e The default tone is set at 1020 Hz Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 67 e Press SEND F4 or press ENTER to send the tone 6 TONE LVEL dBm Options 60 to 3 dBm If you selected TONE as your INSERT TYPE you may choose the tone level here e The tone level may be changed by pressing the SHIFT key and entering the desired value from the keypad You may select any value from 60 to 3 dBm e Press MINUS F1 to achieve negative values e Press SEND F4 or ENTER to send the tone 7 Tx 1 A B C D Options IDLE F1 SEIZE F2 WINK F3 SEND F4 You may change the signalling bits that are transmitted with the associated transmit channel e These signalling bits will be transmitted only if the set is using MFAS PCM 30 framing Pressing IDLE F1 SEIZE F2 or WINK F3 will place that signal onto the A B C D position e Program the IDLE signal in the DIAL PARAMETERS setup To change these bits manually 1 Press release the SHIFT key and press the 1 and 0 keys as desired to enter the signalling bits 2 Press ENTER or SEND F4 to send the A B C D bits 8 LISTEN SIDE Options L1 RX F1 L2 RX F2 BOTH F3 Determine the line s on which you will listen e Listen on Line 1 F1 on Line 2 F2 or on both lines F3 The last three lines pertain to received data As the dash indicates they are for viewing only and may be neither
328. test results error and alarm events 1000 events available to screen view or print VOICE FREQUENCY CAPABILITY Tone generation 50 to 3950 Hz res 1Hz 3 to 60 dBmO res 1 dB Level and frequency measurement 50 to 3950 Hz 3 to 60 dBmO Talk and listen ABCD bits monitor amp transmit in selected channel Built in microphone for talk Monitor speaker for line 1 2 or both with volume control Bi directional full duplex hitless in service drop insert Simultaneously view bi directional 30 channels ABCD bits Programmable idle channel ABCD bits and code Programmable IDLE and SEIZE ABCD Companding A Law View channel data 1 byte long binary format DATACOM INTERFACE SS251 V 35 X 21 V 11 RS232 V 24 RS449 V 36 G 703 co directional DTE DCE Emulation 30 pin High Density Interface HDI connector to test set includes adapters for DCE and DTE V 35 X 21 V 11 RS232 V 24 RS449 V 36 G 703 co directional 3 pin CF connectors for Tx and Rx RS232 V 24 Async data rates 50 150 300 and 600 bps 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 14 4 19 2 and 38 4 kbps 6 7 8 data bits 1 2 stop bits odd even none parity RS232 V 24 Sync data rates 300 and 600 bps 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 14 4 19 2 38 4 48 56 and 64 kbps G 703 co directional data rate Nx64 kbps N 1 to 8 RS449DTE DCE datarates 300 bpsto 48 kbps Nx56 Nx64 N 1 to 32 V 35 DTE DCE data rates 300 bps to 48 kbps Nx50 6 Nx64 N 1 to 32 X 21 DTE DCE data rates 300 bps to
329. that is to be allowed for the line under test The SunSet makes the M 2100 550 calculations and reports whether the line passed or failed Refer to Figure 3 27 The definitions following pertain particu larly to this results screen Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 43 MEAS 00 34 29 ET 000 09 07 RT CONTINU FRM PCM 30 COD HDB3 LINE 1 M 2100 550 P F ES SES 27 00 00 0 00 29 00 00 0 00 31 00 00 0 00 33 00 00 0 00 PAGE DN STOP Figure 3 27 Line 1 M 2100 550 screen E1 Mode PERIOD This parameter identifies the date and time interval of each of the reported pass or fail results The period interval used in Figure 3 27 is 2 minutes You may change this interval in the OTHER FEATURES MEAS CONFIGURATION 2 Valid en tries may range from 00 to 99 minutes P F P F shows whether the test result was a pass or fail during the period ES This is the percentage of M 2100 Errored Seconds since the beginning of the test An errored second is any second with a Code Bit Frame Multiframe or CRC error SES This is the percentage of Severely Errored Seconds since the beginning of the test An M 2100 Severely Errored Second is any second with gt 10 3 bit error rate 10 3 code error excessive frame multiframe or CRC bit errors loss of frame loss of pattern synchronization or loss of signal LINE 1 BLOCK ERROR Screen A block is a group of consecutive bits associated with the path data messages are usually tr
330. the low speed datacom port of a 2M multiplex using the E10 in DATACOM mode 1 Turn your SunSet E10 on using the red POWER key located on the bottom left of the keypad 2 From the Main Menu enter TEST CONFIGURATION Select DATACOM Test Mode Configure the other settings as follows TYPE Select whichever datacom interface type you are using MODE DTE TEST RATE as desired TxDATACLK RECEIVE 3 When your settings are correct press ENTER 4 Connect the test set to the circuit as shown in Figure 9 18 9 26 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 MULTIPORT Figure 9 18 Testing the Datacom Port ofa 2M Multiplex e Verify the PAT SYNC LED is lit green e Press the HISTORY key to acknowledge any blinking lights and turn them off 5 From the Main Menu enter DATACOM INTERFACE a Check the status of the control leads CTS DSR and DCD should be active 6 Inject an error from the test set using the ERR INJ key e You can verify that this error returns to the test set by seeing if the BIT ERROR LED lights red e You may also wantto enter MEASUREMENT RESULTS fromthe MAIN MENU and make sure that an error has been recorded 7 You have just checked the low speed datacom port of the 2M multiplex Ch 9 Datacom 9 27 9 28 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Chapter 10 Technology Overview as Sectio E1 Technology Overview Introduction Technical Standards Basic Definitions Converting a Voice Signal 2 048 Mbps Data Ra
331. the set will synchronize only on Frame Alignment Signal FAS It will disregard MultiFrame Alignment Signal Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 5 Note If the framing and CRC 4 state of the received signal do not exactly match the framing and CRC 4 settings the SunSet will display Loss of Frame condition and may display loss of CRC DET Note that HDB3 is the default line code The line code can be configured for AMI or HDB3 in MAIN MENU OTHER FEA TURES MEAS CONFIGURATION 1 5 CRC 4 Options YES F1 NO F2 e Choosing YES allows the SunSetto measure CRC 4 errors onthe incoming signal and also to transmit the CRC 4 bits on the outgoing signal CRC 4 works with PCM 31 and PCM 30 fram ing only elf UNFRAME has been selected for framing the SunSet will force the CRC 4 configuration to NO 6 TEST RATE Options 2 048 F1 Nx64K F2 e 2 048M F1 configures the set for full rate testing e Nx64 F2 for fractional testing e If you are not certain about which one to choose press the F1 key for full rate testing at 2 048 Mbps e Upon pressing F2 you will immediately enter the fractional E1 SELECT TIME SLOT screen In this screen you may choose each timeslot for testing A sample screen is shown in Figure 3 3 3 6 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 ELECT TIME RECEIVE Eu CE Om 05 09 iL 13 21 29 EL CLR ALL Figure 3 3 Select a Timeslot This screen provides two methods for select
332. through 8 As shown in Figure 3 33 FAS is represented by 0011011 The first bit c or Si of these frames is reserved for international use It can be used for the CRC 4 cyclic redundancy check 4 when enhanced performance monitoring is required Therefore when CRC is enabled in the TEST CONFIGU RATION screen these bits depend upon the CRC calculation and should continually change between 0 and 1 When CRC 4 is not enabled these bits are set to 1 The odd frames do not contain the frame alignment signal The top row of these frames in Figure 3 33 shows the allocation of bits 1 8in these frames The first bit i is similar to the first bit in the even frames Bit 2 is set to 1 to avoid simulations of the frame alignment signal The third bit in the odd frames is used for the remote alarm indication For undisturbed operation this bit is set to 0 In alarm condition the third bit should be 1 Figure 3 33 represents an undisturbed condition The last 5 bits 4 8 are additional spare bits When they have no specific use as defined by CCITT G 704 these bits should be set at 1 for crossing an international border When you have set your framing at PCM 30 Multiframe there is a slight variation in the odd framing bits those not containing the frame alignment signal Bit 1 is used to transmit the 6 Bit CRC 4 multiframe alignment signal and 2 CRC 4 error indication bits The Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 51 CRC 4 multiframe alignment signal has the
333. time slots containing the E1 framing information e In FAS framing no access is granted to time slot 00 while in MFAS framing access to time slots 00 and 16 is denied 7 Use BOTH for the LISTEN SIDE menu item This will allow you to monitor both sides of the line e Adjust the volume to the desired level by using the VOL UP and VOL DN keys NOTE If you are not able to monitor the channel a Verify that you have frame sync The AUTO framing function does not work while you are in VF MEASUREMENTS Back out to the MAIN MENU and press the AUTO key to restart the auto framer if a valid frame pattern is not shown The test set will not perform the monitor function if framing is unavailable b Ifthis doesn t work try unplugging and replugging the receive cord This will positively verify that there is no recognizable framing at this moment 4 20 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 2 8 Simple Talk Listen Here is the simplest procedure for talking and listening onan E1 circuit The setup is illustrated in Figure 4 5 However instead of having a loopback at the far end of the circuit your setup may have another test set a channel bank a switch or other E1 terminating network element Use this procedure 1 Verify that the span is notin service This test will disrupt service for all of the channels that you are not using If a hitless drop insert is required you may wish to read Application 3 1 Dual Drop and Insert THRU Testing befor
334. tion NoRadioResourceAvailable NoHandoverNumberAvailable SubsequentHandoverFailure _TracingBufferFull NoRoamingNumberAvailable AbsentSubscriber CallBarred ForwardingViolation CUG Reject IllegalSS Operation SS ErrorStatus SS NotAvailable SS SubscriptionViolation SS Incompatibility UnknownAlphabet USSD Busy PW RegistrationFailure NegativePW Check NumberOfPw AttemptsViolation SubscriberBusyForMT SMS SM DeliveryFailure MessageWaitingListFull GSM Voice and TRAU Analysis SW258C Supports GSM 06 10 08 60 Drop Monitor 16 kbps GSM channel at 13 kbps voice rate to built in speaker Selectable sub channel 1 to 4 and time slot 1 to 31 Codification RPE LTP at 13 kbps Monitor Decode Programmable C1 to C21 T1 to T4 control bits Frame type decode of 16 kbps subchannel Voice Data Idle O amp M Signaling Unknown Identify Uplink or Downlink direction Identify 64 kbpsor 16 kbps signalling time slot THRU mode pass E1 amp TRAU for all sub channels amp Insert recordable encoded 13 Kps voice message Transmit mode user definable framing control bits amp Insert record able encoded 13 Kps voice message Tx Rx Test out of service amp in service monitor BERT G 821 on 16kbps subchannel Bit error rate ES SES EFS UAS LOSS Send test pattern on 16 kbps 2047 All 1 All O Alt 1010 12 10 SunSet E10 9 Version 2 37 MFR2C SS5 ANALYSIS amp CALL SET UP SW259 MFR2 Compelled Conforms to ITU T Q 400 series standards MFR2
335. tion of the test set and may result in damage if power is applied 4 Do not immerse the set in water or expose the set to rain Section 2 Front View Description Refer to Figure 2 1 SunSet E10 Front View on the following page for the front view of the SunSet E10 2 1 Keys Most SunSet keys perform two distinct operations The white label above the key indicates what function will be performed if the key is pressed by itself The orange label below the key shows what function will be performed if the SHIFT lock key is pressed first and the SHIFT indicator is displayed in the upper left hand corner of the screen The SHIFT lock key should not be pressed simultaneously with another key Instead the SHIFT lock key should be pressed and then released Atthis point a SHIFT indicator in reverse video will appear in the upper left hand corner of the screen Any other key can now be pressed and released and the SunSet will perform the function indicated by the orange label If the keys are not behaving as expected check the SHIFT indicator If the SHIFT indicator upper left hand corner of the screen indicates the wrong shift status simply press the SHIFT lock key again Ch 2 Test Set Description 2 1 SIGNAL OPCM 31 OAIS O POWER 4 OCODE ERR OPCM 30 OALARM LOW BAT OERROR OCRCDET Opatsync oO S SS SS O SIGNAL PCM 31 OBIT ERROR Da o c 2CCODEERR PCM 30 QAIS co lo ERROR OC
336. ultiplex SunSet E10 Version 2 37 Testing 4 44 Test SunSet Acceptance Test 11 3 Test a 64Kbps X 50 Signal from a X 50 MUX 8 21 Test a Multiplex 64Kbps X 50 frame to 2Mbp X 50 8 18 TEST CONFIGURATION 3 3 Test Pattern 3 23 Send Test Pattern 3 22 standard 3 22 User Test Patterns 3 24 X 50 Test Patterns 3 28 TEST RATE 3 6 Testing Datacom point to point 9 23 Testing a 64K X 50 Frame 8 12 Testing new circuit 4 6 TESTPAT 3 5 3 65 THRU 3 5 time 3 122 time of day 3 32 Time slots 10 7 Timed Test 4 16 Timeslot 4 26 timing Datacom 9 13 TOUT 3 100 Tracer ISDN 6 26 SS 7 5 23 Traffic A bis 7 18 LAyer 2 7 19 Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit 7 2 Transmission Basics 9 2 TRAU 7 2 7 7 TRAU Frames 7 7 TRIBU 8 6 Troubleshooting 11 1 TRX management 7 12 Index TRX Message Types 7 14 TRXM 7 19 TUP 5 4 Filtering 5 14 Heading Code 5 15 TX BNC connector 2 11 TX jack 2 11 Tx SOURCE 3 5 3 15 TYPE 3 15 3 18 U U frame 6 5 UA 6 8 UAS 3 37 E bit 3 42 UI 6 8 Unacknowleged Operation 6 3 unit interval 3 64 Unit Interval Ul 9 17 Unpacking 1 1 Up Arrow 2 6 User Number create a user number 3 89 User Test Patterns 3 24 Creating a test pattern 3 25 Editing a user pattern 3 26 Viewing 3 24 V V 35 9 5 9 23 V 35 Pin out 9 18 Version 3 127 VERSION OPTION 3 127 VF Channel Access 3 65 DTMF MF DP CAS Analy sis 3 80 DTMF MFR2 DP Dialing 3 72 Noise Analysis 3 84 Speed Dialing 3 74 View CAS 3 69 VF Measure
337. ultiport Since you have selected the datacom type for BERT on TEST CONFIGURATION the pattern received on the multiport should be displayed in this screen For Figure 4 25 you should see 511 Even if you have selected only a few Nx64 timeslots in TEST CONFIGURATION expectto see the datacom pattern on all timeslots here 11 In the previous steps you have verified that the SunSet is receiving a proper signal on both E1 Line receive jacks as well as on the multiport Next you must verify that the SunSet is inserting the datacom s signal on the selected timeslots On Line 1 the SunSet E10 transmits the signal received on L1 Rx but it inserts the signal received on the multiport on the Nx64K timeslots selected in TEST CONFIGURATION For this 4 52 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 reason Equipment 2 is the best place to check the SunSet s insert capability Equipment 2 should receive the Datacom s pattern here 511 on the selected timeslots and Equipment 1 s pattern here ALL ZEROES on all the other timeslots 12 If Test Equipment 2 is not capable of displaying its received data you will need to plug a second SunSet E10 into the monitor jack Turn the second E10 on and enter TEST CONFIGURA TION Configure this second E10 as follows TEST MODE E1 INST L1 TX RX DROP L1 RX TXSRC TESTPAT FRAMING As required CRC 4 As required TEST RATE 2 048M RXLVL 1 MONITOR RXLVL 2 MONITOR XMTCLK INTERN 13 Connect L
338. unSet E10 Version 2 37 Index Symbols BREAK 3 72 AS 3 33 3 46 BBE 3 46 DGRM 3 34 EFS 3 35 ES 3 35 SES 3 36 UAS 3 37 CRC RATE 3 34 LVL 3 35 WANDR 3 37 LVL 3 36 WANDR 3 37 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 keys 2 8 0000 3 23 1 3 3 23 1 4 3 23 1 8 3 23 1010 3 23 1111 3 23 15V NimH 2 11 20ITU 3 23 2e20 3 23 2e23 3 23 3 24 3 23 6 8 1 Edit Emulator 3 97 A A B C D E F keys 2 8 A Interface 7 23 Alink 5 2 A bis Interface 7 18 A bis Monitor 7 11 A bis Setup Filter 7 11 A bis Traffic 7 18 A interface Filter 7 22 Index A H bits 8 10 A Map Configuration 7 21 A MAP Interface Tracer 7 25 A Map Interface 7 20 Abis GSM 7 6 Abis rate 7 10 AC Battery Charger 2 9 Acceptance Test Procedure 11 3 Acknowledged Operation 6 3 Addressing 10 13 AIS 3 23 3 113 AIS LED 2 10 LED 2 10 AISS 3 33 Alarm Alarm Generation 3 112 ALARM Light 2 10 Alarms AIS 3 113 FAS DISTANT 3 113 MFAS DISTANT 3 113 T S 16 AIS 3 114 AMI 3 104 10 3 Applications Accept a New Circuit 4 6 Checking for Frequency Synchronization 4 11 Connecting the Cords 4 1 Emulating a Terminal Multiplex 4 46 Emulating an Add Drop Multiplexer 4 49 Fractional E1 Testing 4 26 In Service Dual Drop and Insert THRU Testing 4 41 ISDN 6 30 ISDN Call Setup DASS2 i DPNSS 6 35 ISDN Call Setup ETSI 6 30 ISDN Monitoring 6 37 Measure Signal Level 4 13 Monitor a Voice Frequency Channe 4 19 Monitor an In Service C
339. unt is still proceeding but the counts are updated only inmemory You may now read the previous counts clearly When you have finished viewing the screen press the CONTINU F1 key to view your updated measurement results LOCK UNLOCK more F2 Press LOCK to disable the keypad The measurement process continues as usual but any keypad strokes have no affect on the test set This is useful if you are running a long term test and do not wish to have the test disturbed When LOCK is pressed an indicator appears in reverse video at the top of the LCD display Pressing the F2 key again UNLOCK will re enable the test set s keypad Using the LOCK UNLOCK key will not disturb any of your measurement results In addition to the actual measurement data the following information is displayed in the upper portion of the measurement screens CURRENT TIME The current time of day is displayed in the upper right hand corner of the screen ET Elapsed Time Elapsed Time is the time that has passed since the test was started or restarted RT Remaining Time Remaining Time is the time that remains until the end of testing The factory default condition is that the test runs continuously until the user stops it For this reason CONTINU is displayed in the RT field to denote a continuous test However inthe OTHER FEATURES MEAS CONFIGU RATION 1 menuitem you may specify the amount of test time In this case the remaining time will count do
340. ure Fill In Signal Unit FISU As named FISUs are used to fill in when there is no traffic on the link This keeps the link aligned A description of each field is shown in Figure 5 5 5 6 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 ex f so es as _ gt FIRST BIT RECEIVED Backward Sequence Number Indication of the last sequence number Backward Indicator Bit Bit inverted for negative acknowledgment of the BSN message Forward Sequence Number Indication of the message sent Forward Indicator Bit Bit is inverted to indicate retransmission of negative acknowledgment message LI Length Indicator CK Cyclic Redundancy Check 2 octets Figure 5 5 FISU Message Structure 1 4 ISUP Message Example ISUP messages are used to provide circuit related control information In general the most basic application used today for ISUP is call setup The IAM Initial Address Message is the first message sent for setting up a call Subsequently there are a number of other messages being exchanged to connect and eventually release the call Figure 5 6 shows the complete call process Ch 5 SS 7 5 7 Legend IAM Initial Address Message OT Continuity Chec ACM Address Completion Message ANM Answer Message REL Release RCL Release Complete Figure 5 6 ISUP Messages Used in a Typical Phone Call
341. use Access Grant CHannel Downlinks access to use AGCH network using a Stand alone Dedicated Control Channel SDCHH Figure 7 3 CCH Functions 1 3 GSM Protocol The GSM signaling protocol uses a combination of GSM modified ISDN and SS7 standards between the Um Abis andA interfaces Figure 7 4 GSM Signaling Protocol shows the differ ent standards that govern the physical data link and network layers of GSM 7 4 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 aoealu y aoe Lalu SIGY soeuaju wN YOMAN Figure 7 4 GSM Signalling Protocol 7 5 Ch 7 GSM As seen TDMA frames are sent at the physical layer between the Mobile Station and the Base Transceiver Station via the Um interface At the Data Link Layer a modified version of the Link Access Protocol D channel LAPD m is used Layer 3 GSM Signalling protocol includes the Call Management CM Mobility Management MM and Radio Resource Management RR A table of these protocols and functions is shown below allManagement CM Handles Call Control CC Sup plementary Services amp Short Message Services SMS obility Management Manages roaming update registra MM tion security and authorization adioResources RR Controls setup maintenance amp termination of radio and fixed channels Figure 7 5 Layer 3 Protocols The GSM signaling protocols CM MM and RR are passed through the BTS transparently and via the A bis interface However in so
342. ween 1 minute and 9999 minutes e To change the interval press the SHIFT lock key to display the SHIFT indicator e Enter the desired numbers from the keypad e Press SHIFT lock again to remove the SHIFT indicator LAST Choose LAST F2 if you would like the printer to print out a result only at the conclusion of a test PRINT EVENT ENABLE Choose ENABLE F1 if you would like the printer to print out a result every time an error or alarm condition is reported 4 34 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 DISABLE Choose DISABLE F2 if you do not want the printer to print out a result every time an error or alarm condition is reported e Note that each result can only be printed once The printer buffer is then emptied 5 Confirm that the DIP switch settings or other switch settings on your printer correspond to those of the SunSet s serial port above e If you have changed the DIP switch settings switch the printer off and then on before continuing 6 Ensure that the printer is powered up and on line 7 Ensure that the SunSet is not displaying its GRAPHIC screen This screen is non printable 8 Press the PRN SCRN print screen key on the SunSet s keypad 9 The SunSet s current screen should now print e If it doesn t check the connections configuration and switch settings 2 14 Using the Remote Control The SunSet E10 comes with an optional remote control feature Controlling the SunSet through the remote control is
343. will log the user off e Talk Listen is not supported remotely Note that you can use a variety of asynchronous communica tions in addition to modems over the public switched telephone network Direct local connection dedicated line and packet are other communication alternatives Ch 4 Applications 4 39 Using Remote Control from Windows 95 Here s a brief rundown on how to get your SunSet to work by remote control when you are operating out of Windows 95 1 From Accessories start HyperTerminal a Click to open the Hyper Terminal window 2 Double click on Hypertrm 3 At New Connection enter Sunrise Remote a Select an icon b Click on Ok 4 In the Phone Number screen click on the down arrow of the Connect using box a Select the modem or com port number you are using note if you are connected directly to a com port you will need to use a Null Modem Adaptor b Click Ok 5 Atthe Port Settings configure the settings as follows matching those of your SunSet as set in the General Config screen Bits per second 9600 Data or Char bits 8 Parity none Stop bits 1 Flow Control none a Click Ok when done 6 In the HyperTerminal screen click on VIEW IMPORTANT 7 Highlight and click on FONT 8 Highlight Terminal a Set the Style and Size as you wish 9 Type LOG ON 10 Remote control should work 4 40 SunSet E10 4 Version 2 37 Section 3 Advanced Applications 3 1 In
344. wn to zero during the measurement FRM The configured framing is displayed here CLK SR The clock source is reported here RCV The received pattern is displayed here 3 32 SunSet E10 p Version 2 37 XMT The test pattern the SunSetis transmitting is displayed here INPUT This shows your receive level bridge monitor terminate TEST R The test rate is shown here 4 1 E1 Results and General Definitions E1 Mode Measurement Results contain nine pages of data Page 1 which appears when you first enter Measurement Results is the status page This screen simply displays the status of each line In large font a status message is displayed for both lines 1 and 2 These messages for example NO ERRORS FRM LOSS SIG LOSS ERROR DET represent the condition of the line during testing MEASUREMENT RESULTS Definitions The following measurements are displayed inthe E10 screens The definitions are listed here in alphabetical order IMPORTANT NOTE Each measurement is proprietary to its screen e g biterror refers to E Biterrors inthe E BIT screen and to all Summary errors in the SUMMARY screen etcetera AISS Alarm Indication Signal Seconds is a count of the number of seconds in which AIS was detected AS This is the count of Available Seconds since the beginning of the test Available Seconds equals the length of the total test time minus any Unavailable Seconds AS This is the percentage of Available Seconds sinc
345. z 14 46 33 84 34 04 34 24 34 44 34 46 34 84 35 04 RESTART Figure 3 66 SS 5 View Tracer 6 7 7 View MFC SS 5 Example e View an example of a stored MFC or SS 5 message e Press the MFC F1 to view a MFC message e Press the SS 5 F2 key to view a SS 5 message An example of each is shown in Figures 3 67 and 3 68 17 42 29 MFC TRACER LINE 1 forward LINE 2 backward ABCD 1011 idle apcp 1011 idle ABCD 0011 seiz gt lt ABCD 1111 ac MFR2 03 as lt MFR2 bOl next MFR2 06 gt lt MFR2 bOl next MFR2 03 er lt MFR2 bOl next MFR2 f15 end _ MFC SS 5 Figure 3 67 MFC Example Ch 3 Menu Descriptions 3 95 17 48 01 SS 5 ANALYSIS LINE 1 send LINE 2 receive 2400hz seize gt lt 2600hz proceed KP1 start gt 0 no 0 1 no 1 ST stop lt 2400hz answer lt 2600hz busy 2400hz ack gt 24 26hz clr gt lt 24 26hz release MFC SS 5 Figure 3 68 SS 5 Example 6 8 SIGNALLING EMULATOR e Program up to 10 different signalling sequences e Save 50 events in each signalling sequence e The Signalling Emulator menu contains two items EDIT EMU LATOR and START EMULATION VF CHANNEL ACCESS VF MEASUREMENTS VIEW LINE 1 amp 2 CAS DIAL PARAMETERS DIMF MFR2 DP DIALING DIMF MF DP CAS ANALYSIS NOISE ANALYSIS MFC SS 5 DIAL ANALYSIS SIGNALLING EMULATOR Figure 3 69 VF Channel Access Menu 3 96 SunSet E10 Version 2 37 06 45 12 SIGNALLI

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Corsair 2GB DDR2 Memory Module  Product Manuals  TIP-VBY1HS Transmitter Core User Manual  DSC-S2100  Zanussi ZENB 2625 Instruction Booklet  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file